Chess Strategy by Edward Lasker

Ncv, 1924 Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2010 http://www.archive.org/details/chessstrategyOOIask CHESS STRATEGY CHESS STRATEGY BY EDWARD LASKER TRANSLATED BY J. DU MONT FIFTH EDITION PHILADELPHIA DAVID McKAY COMPANY 1921 5 First Published Second Edition, Revised .... January, 191 February, 1917 1918,1920,1921 Reprinted Printed in England at The Ballantyne Press Spottiswoode, Ballantyne S Co. Ltd. Colchester, London & Eton CONTENTS IX Translator's Preface Author's Preface xi PART I PAGE - C9AI*. I. Introductory I. II. II. Rules of the Game Notation ' 5 Hints for Beginners 7 9 Elementary Combinations Simple Calculation ^° Complications ^^ III. General Principles of Chess Strategy . . • [V. ^° 20 The Opening Development of the Pieces On Losing Moves Examples of Practical Play 21 21 .26 Pawn Play Pawn Skeleton 26 27 29 52 62 The Centre A. King's Pawn Games B. Queen's Pawn Games C. Irregular Openings V. . ^3 64 7° The End-game End-games with Pieces Pawn Endings Mixed Endings End-games from Master-play i? ^7 i8 ^^ Introductory Balance of Attack and Defence Mobility -87 .... ... -97 Teichmann-Blackburne (Berlin, 1897) Ed. Lasker-Rotlewi (Hamburg, 1910) Blackburne-Schlechter (Vienna, 1898) 98 . . - . . . .100 .102 —— CHESS STRATEGY VI PAGB Bird-Janowski (Hastings, 1895) VI. The Steiner-Forgacz (Sz^kesfehervdr, 1907) Charousek-Heinrichsen (Cologne, i 106 108 Middle Game 109 109 General Remarks Evolution of the Pawn Skeleton Objects of Attack . III III 112 . " Backward " Pawns On Fixing a Weakness Weaknesses in a Pawn Position "3 , Breaking up the King's Side 114 115 115 . Doubled Pawns Illustrations V. Scheve-Teichmann (Berlin, 1907) Marshall-Bum (Ostend, 1907) Manoeuvres of the Pieces Open Files and Diagonals 116 117 119 121 Example Fred. Lazard-Ed. Lasker (Paris, 1914) 123 PART II ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES FROM MASTER TOURNAMENTS 1. Tartakower-Burn (Carlsbad, 1911) 126 . Leonhardt-Marshall (San Sebastian, 191 1) 3. Spielmann-Prokes (Prag, 1908) 4. Tarrasch-Capablanca (San Sebastian, 1911) 4a. Howell-Michell (Cable Match, 1907) 46. X. w. Y 2. 5. Grifi&th-Gunston (London, 1902) Salwe-Marshall (Vienna, 1908) 10. Teichmann-Amateurs (Glasgow, 1902) 11. Schlechter-Janowski (Paris, 1900) . . Teichmann-Rubinstein (Carlsbad, 1911) Teichmann-Schlechter (Carlsbad, 191 1) 14. Spielmann-Tarrasch (San Sebastian, 19 12) 15. Aljechin-Niemzowitsch (Petrograd, 1914) 16. Yates-Gunsberg (Chester, 19x4) 12. 13. 17. Berlin-Riga (1908-1909) 17a. Maroczy-Berger (Vienna, 1908) 132 134 135 135 138 Mason-Gunsberg (New York, 1889) 7. Marshall-Tarrasch (Hamburg, 1910) 8. Blackburne-Em. Lasker (Petrograd, 191 4) 6. 9. 129 141 144 147 150 154 159 163 167 170 174 177 180 180 CONTENTS Vll NO. 1 8. Em. Lasker-Capablanca (Petrograd, 191 4) Ed. Lasker-Janowski (Scheveningen. 1913) 20. Ed. Lasker-Englund (Scheveningen, 1913) 21. Ed. Lasker-Aljechin (Scheveningen, 1913) 22. Forgacz-Tartakower (Petrograd, 1909) 23. Yates-Esser (Anglo-Dutch Match, 191 4) 24. Atkins-Barry (Cable Match, 1910) 25. Em. Lasker-Tarrasch (Munich, 1908) 26. Capablanca-Blanco (Havanna, 191 3) 27. Niemzowitsch-Tarrasch (San Sebastian, 1912) 28. Alapin-Rubinstein (Wilna, 1912) 19. , . . Teichmann-Spielmann (Leipzig, 1914) Tarrasch-Spielmann (Mannheim, 1914) 31. John-Janowski (Mannheim, 191 4) 32. Ed. Lasker-Mieses (Scheveningen, 1913) 29. 184 188 193 196 198 200 204 206 209 211 215 218 37. Marshall-Capablanca 220 223 225 227 229 232 234 236 38. 241 30. • 33. Barasz-Mieses (Breslau, 1912) 34. Em. Lasker-Niemzowitsch (Petrograd, 1914) 35. Reti-Tartakower (Vienna, 1910) 36. Forgacz-E. Cohn (Petrograd, 1909) (New York, 1909) Rotlewi-Teichmann (Carlsbad, 1911) 380. Rubinstein-Teichmann (Vienna, 1908) 242 Rotlewi-Rubinstein (Lodz, 1907) 40. Rubinstein-Capablanca (San Sebastian, 191 1) 41. Niemzowitsch-Tarrasch (Petrograd, 191 4) 41a. Em. Lasker-Bauer (Amsterdam, 1889) 42. Capablanca-Aljechin (Petrograd, 1913) 43. Capablanca-Bernstein (Petrograd, 1914) 44. Dus Chotimirski-Vidmar (Carlsbad, 1 911) 45. Rubinstein-Spielmann (Pistyan, 191 2) 46. Thomas-Ed. Lasker (London, 1912) 47. Tartakower-Asztalos (Budapest, 191 3) 39. . . . . . 47a. Tartakower-Spielmann (Vienna, 1913) 476. X v. Y 48. Blackbume-Niemzowitsch (Petrograd, 1914) Table of Openings A. King's Pawn Games B. Queen's Pawn Games C. Irregular Openings Index .... 246 249 252 254 255 258 261 263 267 270 270 270 274 278 278 279 279 a8i TRANSLATOR'S PREFACE As the first edition of Edward Lasker's Chess Strategy was appearance, exhausted within a comparatively short time of its improving and altering of task the the author set himself to all intents and the work to such an extent that it became co-operating with of privilege the had I book. purposes a new and was in conedition, second that on degree him to a sHght of work amount tremendous the appreciate to able sequence I say voluntarily, to do himself upon took voluntarily he ; because his publishers, anxious to supply the strong for the book, wished to reprint it as it stood. demand A little later I undertook to translate this second edition & Only a few months Sons. into English for Messrs. Bell had elapsed, the tournaments at Petrograd, Chester, and Mann- heim had taken place, several new discoveries had been made, and it is the greatest testimony to Edward Lasker's inde- am able to say fatigable devotion to the Art of Chess that I but of edition, second the that this is not a translation of preface, contains new a It book. is practically a new what a chapter for beginners, a new introduction, new variations. Furthermore, a large number of nev/ games have taken the place of old ones. I have no doubt that any chess player who will take the trouble to study Chess Strategy will spend many a pleasurable Incidentally new vistas will be opened to him, and his hour. playing strength increased to a surprising degree. The author says in his preface that he appeals to the inteland not the memory of his readers. In my opinion, too, the student should above all try to improve his judgment ligence of position. Than the playing over of games contested by experts I can hardly imagine a greater or purer form of enjoyment. Yet I must at the outset sound a note of warning against its X CHESS STR.\TEGY being done superficiaUy. and with a feverish expectation of something happening. Every move or combination of moves should be carefuUy weighed, and the student should draw his own conclusions and compare them with what actually happens in the game under examination. This applies particularly to some of the critical positions diagrams in the course of the exposition of the several games. set out m The reader would derive the greatest possible benefit from a prolonged study of such positions before seeking to know how the games proceed. After having formed his own opinion about the ments of a particular position, he should compare the result with the sequel in the game in question, and thus find out where his judgment has been at fault. The deeper study of the theory of the openings is of course a necessity to the student who wishes to become an expert but the development of his judgment must precede it To him Griffith & WTiite's admirable book. Modern Chess Openings, wiU be a perfect mine of information. There are thousands of variations, and in most of them the actual game in which they were first tried by masters is named, thus adding to the interest and value of the work. I must not omit to mention the invaluable help afforded me by my friend Mr. John Hart, to whom my warmest thanks are due. JULIUS DU MONT. AUTHOR'S PREFACE The large majority of chess players who would like to improve their game, have not the necessary opportunity of pitting themselves against players of master-strength, or at least of obtaining the desired instruction from personal intercourse It is for such players that the present work is The books on which the learner has to rely hardly ever serve his purpose, being mostly Uttle more than a dis- with them. intended. of numberless opening variations, which cannot be understood without prehminary studies, and consequently only make for confusion. In the end the connection between the various hues of play may become clear, after the student has made an exhaustive study of the subject, but jointed tabulation very few would have either the time or the inclination for such prolonged labour. Therefore another shorter and less empirical way must be found in which to acquire the understanding of sound play. My system of teaching differs from the usual ones, in that it sets down at the outset definite elementary principles of chess strategy by which any move can be gauged at its true value, thus enabUng the learner to form his own judgment In my opinion it as to the manoeuvres under consideration. principles, and strategical follow such essential to is absolutely in themselves principles are such that as to assert so far I go conduct of correct game a development and for the sufficient of chess. Even though instruction in chess is possible on very general hues alone, yet I think it advisable and indeed necessary to explain the application of such principles to the various phases of each game of chess. Otherwise the learner might unduly delay his progress, and lose valuable time in finding out for himself certain essentials that could more profitably be pointed out to him. CHESS STRATEGY xii With regard to the way in which I have arranged my subject and the form of its exposition in detail, I have thought out the following plan. After discussing at length the leading principles underlying sound play, I have first treated of the openings, in which such principles are of even more deciding influence than in any other stage of the game, as far as could be done on broad hnes without having to pay attention to middle and end-game considerations. proceeded as follows, by taking as my starting-point the is formed in the opening, and round which the pieces should group themselves in logical fashion. As a consequence of the pawns having so little mobihty, this " pawn skeleton " often preserves its shape right into the end-game. Applying the general strategical principles to the formation of the pawn skeleton, the learner acquires the understanding of the leading idea underlying each opening without having to burden his memory. Not only that, he will also be able to find a correct plan of development when confronted vsith unusual forms of opening. The most important result of this system of teaching is that the learner does not lose his way in a maze of detail, but has in view at the very outset, the goal which the many possible variations of the openings are intended to reach. Before I could proceed to the discussion of the middle game, I found it necessary to treat of the principles governing the end-game. For in most cases play in the middle game is influenced by end-game considerations. Here also it has been my endeavour as far as possible to reduce my subject to such I " pawn skeleton " which principles as are generally applicable. Finally, as regards the middle game, to of Part n is devoted, I have again which the whole made the handling of pawns, the hardest of all problems of strategy, the startingpoint for my deliberations. I have shown at length how the various plans initiated by the various openings should be developed further. To ensure a thorough imderstanding of the middle game, I have given a large number of games taken from master play, with numerous and extensive notes. Thus the student has not to rely only on examples taken haphazard fiom their context, but he will at the same time see how AUTHOR'S PREFACE xiii middle-game positions, which give opportunities for special forms of attack, are evolved from the opening. easily underIt has been my desire to make the subject to appeal and entertaining, time same standable and at the sense common their to than readers my of less to the memory too strayed have to not that way in hope I and intelligence. from the ideal I had in mind when wTiting this book, namely, to apply to chess the only method of teaching which art, has proved productive in all branches of science and far that is, the education ol individual thought. satisfaction If I have succeeded in this, I shall have the the wide of having contributed a httle to the furthering, in circles in which it is played, of the game which undoubtedly makes the strongest appeal to the intellect. EDWARD LASKER. CHESS STRATEGY PART I CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTORY I. Rules of the Game A GAME of chess is played by two opponents on a square board White and Black squares arranged The forces on each side comprise sixteen units, alternately. namely a King, a Queen, two Rooks, two Bishops, two consisting of sixty-four All units move according to Pawns. in their mobility is the difference the different laws, and the fighting power they of and value relative their of criterion contribute towards achieving the ultimate aim, namely, the Knights, and eight capture of the opposing King. Before I can explain what is meant by the capture of the King, I must set out the rules of the game in full. Diagram i shows the position the forces take up for the The board is so placed that there is a white square contest. The Rooks take up their posiat the top left-hand corner. tions at the comer squares, and next to them the Knights. Next to those again are the Bishops, and in the centre the King and Queen, the White Queen on a White square, and the Black Queen on a Black square. The eight pawns occupy the ranks immediately in front of the pieces. From this initial position, White begins the game in which the players must move alternately. The Rook can move happens to be on, to any other square A The pieces move in the following way from any square it : — CHESS STRATEGY 2 which it can reach in a straight hne, either perpendicularly or horizontally, unless there is another piece of the same colour in the way, in which case it can only move as far as the square immediately in front of that piece. If it is an opposing piece which blocks the way, he can move on to the square that piece The piece thus captured is occupies, thereby capturing it. removed from the board. The Bishop can operate along either of the diagonals of which the square on which he is standing forms part. A Bishop on a White square can therefore never get on to a Black one. ^ WB B H B H WM ^« ^" WM 9. ^^. •" ^^g^;^ Diag. I. The Queen commands both the straight and the oblique lines which start from the square she stands on, and therefore unites the power of both Rook and Bishop in her movements. The King has similar powers to the Queen, but curtailed, inasmuch as he can only move one step at a time. He therefore only controls one neighbouring square in any direction. The Knight plays and captures alternately on White and Black squares, and only reaches such squares as are nearest to him without being immediately adjacent his move is as it were composed of two steps, one square in a straight line, and one in an oblique direction. Diagram 2 will illustrate this.^ ; ^ I should like to quote my friend Knight's move, though it may not be on a corner square of a rectangle into the comer diagonally opposite. Mr. John Hart's clever definition of the If one conceives a Knight as standing three squares by two, he is able to move new : INTRODUCTORY 3 The pawns only move straight forward, one square at a time, except at their first move, when they have the option In contrast to the pieces, the pawns of moving two squares. do not capture in the way they move. They move straight forward, but they capture diagonally to the right and left, again only one square, and only forward. Therefore a pawn can only capture such pieces or pawns as occupy squares same colour as the square on which it stands. If, in moving two squares, a pawn traverses a square on which it could have been captured by a hostile pawn, that pawn has the right to capture it, as if it had moved only one square. This However, this capture can only is called capturing en passant. of the Diag. 2. be effected on the very next move, otherwise the privilege of capturing en passant is lost. If a player succeeds in reaching the eighth rank with one his pawns he is entitled to call for any piece of higher grade, of with the exception of the King, in place of such pawn. Each move in a game of chess consists of the displacement of one piece only, with the exception of what is termed " castling," in which the King and either Rook can be moved simultaneously by either player once in a game. In castling, the King moves sideways to the next square but one, and the Rook to which the King is moved is placed on the square which the King has skipped over. Castling is only allowed if neither the King nor the Rook concerned have moved before, and if there is no piece between the Rook and King. « CHESS STRATEGY 4 Diagram 3 shows a position in which White has castled on Castling is the Queen's side, and Black on the King's side. a square pass over must castling in King not permitted if the to be said is (or piece) square a piece. hostile A attacked by a " attacked " when the square (or the piece) is in the line of action of a hostile unit. or protected A square (or a piece) is said to be an opposing piece occupying that covered square (or capturing the piece) could itself be captured. When attacking the King it is customary to call " check," if to notify the opponent of the fact ; for the attack on the King ~m~mrm^m ill 4 * ili **""""" * ^ „„„„ ™ wm^P ^^%^ i mm, X X * 1 §M, '^m p mi^W.^^ H m. 2 Diag. 3. must be met in some way or other. This can be done by capturing the attacker or by interposing a piece (this is not possible in case of attack by a Knight or a pawn), or lastly by moving the King to a square which is not attacked. The lattei must not be done by castling. If it is impossible by any of the three methods above mentioned to avoid the attack upon the King, the King is said to be checkmated, and the game is ended. If a King is unable to move, though not attacked, and none of his remaining pieces can move, the King is said to be stalemated, and the game is drawn. A game is also drawn when neither side has sufficient material left to enforce a mate. (Compare page 63.) If a player resigns his game before he is actually mated. INTRODUCTORY 5 he acknowledges that in the end mate is unavoidable, and the game is counted as a loss to him. A game is null and void if it is shown that a mistake The same appHes was made in setting the board or men. and number position the game the of course the when in accordance in not manner in a altered been have pieces of with the proper course of play, and the latter cannot be reconstructed from the point where the error was made. pieces he is If a player having the move touches one of his under compulsion to move it if he touches a hostile piece he ; must capture it, provided that the piece can be properly moved This rule is of no effect if the piece or captured in either case. so touched cannot be moved or captured, as the case may So long as the hand has not left the piece to be moved, the If a player latter can be placed on any accessible square. be. touches a piece with the sole object of adjusting its position, he must apprise his opponent of his intention by saying " J'adoube ' ' beforehand. It is best to move the King first when the Rook is moved first, and unless the King is played almost simultaneously, a doubt might arise whether castHng or a Rook's move only was intended. must be If a player has castled illegally. Rook and King If castling. moved back, and the King must make another move, if there A If not, any other move can be played. is a legal one. retract must piece a \yith move illegal an makes player who same that move, and make another one if possible with the should game the on, later noticed only is mistake If the piece. be restarted from the position in which the error occurred. II. Notation A special notation has been adopted to make the study of games and positions possible, and it is necessary for students with it. The of the game to become thoroughly conversant French, English, in use in still is notation earUest original and the from derived is It countries. speaking Spanish and m the game, in that the squares take the the pieces which occupy them. Thus the comer squares are called R i (Rook's square or Rook's first), and to original names position of ; CHESS STRATEGY distinguish them from one another Q R i or K R i (Queen's 6 or The squares immediately in A distinction is made are called QR2orKR2. King's Rook's square). front R i is Black's R 8, Black's R 2 is White's R 7, White's K B 3 is Black's K B 6, and so on. K stands for King Q for Queen B for Bishop Kt for Knight R for Rook and P for Pawn. In describmg between White and Black, and White's ; ; ; ; ; men- a capture, only the capturing and the captured pieces are tioned, and not the squares. When confusion is possible, it is customary to add whether Kt. King's side or Queen's side pieces are concerned, e.g. K R X Q is Kt which mind in bear to necessary In this notation it is increasingly becomes This R. the the Q Kt, which R is their places. difficult as the game goes on and pieces change stamped Knight one and Rook one have chessmen of sets Many This pieces. side King's are they show to sign, special with a B is always a white is not necessary in the case of Bishops K K : on white squares, a white Q B on black squares. A more modem notation is the algebraic notation, which has been adopted in most countries. It has the advantage Here of being unmistakably clear, and also more concise. the perpendicular lines of squares (called files) are named with the letters a-h, from left to right, always from the point of view of White, and the horizontal hnes of squares (called ranks) with numbers 1-8 as before, only with the distinction that the rank on which the White pieces stand is always called the first thus the square we named White's Q B 2 or Black's Q B 7 is now called c 2 in both cases. Black's Q B 2 (White's Q B 7) In capturing, the square on which the capture is always c 7. not the piece captured is noted, for the sake and place takes In the case of pawn moves, the squares of uniformity. only are noted. stands for 0—0 0—0—0 on the King's side :.or x stands for capstands for castles on the Queen's side castles ; ; tures ; + for check. In the following opening moves, both notations are used for the purpose of comparison : 1. 2. P-Q4 P—Q B 4 P-Q4 P— K 3 I'd 4 d5 c 4 e 6 2- d HINTS FOR BEGINNERS 3. Kt-QB3 P— OB4 KPxP PxQP QPxP 5. P-K 4 Kt— K B 3 6. P— Q 5 B— K Kt 5 B— K2 4. 7. 8. K Kt— K 2 Castles 3- Ktc3 c5 4- cd: 5- 64 ed: de: Ktf 6 6. 78. Bg5 _ - Ktg e 2 Bey 0—0 In most books in which the algebraic notation is used, both squares of a move are written out for the benefit of the student. The moves above would then look hke this : I. d 2 — CHESS STRATEGY 8 beginners do not trouble very much about any particular plan study of chess, but as soon as they have learnt the in their moves, rush into the turmoil of practical play. It is selfevident that their prospects under such conditions cannot be very bright. The play of a beginner is planless, because he has too many plans, and the capacity for subordinating all Yet it his combinations to one leading idea is non-existent. cannot be denied upon investigation that a certain kind of method is to be found in the play of all beginners, and seems to come to them quite naturally. At first the pawns are pushed forward frantically, because there is no appreciation of the power and value of the pieces. Conscious of the inferiority of the pawns, the beginner does not conclude that it must be advantageous to employ the greater power of the pieces, but is chiefly concerned with attacking the opposing pieces with his pawns in the hope of capturing them. His aim is not to develop his own forces, but to weaken those of his opponent. His combinations are made in the hope that his adversary may not see through them, nor does he trouble much about his opponent's intentions. When most of his pawns are gone, then only do his pieces get their chance. He has a great liking for the Queen and the Knight, the former because of her tremendous mobility, the latter on account of his peculiar step, which seems particularly adapted to take the enemy by surprise. When watching beginners you will frequently observe numberless moves by a peripatetic Queen, reckless incursions by a Knight into the enemy's camp, and when the other pieces join in the fray, combination follows combination in bewildering sequence and fantastic chaos. Captures of pieces are planned, mating nets are woven, perhaps with two pieces, against a King's position, where five pieces are available for defence. This unsteadiness in the first childish stages of development makes it very difficult for the beginner to get a general view of the board. Yet the surprises which each move brings afford him great enjoyment. A few dozen such games are by no means wasted. After certain particular dispositions of pieces have proved his undoing, the beginner will develop the perception of threats. He sees dangers one or two moves ahead, and thereby reaches the second stage in his development. HINTS FOR BEGINNERS 9 His combinations will become more and more sound, he will learn to value his forces more correctly, and therefore to husband his pieces and even his pawns with greater care. In second stage his strength will increase steadily, but, and power of combination Unless a player be exceptionally gifted, he will is concerned. only learn after years of practice, if at all, what may be termed " positional play." For that, it is necessary to know how to open a game so as to lay the foundation for a favourable middle game, and how to treat a middle game, without losing sight this this is the drawback, only as far as his of the possibilities of the end-game. It is hopeless to try to memorise the various openings which analysis have proved correct, for this empirical method fails as soon as the opponOne must learn ent swerves from the recognised lines of play. They apply to play. sound of to recognise the characteristics must be principles underlying the all and any position, and this And apphcable. generally manner in a propounded will I which round subject, of my substance the brings me to common with compatible system a build up to endeavour sense and logic. Before I proceed to develop my theme, I shall set down a number of elementary rules which will facihtate the understanding of such simple combinations as occur at every step in chess. If we ignore the comparatively small proportion of games of the opponent's King is accomplished describe a normal, average game of can board, we full a on Both sides will employ their chess in the following way. available forces more or less advantageously to execute attacking and defensive manoeuvres which should gradually lead to in which the mating exchanges. If one side or the other emerges from the conflict with some material gain, it will generally be possible to force a mate in the end-game, whilst if both sides have succeeded by careful play to preserve equality of material, a draw will generally ensue. It will be found a little later that a single pawn may suffice, with some few exceptions, to achieve a victory, and we shall adopt the following leading principle for all combinations. CHESS STRATEGY 10 viz. loss of material must be avoided, even if only a pawn. a good habit to look upon every pawn as a prospective Queen. This has a sobering influence on premature and im- It is petuous plans of attack. On the other hand, victory is often brought about by a timely sacrifice of material. But in such cases the sacrificing of material has its compensation in some particular advantage of position. As principles of position are difficult for beginners to grasp, I propose to defer their consideration for the present and to devote my attention first to such combinations as involve questions Let us master a simple device that makes most of material. combinations easy both for attack and defence. It amounts merely to a matter of elementary arithmetic, and if the beginner neglects it, he will soon be at a material disadvantage. Diagram 4 may serve as an example 'mm. ' ^'^^J i : m ^ M^ * 'wm ^^P ^''WM ii ^'''W% Diag. 4. Black's move, and we will suppose he wishes to play P A beginner will probably calculate thus I push on 4. my pawn, he takes with his pawn, my Knight takes, so does It is —K : my Bishop takes, and so on. means waste of time and energy. his, then This is quite wrong, and When the beginner considers a third or fourth move in such a combination, he will already have forgotten which pieces he intended to play in the first moves. The calculation is perfectly simple upon the following lines : I play P —K 4, HINTS FOR BEGINNERS II two Knights, a Bishop then my pawn is attacked by a pawn and by a Bishop, supported and two Rooks, six times in aU. It is ThereaU. times six two Knights, two Rooks and a Queen, at captured units six the 4, provided fore I can play which units white six the than 4 are not of greater value lose a In the present instance both sides are recaptured. is there and Bishop, a and Rooks, pawn, two Knights, two the This estabhshed, he can embark on m P-K K no material loss. advance of the K P without any fear. includes a number Therefore in any combination which have to do is to count the of exchanges on one square, all you to compare number of attacking and defending units, and If forgotten. the latter must never be their relative values : ; Black were to play the pawn at twice, it KtxP in the following position, because K 5 is attacked three times, and only supported would be an obvious miscalculation, for the value of the defending pieces is smaller.^ mm mm a ^c^'i IP B, Diag. 5. could be Chess would be an easy game if all combinations process mathematical the by exhaustively tested and probed complications met the that find shall we But just shown. 1 It is difficult to compare the as so relative value of the different pieces, much but. generally speaking, minor pieces depends on the peculiarities of each position, the Rook as equal to a minor piece and Bishop and Knight, arc reckoned as equal a minor piece, is to be the " exchange one or two pawns (to have a Rook against three minor pieces. or Rooks two to equal is Queen ahead). The ; CHESS STRATEGY 12 To give the beginner an idea of mention a few of the more frequent examples. It will be seen that the calculation may be, and very frequently with are extremely varied. this, I will ^ Ml ._.^.. '^^ iSirar^p mm. '^m X Ml X « M H B : Diag. 6. is, upset by one of the pieces involved being exchanged or An example of this is found in Diagram 6 Kt xP sacrificed. ; ^ « fc m ^ « II Al ^ »^^ ill.. ......» E#J '^ "^M '^w ^M '^ ^..„ ^ M Diag. 7. on account of R x B this leaves the Knight unprotected, and White wins two pieces for his Rook. Neither can the Bishop capture on K 5 because of R x Kt, leaving the Bishop fails ; " HINTS FOR BEGINNERS unprotected, after which BxKt 13 does not retrieve the situation because the Rook recaptures from B 6. A second important case, in which our simple calculation is of no avail, occurs in a position where one of the defending pieces which is more imporis forced away by a threat, the evasion of tant than the capture of the unit it defends. In Diagram 7, by for instance. Black may not play KtxP, because White, playing P—Q 6, wouid force the Bishop to Kt 4 or B i, would to prevent the pawn from Queening and the Knight given in is type same the of example be lost. A further occurs not which threat, mating peculiar Diagram 8. Here a ^ wm:^ 'mmW. fM WB t ~ S^ mm Diag. 8. infrequently in practical play, keeps the Black Queen tied to B 2 and unavailable for the protection of the B at B i. her K White wins as follows I : 2 RxKt, QxR; 3 Kt— B 7, ch ch, K— R i double R 6 5 Q— Kt 8 ch, R x Q 4 Kt— KtxB, KtxKt; K— Kt -X ; ; ; 6 Kt—B 7 mate. We will now go a step further and turn from " acute combinations to such combinations as are, as it were, impendHere, too, I urgently recommend beginners (advanced ing. players do it as a matter of course) to proceed by way of simple arithmetical calculations, but, instead of enumerating the attacking and defending pieces, to count the number of possibilities of attack and defence. — CHESS STRATEGY 14 Let us consider a few typical examples. In Diagram 9, if Black plays P Q 5, he must first have probed the position The pa^vn at Q 5 is attacked once and in the following way. with, and can be attacked by three start to supported once three more moves (i R Q i, 2 R (B 2) Q 2, in units WTiite more mobihse three more units for the also can Black B B 2). 3 — — — Kt —B 4 or K 2 B — defence in the same number of moves (i 3, Kt 2, 3 R Q i). There is, consequently, no immediate danger, — nor is there anything to fear for some time to come, as \^^lite has no other piece which could attack the pawn for the fifth time. <.<u#^^|i I m .^P^ ^^m^ ^ g ^ ""^s^ . 'M^ , .„ W^- ^ "*^F^ '"" ^^;^ Diag, 9. It would be obviously wTong to move the pawn to Q 6 after pieces another two White's R Q i, because White could bring Black whilst Knight, the to bear on the P, the other Rook and his namely, defence, the for has only one more piece available — Rook. The followdng examples show typical positions, in which simple calculation is complicated by side issues. In Diagram 10, the point of attack, namely, the Black Knight at K B 3, can be supported by as many Black units as White can bring up for the attack, but the defensive efficiency of one of Black's pieces is illusory, because it can be taken by a White piece. The plan would be as follows White threatens Black's Knight for the third time with Kt K 4, and Black must reply Q Kt—Q 2, because covering with : — HINTS FOR BEGINNERS 15 R— K " exchange," as will appear from a 3 would cost the comparison of the value of the pieces concerned. The " exchange " is, however, lost for Black on the next move, because '** ^f-^^/ii //y/y/Z/A mxm ft ^îJ Wi iH ,. ' ii I £ V//////// f^_ ^:: ^xêag Diag. 10. Q— B 3 forces the White's further attack on the Knight by of the diagonal the into gets it where Rook to defend on 3, Bishop, which at present is masked by White's Knight. The K wm>. mm mm. ^p v/m. Diag. II. x Kt (not B x Kt on account sequel would be 3 Q Kt x Kt ch, winning a whole Rook), 4 B xR, and so on. of B R xR A similar case is shown in Diagram 11. CHESS STRATEGY i6 Here, too, there is a flaw in the simple calculation, because Beginners should devote the defending units are not secure. special attention to this position, which is in practice of frequent occurrence. It can be easily perceived that the Bishop cannot capture Q R 3. But to take with the pawn at B 7 on account of the Knight would also be an error, because Black would then P— keep chasing away the covering Bishop. K— B— K B— B 3 3 Kt— 8, B 2 and O 6, Kt 4 2 I wins one of the pieces. Finally, one more example, in which one of the defending pieces being pinned makes simple calculation impracticable. In Diagram 12 it seems at first sight as if Black could play P— Kt X P : ; ; although White can pin the Knight with ; R— K i m Wm, a ^ ^ i i i 1^ i Diag. 12. and then attack it once more with his Knight, Black would appear to have sufficient protection available, with his Kt and B. White has no time to double Rooks, because if he does so, after his R K 2 Black would play the King away from his file and aUow the Knight to escape. But White can, by a simple sacrifice, bring the slumbering R at R I into sudden action K I, B— B 4; 3 Kt—B 3, Kt—Q 3; i...KtxP; 2 4 RxKt, KtxR; 5 R K i, and White wins two pieces for his Rook. — : R— — GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CHESS STRATEGY 17 beginner These illustrations will be sufficient to give the all kinds of in calculation of economy of an understanding speedily combinations. His power of combining will grow experience. on this basis, and thrive in the fire of practical by referWliere an opponent is missing, the gap must be filled of combination science the of treat as books such to ence and give examples taken from actual play. CHAPTER III GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CHESS STRATEGY the collective In bringing the teachings of this book under way my mheading " Chess Strategy," it was not in any parallel between the tention to draw anything like an exact operations in manoeuvres on the chess-board and mihtary In trying to seek such analogies there is great of gainmg danger of being led astray, and httle hkelihood Plain play. practical that might be of use in actual warfare. knowledge incommon-sense wiU give us aU we need, without our being fluenced by those tactical and strategical have been found useful in war. considerations that The following definition may not be out of place Strategy must be solved in sets down the whole of the problems which : war, in order to attain the ultimate result aimed such problems in various ways, and according ; tactics case. Sound at solve conditions the strategy, tactical when prevailing setting practicabiUty, in the particular the task, must never lose sight and only a thorough knowledge tactical resources makes correct strategy to of of possible. any circumstances, as unforin outward tunately even great chess masters have done, seek Now we shall not under chess the teachings similarities justification for transferring to It sounds pretty enough to of the strategy and tactics of war. the Chess is a game of war—the various pieces represent infantry, the represent pawns the various kinds of forces Rooks do the the Knights take the place of cavahy, the the different hues broad sweeping work of heavy artillery, say : : ; CHESS STRATEGY i8 ways in which the pieces move find a parallel in the topography are more the theatre of war, in that the various battle-fields of or less easy of access. But it is quite unjustifiable to assign to that Rooks should the Knights the functions of scouts, and to say Such so on. and artillery, heavy as background, stay in the value. practical slightest the have not would pronouncements What we take from the science of warfare is merely the In each game the strategy of chess should set us definition. mate the the tasks which must be accomplished (in order to it is which opponent's King), and tactics point the way in will strategy chess Correct possible to solve such problems. wish if we and, possible, only set such tasks as are tactically expound the principles of chess strategy, we cannot exclude to If here and chess tactics from the field of our observations. to actual analogy some bear there the results of our deliberations warfare, we may certainly give way to a kind of parallel in real faction in that our own occupation has some in accordance principles our fashion life, but we must never aesthetic satis- with such fortuitous circumstances. Having surveyed the problems we have to solve, we can now plunge into our subject. in ele- In the first chapter, when considering special cases mentary combinations, we have already noticed the important the attackpart played in each skirmish by the balance between Speaking quite generally, commonchess-board, sense will tell us that, in all operations on the to mainbe will defence the main consideration for the for an justification only is tain that balance, and that there the on forces more concentrate attack when it is possible to ing and defending units. However, though I one combinaelementary discussing when it not touch upon strategic point than can be mustered by the defence. very important point must not be neglected, did tions for fear of compHcating matters for beginners : the estabbalance between the contending forces is by no means factor is paramount A equahty. numerical their lished by longer one the mobility of such forces, and as soon as it is no described recapture and capture of cases elementary the of order to in this factor must be taken into account previously, on a general survey, whether there is a sufficient intended defence to an impending attack, or whether one's own decide, GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF CHESS STI^TEGY 19 attack is likely to prevail. That mobility is the first and foremost consideration should be self-evident, since the relative value of the pieces can only make itself felt by their greater or lesser mobility. Except in certain positions, which are brought about by some particular array of the pieces, the intrinsic value of a Rook is greater than that of a Bishop, because it can command on the board, whilst a Bishop is tied to its own all the squares colour Knight and Bishop are considered equivalent, because the Knight's advantage in being able to act on all the squares ; of either colour is balanced by the fact that the Bishop can sweep long diagonals. Two Bishops are, generally speaking, of greater value than two Knights, because together they also act on all the squares, and their command of long diagonals is a clear advantage. The whole of this valuation, however, comes to nought when the pieces are hindered in their mobility by the peculiarity of any particular position. We will consider one instance from end-game play, and one from the openings. In Diagram 13, White derives no advantage from being ^ ^ P ^8 ^P Wy, ^^ ^P ^ ^ll Diag. 13. the exchange to the good, for the Rook has no file which could be used to break into the Black camp. In Diagram 14, the numerical equahty of forces will not save Black, because bad development reduces the mobility CHESS STRATEGY 20 an extent that he has no resources with which he can parry the impending attack. of his pieces to such m m m pm.^:m m . ...i .^^ Hsfiiwii ^ wm. a .^ Diag. 14. White will assail the Black King's position on the Queen side, and Black is unable to concentrate his forces quickly enough for the defence of the jeopardised entrenchments. Let us mind that the mobility of the pieces is the deciding factor of their efficiency, and that mobihty is the highest criterion by which to judge the merits (or demerits) therefore bear in of their operations. We will now consider this principle in its application to the three stages of play, namely, the opening, the middlegame, and the ending. CHAPTER IV THE OPENING The only pieces available on the first move are the Knights. In order to develop other pieces as well, it is necessary to move pawns first, and such pawn moves will be best as give an outlet to as many pieces as possible. For quick development is of the utmost importance, and he who succeeds fijst in placing awkward positions, to such places as give them command of the greatest possible number of all his pieces, from their initial : THE OPENING squares, has the better chance of 21 concentrating a superior force on some important point. It follows that White, having the first move, is, so to speak, always morally justified in attacking, whilst Black should assume the defensive. It is a step in the right direction, to appreciate the truth of this proposition. Unfortunately most beginners fail to reahse it, and so pave the way, from the first, to the loss of the game. There are not many developing pawn moves to choose from. Apparently from the point of view of quick development only P K 4 and P Q 4 need be considered, since they free both Bishop and Queen, whilst other pawn moves liberate one — — Generally speaking it is only required to move two or three pawns to allow all pieces to be developed, and it is good, on principle, to make only such pawn moves in the piece only. opening, which are necessary for the development of pieces. To play other pawns really means the loss of a move. To " lose a move " means to make a move which is not essential " loss of a to the attainment of a desired position. Thus the move " results also from playing a piece to a given square in more moves than necessary. I shall now give a few games showing the far-reaching The first one is a typical consequences of losing moves. though glaring example, which is very instructive and came to my notice some time ago I. P—K4 2. 34- 5. I will not discuss the system of development adopted by White in his first four moves. The last move, however, can It is the loss of a move such at once be recognised as faulty. as occurs in the vast majority of games played by beginners. Kt Kt 5, since the Knight It was unnecessary to prevent 2 In any case B permanently. could not hold that square K would have had the same same time. 5 6. P—QR 3 — —K effect, and developed a piece at the B— K2 ? ? CHESS STRATEGY 22 This, of course, is The consequences ot this loss very bad. of a second move are swift and deadly. Castles B— B4 At last a developing move. R—Ki 8. Q-Q Kt 3 Another Queen's move. The attack on the Bishop's Pawn may be very tempting, but must necessarily be incorrect and why ? Because White is much behind with his development. — It is useless to analyse any kind of attack in face of this fact. The beginner finds it hard to get used to this way of thinking. He prefers to try to unravel a long string of variations and combinations, in which he will mostly lose his bearings. Even stronger players obstruct their own powers by refusing to see the value of judging a position on general merits. They lose valuable time in thinking out endless variations, to maintain positions which could be proved valueless by general and logical deductions. M.M.»a^WM !^ » til * «^« ^ Diag. * tlf WB. m 15. Then, as in the present position, retribution comes swiftly, 8 P-Q4 White should have considered this move. It was obvious. 23 THE OPENING for the Rook is most dangerous since the opening of the K file for the White King. KtxB BxP 9. Black could have played Q xB at once. 10. ji 12. QxKt pXO K—Q I QxQ B—Kt 5 double ch K. —K 8 mate A further example in which the loss of moves occurs, though famous game, which Morphy not so glaringly, is the following and Count Isouard Brunswick of played against the Duke Karl in the Royal box at the 1. 2. Paris opera-house. P_K 4 Kt—K B 3 P— K 4 P—Q 3 above, Kt— Q B 3 would According to the principles set out shuts out the Kmg s move text have been better, since the Bishop. 3- P-Q 4 would be bad to Now the King's Pawn is attacked twice. It White would exchange pawns support it with Kt-Q B 3, as thus forfeit his chance of and then Queens. Black would the King into safety bringing in castling and lose much time course, is impossible of B 3. and the Rooks into play. P-K blocks the natural moreover and as it is not a developing move, Protecting the pawn development of the King's Knight. other pieces, and Q Kt— Q 2 with the Queen would also block Bishop. Queen's the blocks cannot be good, as it the Kmg's Pawn, protect to impossible Since it seems indeed it is on it exchange to be would the only alternative although it allows a White piece the whole the best course, to dominating position in the centre. Wishing ; to take up a avoid this, Black plays 3 B—Kt5 indirectly Knight, and by pinning the opponent's is. however, manoeuvre This Pawn. the King's protects ill-advised. exchange the Bishop for the Knight as Black is forced to CHESS STRATEGY 24 The Bishop will have moved twice, the Knight only once, therefore White will have gained a move for his development. 4. PxP BxKt Should Black play P x P at once, White would exchange Queens, release the pin, and win the pawn. 5. 6. QxB B-Q B 4 PxP White has now two pieces more in play than Black, instead and the mobility of the White Queen, which Black himself has brought out, begins to have a threatening effect on Black's game. of only one, 6 7. Q-Q Kt 3 Kt— KB3 Q-K 2 — Black cannot cover his King's Bishop's Pawn with Q Q 2 because 8 Q x P wins the Rook, whilst now Black could play 8...Q Kt 5 ch in reply, forcing the exchange of Queens. The text move, which is forced, blocks the Bishop, and at the same time prevents the development of the King's Rook, all of which is the direct consequence of the loss of one move. — 8. Kt—B 3 White rightly disdains the gain of the Knight's Pawn, but prevents the exchange of Queens in developing a piece. He proves the superiority of his position much more convincingly in that way. Black must now lose yet another move to protect his Knight's Pawn. 8 9. B— K Kt 5 P—B3 P— Kt 4 Black must try to develop his Queen's Knight at last. He cannot play Q Kt Q 2 at once, since his Knight's Pawn would again be unprotected therefore he plays the move in the text, probably thinking that now White also must lose a move to withdraw his Bishop. But in view of the fact that Black's game is wholly undeveloped, and that he plays practically several pieces down, White sacrifices his Knight for two — ; THE OPENING 2S he foresees the position which occurs a few moves later, when Black is hemmed in on all sides. pawns : KtxP PxKt BxKtPch 12. Castles Q R R— Q i ID. QKt—Q2 11. This is the only piece available to cover Q 2, for the King's White has another piece in reserve, his Knight is pinned. King's Rook, and against this Black is defenceless. I. m. ^ M 4M iB, il „ M Diag. 13. 16. RxKt compare Diag. 12. 13 14. R—Q I RxR Q—K 3 This releases the King's Knight. Now White could win by playing B x Kt and B x R ch, but he prefers to end up with a magnificent sacrifice. 15. 16. BxRch Q— Kt 8ch!! 17. R— Q 8 mate KtxB KtxQ The final position shows in a striking manner how a few well-developed pieces can be worth more than many undeveloped ones, and the whole game is an example of the fatal consequences which can follow the loss of a move, since it often leads to the compulsory loss of further moves in the course of the game. " This is the curse of every evil deed That propagating still it brings forth evil." CHESS STRATEGY 26 The logical sequence of the moves in this game, as pointed out in the commentaries to it, is borne out by the curious coincidence that I once had the opportunity of playing a game in exactly the same sequence of moves, against a player to whom Morphy's "brilliancy" was unknown. The leading principle of all opening moves is made clear by the foregoing pages, namely, rapid development of pieces, and consequently the avoidance of the loss of a move in any shape or form. Before treating of the various systems of openings, I will say a few words on the principles of pawn play. Each opening is characterised by a well-defined pawn formation, and concurrently a certain method in the developNaturally the formation of a pawn ment of the pieces. skeleton is not an independent factor, but must be evolved with a view to facihtating the favourable development of But when considering the form of a pawn position pieces. and that of the pieces, we cannot shut our eyes to the fact that pawn formation must necessarily be the dominant consideration in our mind. Pawn formation is of a more permanent character than that of the pieces, in consequence of the latter's When we have made a rash move with a greater mobility. which our attacking disposition may have tempted us, we may still have a chance of retrieving the position by timely retreat. Once a pawn has moved it cannot turn back, and only after the greatest deliberation should we embark on changes in our pawn formation in order not to disturb the balance of this " static element " of the game. But we shall see that the pawn skeleton which was formed in the opening often weathers the storm and stress of the middle game, and piece, to frequently preserves its character right up to the end-game. I will therefore make pawn formation my starting-point in an attempt to show the way through the maze of the openings on the basis of general strategical principles. If our pawn skeleton is to promote the freedom of all the pieces, we must not build it up with the narrow view of developing minor pieces only, but must consider from the very first THE OPENING 27 We Rooks to get into action. in which way it wnll enable the the centre of the hoard making in can unite these tendencies This means for both for all our forces. the main field of action sides 4 and K B 4. K 4 and Q 4, and also in a lesser degree Q B advantage of We shall get a clear insight into the positional when discussmg the having command of the centre later on, touch the subject middle game. At present I will only form, which will elementary an in it explaining general way, for pawn strategy be sufficient to develop an understanding after In the course of further deductions, in the opening. stronger-, game has become the grasp of this difficult stage of the the subject to be stated aUow will which details into go I will in a more precise form. there pieces in the centre is of value, because ma Placing the edge, which, of course, they have more mobility than near the from the centre because also hmits their range of action, and generally be can point given a a concentration of forces on effected in the quickest way. In most cases two centre squares once, ^ become inaccessible at of his pawns m the one placing opponent through the centre • therefore it would seem a good plan to lure that pawn P—K playing 4 or away, and this is rendered feasible by and Q B 4 when the opponent has a pawn on his Q 4, the In 4. B 4 when he has a pawn on 4 or apply could as manoeuvres following we will consider such White, to or Black, from the point of view of P— p_Q K P—K either to Wîte of birthwhom the initiative is, as pointed out above, a sort instance for as, Naturally, should White lose a move, right I P-K 4, P-K 4 : 2 Kt-K B 3, Kt-Q B 3 the position is reversed, and Black the attack. of ; is justified P-Q R 3 m taking up ? 3 the tendency The pawn moves mentioned above also have for action. giving the Rooks an opportunity A Rook may support its further standing behind an advanced pawn advance, or, if the pawn should be exchanged, might get an open file. opponent we must, The damage we wish to inflict on our will not easily give we Thus ourselves. of course, try to avoid other advantage some obtain can we up a centre pawn unless in doing so. This advantage may be. that in exchanging the CHESS STRATEGY 28 centre pawn we open up lines of attack for our pieces, or that we are able to place one of our pieces in a commanding position in the centre of the board. The following example posing White plays after may serve as an illustration. P-Q 4 P-Q B 4 1. 2. Sup- P-Q 4 His aim is to tempt Black's centre pawn away and to make Q B 4 and K 4 accessible for his own forces. Black might be justified in taking the pawn, if he really could hold the pawn thus gained. We shall show later on that this is not so, and that White can win it back easily and advantageously. Therefore Black is more likely to play 2 P K 3. his — Kt x P 4 P— K 4 would open White's game and drive the Knight away at once, gainSupposing, however. Black plays 2. .B B4 ing a move. should White now think mechanically, " I will take his centre pawn and consequently have the better game," his deduction Not 2. .Kt— K B 3 . ; for after 3 P x P, ; . — ; would be wrong. For after exchanging his Bishop for the Knight, which otherwise would drive his Queen away. Black brings the latter into a dominating square in the centre. ÎS^ Diag. 17. 3. 4. PxP RxB BxKt QxP Queen cannot easily be driven away from her commanding position, particularly as White must lose a move Black's — THE OPENING 29 R P. Meanwhile Black gains time for concentrating his forces for a deadly attack on Wliite's Queen's Pawn. to save his Q 5. 6. 7. Kt— Q B 3 Castles Q R P— K 4 P—Q Kt 3 p_K 3 Kt—B 3 and wins the Q P, or 5. 6. —K 4 Kt-Q B 3 R P-Q R 3 P— K 3 Castles Q again threatened and cannot be prevented. This position shows, that to bring one's opponent's centre pawn away and to keep one's own, does not under all circumstances mean the command of the centre, but that the opening and P is up of files and diagonals for one's pieces towards the centre is an important moment in the fight for positional advantage. Considerations of this kind will help to improve our judgment in many of the various openings treated in the following pages. We will class the openings in this way A. White I. (a) (6) B. White I. (a) (b) P—K4. : P— Black i. K4 Black I. Any other move P—Q 4Black i. Black I. P—Q 4 Any other move C. White I. Any other move We shall find that openings classed under C generally lead to positions treated under A and B. A. We have already come to the conclusion that after i P K 4, 4 White does well to try to force the exchange pawn on Q 4 or K B 4, and that Black will try centre of Black's unless by allowing the exchange he gets a this, counteract P—K to chance of exerting pressure in the centre by means of his pieces. We will first see what happens when White undertakes the advance in question on his second move. Superficially the K B 4 is that in the first difference between 2 P Q 4 and 2 case the pawn thus advanced is covered, while in the second P— — CHESS STRATEGY 30 it is not. An opening in which a pawn sacrifice is offered, is 2 P K B 4 is therefore a gambit. Q 4 is only a gambit if after 2. .P x P White does not called a " gambit " 2 P — ; — . Nevertheless this opening has been recapture the pawn. " centre gambit," and though the denomination is not called the correct we will adhere to it, as it is in general use. very considerable difference between the centre gambit A in the fact that in the former compulsory, whilst in the second it may be and the King's gambit hes acceptance is declined. — For 2 P Q 4 threatens to take the King's Pawn. To defend it by means of 2. .P Q 3 is unwise, since White exchanges pawns and then Queens, by which Black loses his chance of casthng and impedes the development of his Rooks. 2...Kt— Q B 3 is also bad, since after 3 PxP, Kt xP 4 P K B 4, White drives the Knight away, gaining a strong hold on the centre, and Black has no compensation for giving up his centre pawn. It may be mentioned here that after 2...Kt Q B 3, 3 P Q 5 would be a useless move, as to begin with it would be inconsequent, since P Q 4 was played in order to clear the centre, and moreover it would block up a diagonal which could be most useful to the King's Bishop. We conclude now that Black cannot hold his pawn at K 4. He must relinquish the centre by 2... PxP. He will now either attempt to bring away White's King's Pawn by advancing his own Q P to Q 4, or try to utilise the King's file, which was opened by his second move, and operate against We P. The Rooks are indicated for this task. White's shall refer to the execution of these plans later on. In the King's gambit. White's attempt to bring away Black's King's Pawn may be safely ignored. The move 2 P K B 4 does not threaten to take the King's P by Q R 5 ch. Black Pawn, as Black would win White's can therefore develop in security with 2...B B 4, and if B 3, there is no then White prevents the Q check by Kt objection to Black protecting his King's Pawn with P Q 3, After 4 B B 4, as the King's Bishop is already developed. Black has still no need to protect his K P with Kt Q B 3, but can play Kt K B 3 first, because after 5 PxP, P X P 6 Kt X P would be answered by 6. .Q Q 5 winning a piece. : . — ; — — — K — — K —K — — — — — ; . — THE OPENING 31 because Black keeps the upper hand in these early encounters White whilst piece, a with move he has made a developing of purpose the for useless is which move has played a pawn development. W.^^^ î T Hi mm * ^11 , 2. m 2. THE OPENING difficult 33 This principle must also guide us and intricate play. in other openings. A good example is to be found in the so-called " Danish gambit," ^ which will lead us back to those openings in which WTiite plays Q 4, Q 4 on his second move. After 2 P X P, \\Tiite has the option of sacrificing two pawns to obtain P— P— a very rapid development 3 P—Q B 3, PxP ; 4 B—Q B 4, PxP;5QBxP. It may now be just possible for Black to avoid the many threats which White can bring to bear with his beautifully placed forces, perhaps by giving back one or both of the pawns gained. But this question can only be of interest to us if there is no opportunity of adopting a simple As it is, this opportunity line of development at the outset. All that Black needs to do is to push on his is not wanting. Queen's Pawn as soon as possible, thus freeing his own Queen's Bishop. P—O4 P-Q B 3 2. 3. i ; mi ¥9 PxP P-Q 4 Wm¥9m k fW^ Diag. 19. After 4 K P X P, Q X P, Black's position is at least as easy of development as White's. In the position set out in Diagram K 5, because Black wins a pawn by 19, White cannot play P PxP without hindering his own development in the least. — ^ The names of the various openings, which I mention for the sake of completeness, are generally derived extensively played and analysed. from towns or countries in which they were first CHESS STRATEGY 34 The equalising power of Black's P— Q 4 in all K P openings variawhere White has played P— Q 4 can be noticed in many tions. I shall now give a few typical examples, which will can be adopted in many similar of play that show the the other by cases, and which can often be evolved one from line altering the order of the moves. Centre Gambit I. 2. 3. PxP Kt— QB3 P—O4 QxP Q-K 3 Kt—Q B 3 6. B—Q 2 Kt-B 3 B— K 2 4. 5. II. P—Q 4 ! King's Bishop's Opening PxP Kt— K B 3 P-Q 4 P— Q4 B— Q B 4 4- P-K 5 2. 3. ! III. Scotch Gambit 2. 3. Kt— K B 3 P— Q4 B-B 4 5. P— K 5 4. Kt— Q B 3 PxP Kt-B 3 P-Q 4 4. P-Q 4 P-B 3 t '• IV. Scotch Game 2. Kt— K B 3 3. P— Q4 4. KtxP 5. Kt— Q B 3 KtxKt 7. B— O 3 6. Kt—Q B 3 PxP Kt-B 3 B— Kt 5 Kt PxKt P-Q 4 ! In no case should Black forfeit his chance of playing It is tempting after 2 Q 4, P xP 3 Kt— B 3 Q B 4, but in that case to cover the pawn at Q 5 by Q B 3, by this means White would sacrifice a pawn by so preventing Black and himself, opening the Queen's file for loss of a pa\vn, for the Thus, from ever playing Q 4. position. in advantage White has a paramount P— P— P— P_Q 4. P— ; K THE OPENING 35 For after 4. .P x P, 5 Kt x P (Diagram 20) White has developed both Knights, and his Bishops are free, whilst Black has none of his pieces out. P Q 3 must also be played in order to . — mobilise the Queen's Bishop, leaving for the King's Bishop finally the ; K 2 as the only square " backward " pawn ^ at Q 3 is open to constant attacks and is difficult to defend. HTî^bKAK ^ ^ ^ ^p » Pi 1 ^^ ^^ ^ ^^ WM I^S ^sp ^: '« ^^ Diag. 20. The best plan for Black is to decline the doubtful gift of the pawn and to bring about one of the positions, as sketched above, in which, by playing P Q 4 early in the game, Black — is sure of the free development of all his forces. — Black is able to play P Q 4 early in all such openings, where WTiite does not force the defensive move P Q 3 by attacking Black's King's Pawn. For instance, in the King's — —K gambit, since the move 2 P B 4 does not threaten PxP, Black can reply at once by 2...P Q 4 (Falkbeer Counter Gambit). After 3 P X Q P, K 5 (to permit of Kt—K B 3, which at present is not feasible on account of 4 P x P) 4 P Q 3, PxP; 5 Q X P, White is a pawn ahead, but his Queen obstructs his B therefore Black has better developing chances and should be able to win the pawn back at the very least. A second example is the Vienna game, which proceeds as — P— ; K follows ; : 2. 3. * Kt— Q B 3 P—B4 A pawn is said to be " backward," when pawn. — Kt— K B 3 P— Q 4 (Diagram 21) it cannot move into cover by another CHESS STRATEGY 36 P— K 5, as in the P xQ P, Black can play to 4 P X K P, answer In just now. mentioned Falkbeer gambit having the without Kt play xP can Black hand, on the other For instance, slightest difficulty with his development. If Waiite plays 4 5. Kt—K B 3 P— Q 4 7. B— Q 3 B—K 2 P— K B 3 6. 8. PxKt 9. Castles Kt X Kt Castles Kt—B 3 or B—K Kt 5 and Black also will soon have an open file for his Rook, with no disadvantage in position. m » Bi Bl ms. HSH W fm B* Diag. 21. There is, however, one opening in which Black has the utmost difficulty in preventing White from getting a positional advantage in the centre. It is called the Ruy Lopez, and is held by many to be the strongest opening for White. The initial moves are : — i P—K 4, P— K 4 ; 2 Kt— K B 3, Kt— Q B 3 3 B Kt 5. With this move White at once attacks the Black K P, though indirectly, by threatening to exchange ; the B for the Kt. To make the capture effective, however. White must first protect his own King's Pawn, which would Q— 5 Kt x P, Q 5 !• otherwise be lost after 4 B x Kt, Q P X B threatthe against provide not need Black therefore, first, At ; ened exchange. I shall treat at some length the various defences from which Black can choose, and in studying this most important THE OPENING 37 note many King's side opening, we shall have occasion to centre. the in operations for interest points of general speaking, two entirely different systems of defence Broadly either Black will try to maintain his can be distinguished up the centre, try to gain some other giving else, or centre pawn, compensation. as advantage Black can only maintain his centre pawn if he can prevent As is readily seen, White his Q Kt from being exchanged. Q 4. whilst can attack Black's K P a second time with hinder would after Black's Q 3 any other defensive move main first the development. These considerations lead to : P— P— line of defence in which Black plays 3-..?— Q ^ 3- After R 4 Black has the option of releasing the pin by playing Q Kt 4 at some opportune moment. If WTiite elects to the his Bishop for the Kt forthwith, he can remove B— 4 p exchange Q 4. Black centre pawn after 4...Q PxB by playing 5 a free developBlack gives Kt the but the exchange of the B for ment and in consequence a good game. (Compare note to move 4 in Game No. 12.) Diagram 22 reproduces a typical position in this defence. R 4, Kt—B 3 ; The more usual continuation for White is 4 P— B— m wm mm '///////// 4. 1M, * ill * y//w'^/A '/'///'m mm Pil ¥% m V////A w W^ f m wn Diag. 22. he does not trouble to protect his K P as allow his Rook an open file on which to would its capture King (compare Games Nos. 14 opposing the against act Now Black can capture the K P and 17) 5...B— K 2. 5 Castles ; — : CHESS STRATEGY 38 without much risk, as the Bishop is on the King's jfile. 6 R I, White covers his pawn, and thereby threatens to win a pawn by BxKt. Therefore Black must not delay playing K 6...P— Q Kt 4. — — — After 7 B Kt 3, P Q 3 (Diagram 22) White cannot yet execute the manoeuvre which underlies the whole tendency of the Ruy Lopez, namely P Q 4, maintaining the pressure in the centre, because after Kt x Q P, 9 Kt x Kt, P x Kt 10 Q x P ? White loses a piece through 10. ..P B 4, etc. It is therefore necessary to play P Q B 3 first. White could also obtain a rapid development by Kt B 3, P Q 3, B K 3 or ; ; — — — — — Kt 5, but this arrangement is not popular, because Black can play Kt Q R 4 and exchange the valuable K B. The pawn at Q B 3 supports an advance in the centre, and also provides a retreat for the K B. The Q Kt can be developed Kt Q 2 B i Kt 3 or K 3. Black, however, in this way must try to round off his pawn position on the Queen's side, by moving his Q B P into line. Black's pawns at K 4 and Q B 4 then exert a pressure on White's Q 4. And this pressure threatens to be reinforced by B Kt 5. From these con- — — — — : — siderations the 8 following development seems to be natural B—B P—B 3, Kt—Q R 4 ; 9 support the K P) ; it leads to (to 2, P— B 4 P— Q— 10 B2 Q 4, the position in Diagram 23. ; Diag. 23. II. P— KR 3 One of the few instances in which this pawn move is justified. It deprives Black's Q B of its only good square, and saves the K Kt, the co-operation of which is urgently needed in the centre. ; THE OPENING 39 This system of opening will receive more exhaustive treat- ment under the heading of "Middle Game." (Compare Game No. 12.) In the second main line of defence, of which I shall treat now, P, and makes Black renounces the maintenance of his White's attacking by compensation an attempt to find disappearance the by opened file, King's The King's Pawn. After of the Black pawn, offers opportunities for that purpose. position, which following the at arrive we moves the first few K M ig i^ m^Wi wm. S ^Wi *wm'Diag. 24. may be reached thus Kt— Kt— : 3 B— Kt P— O 3 B— K 5, ; 4 P— Q 4, B— Q 2 R—K PxP i, 2 B 3 6 Castles, B 3, 7 5 is commove 8 Kt xP, Castles. The exchange on the seventh effect is in Kt after BX pulsory, because the loss of a pawn ; ; K P is supported by the Rook. threatened, now that the White P is now on the pressure exerting of Black's intention cramped very are pieces his because difficult of execution, in parB The area. restricted in a another and hinder one K K ticular cannot be brought into action without great difficulty, for instance by : R— K B— K B i, i, P—K Kt 3, and B— Kt 2. It is therefore advisable for White to develop his Q B at Kt 2 instead of at Kt 5, in order not to give Black a chance of ex(In a game Bemsteinchanging his troublesome Bishop. Emanuel Lasker, Moscow, 1914, there happened 9 BxKt, PxB; loB—Kt5, P—KR3; 11 B—R4,Kt—R2; i2BxB, Q xB with a good game for Black.) The defence has a totally different trend, if Black gives CHESS STRATEGY 40 up his own K P, but captures the White K P at once. I have already pointed out that White would not mind his K P being Let us taken, in view of the attack on the open King's file. now consider in which way this attack can be planned. There are two essentially different lines, according to whether Black interpolates P Q 3 or not. — R After 3 B— Kt R— K i, 4 Castles, Kt xP 5 5, Kt— B 3 Black gets out of it comfortably by playing Kt Q 3, B K 2 and Castles, and White cannot permanently prevent Black's game from being freed by the advance of the Q P. P Q 4 Black for White on the fifth move is therefore stronger. cannot very well exchange the pawns, leaving the King's file quite exposed, and must submit to White playing PxP, ; ; — — — maintaining the pawn at K 5 and preventing Black's P—Q 4 for some time to come. The opening might continue B—K 2 Q—K 6 room for the Kt) ; ; in this way : 5 — P Q 4, Kt— Q 3 7 B x Kt, Kt P x B (to make 8 PxP, Kt— Kt 2 (Diagram 25). 2, ; Diag. 25. The whole of the manoeuvres now centre round Black's endeavours to force his P Q 4, and White's attempt to prevent it. Black ultimately gains his point, as will be seen, but at the expense of such disadvantages in the pawn position that it is questionable whether the whole variation (called the Rio de- Janeiro Defence) is playable. 10 K i, Kt—B 4 (the Knight is 9 Kt—B 3, Castles Kt away from his to be posted at 3 to bring the White — ; K R— K ; 4i THE OPENING of Black's Q P by attack 4 whence he prevents the advance 12 3, KtxKt; 3 Sg Q B 6); II Kt-Q A, ..^, BxP. 15 i3BxKt,P-B4; defence. Janeiro de Rio the in position critical This is the centre pawn, and Black has succeeded in eliminating the White the advantage sweeps long diagonals with his Bishops, but at Q 6, Bishop cannot be maintained. White exchanges the hardly will Black and there remains a backward pawn, which B-K Kt-K PxP I4B-K3,P-Q4; ; it has been shown be able to hold permanently. In practice spite of Bishops in that the end-game should be won by White his at Q B 4 is difficult of opposite colours, as Black's pawn to defend. 16 Kt—K 4, B— Kt 2 BxB; 18 KtxB, BxP 18 Q R—Q I and P— Q B BxP^ , because oj 17 KtxB (not PxKt; ch), Kt by followed 4 ; Q— 4. , + first he ^ -x t, The game is much more favourable for Black P— Q R 3, and retains the option of driving the White plays 3 K B away by P—Q Kt 4, after which P—Q 4 can be enforced if very soon. 3 B-Kt 5, P-Q R 3) 5 Castles, Kt X P ; 6 P-Q 4, P-Q Kt 4 4 ; B-R 4. Kt-B 3 7 B-Kt 3, P-Q 4 ; SPxP, B— K3, 9P— B3. Now Black's pieces are more mobile, and that is the reason why this system of defence is becoming more any other. popular than -o, 1 , On the other hand, it cannot be denied that Black s pawn his centre is less formation on the Q side is weak, and that the centre, White has a pawn firmly posted secure. m Whilst driven away. Black has a Knight there which wiU soon be in his hands, entirely the basis of his centre, is White's Q 4, pressure by the White whilst Black's Q 4 is exposed to a steady Kt is unfavourably placed, obstructFinally Black's pieces. P and preventing its falling into line with ing as it does the Q Q B its fellows. Diagram 26 shows the position after 9 P—B 3. The latter Kt— R 4, move prevents the exchange of the B after Black's pawn his up round to Black allow an exchange which would Q B 4. The experts are not yet agreed as formation with for Black in this critical position. continuation to the best P— To be considered are the moves B— Q B 4, B— K 2 and B—K 2 is preferred nowadays to Kt—B 4. B—Q B 4, as Q B 4 should be CHESS STRATEGY 42 K Kt in case the latter is driven from kept free for the i and ii Q Kt Q 2. dominating position, e.g. lo R For if in that case Black exchanges the Knights, he only farthers White's development without doing anything towards strengthening his Q 4. B 4, White plays If Black covers the Knight with P —K his — — PxP e.p. and Kt—Kt 5, rids himself of Black's Q B, and thereby weakens Black's Q P still more. Kt B 4 would therefore seem to be the best choice, as the Q B becomes mobile again after White's B B 2, nor can White — — ^ WM ^4m » i.W4 « *^ ^ WA w « fm Mi t k Diag. 26. play P— Q 4 as yet. The position in the diagram therefore leads to the following variations : 11 Q Kt— Q 2, I, Castles; A. 9...B— K 2; 10 manoeuvre was This Kt B 2, 5. Kt—B 4 12 For further (Petrograd, Lasker 1909. Em. introduced by No. Game particulars see 15). B. 9...Kt— B 4 10 Q Kt— Q 2, Q 5 (Capablanca-Em. R—K B— K B— ; P— ; or 9...B— K2 R—K i, Castles 10 B 2, B 4 12 Q 2, Q 5 (Em. LaskerII Q Tarrasch, Petrograd, 1914). Capablanca believes that the early advance of Q 5 can 9...B— 10 2 Q 2, Q 4, e.g. be refuted by Lasker, Petrograd, 1914) Kt— Kt— ; B— ; ; ; P— P— Kt— K Kt— K 4, P x P 13 Kt x Kt— K ; B— B P— Q 5 Kt, B X Kt 14 B— K 4, Q— Q 2 Kt—B 4 ; II 2, ; I 12 ; ; 15 Q— B 2 or P x P. The openings as sketched out up to this point give a sufficiently clear idea of the possibilities of combining sound THE OPENING 43 after the development with an attempt to capture the centre centre Black's cases, In most 4- P—K P—K 4, opening moves i Q 4, we find an early paw-n being open to attack by White's openmg of the break-up of the centre, and concurrently the Ks or Qs file for the Rooks. P— That is why games opened in as "open" fashion have been classed very generally " Lately games." close called whilst all the other openings are this rightly, smce m very the distinction has been abandoned, and cleared occasionally. be can centre the latter openings, too, the Black does not play when positions close We attain typical all claim to i 4, but rehnquishes P—K I ..p_K 4 in answer instead, leaving on his 4 and takes possession of his Q 4 the centre with in pawns the interlocking of option White the K P—K 5. On principle it does not seem advisable for Black to play p_Q 4 on the first move in reply to i P—K 4. Although QxP, Black White's centre pawn disappears after 2 PxP, has no Queen his and loses a move through 3 Kt-Q B 3. very soon, unless place from which it cannot be driven away to an admission amount would This, however, it be at Q i. plan. Black's of of the inferiority of the whole consideration as a There are two moves which deserve I...P-K namely, 3 (French Defence) 4. prehminary to P-Q Diag. 27. and P— Q B 3 (Caro-Kann defence). After 2 P—Q 4. P— Q 4. we attain the positions set out in the Diagrams 27 and 28, to which we must devote a good deal of attention. CHESS STRATEGY 44 These openings are worthy of study as being especially interesting examples of the struggle for the centre. As early as the third move, White has to take an important Is he to play P K 5 and prevent the opening of — decision. 11 ii .......... It i BR iEi ^ ^^ i ^wm m m. — '^ jj -»^ ^^ Diag. 28. K or Q file for a long time to come, or should he proceed the to develop his pieces, and leave Black the option of anticipating the blocking of the centre by playing P x P himself ? I shall first turn my attention to those games in which — White plays P K 5, starting with the French Defence, after which the Caro-Kann Defence will be easily understood. The position which ensues in the centre after i P K 4, 2 P— Q 4, K 5, divides the board 3 Q 4 3 diagonally, and it is easy to recognise roughly the main lines White has more scope of play which will govern the game. on the King's side, where his pieces will have greater mobility, and prospects of attacjc. Black's chances are on the Queen's Both sides will have to advance more pawns in order to side. obtain openings for their Rooks, and use them for the attack, since they have no future on the K and Q files, as was the case in the openings mentioned hitherto. The obvious moves to this end are for White the advance of the K B P, for Black that of the Q B P and sometimes even of the Q Kt P, that is when the Q B P has not been exchanged for the opposing Q P, but has pushed on to B 5. p_K ; P— ; P— : — THE OPENING 45 chains of pawns formed In Diagrams 29 and 30 we see the by these manoeuvres. than White's pa^vn attack is more dangerous lilacks, B mkm.,.M m. ^p^^. ». -^J L./. i Diag. 29. on the King. And we shall because it involves a direct assault compelled to suspend operations see that Black will usually be ward off the storm by the on the Queen's side temporarily, to I .^3m ^!«^ WO^ X. ^^ ^5?¥- ^1 ^w^w^^m Bi M_MA" 1 i „„ r'^ p ^^. Diag. 30. this either White Pawns on the King's side. He will attempt by P— K B 4 by P—K B 3 attacking White's centre or the latter case preventing White from playing P-B 5. In CHESS STRATEGY 46 White can only make a breach in the Black barrier by playing P K Kt 4 as well. These manoeuvres result in the pawn formations given in Diagrams 31 and 32. — 1 W% Hi X i ^ m ^ & mi Diag. 31. We must now turn to the development of the pieces corre sponding to these pawn skeletons. If White plays P 5 —K ilis m iiy mm w^ I mi ililJSI.4..w^_ mm Wm Wm, ^ m% wm Diag. 32. on his third move, he prevents the Black K Kt from reachK B 3, whence he might have moved to Q 2. This is a desirable position, from which he could support the advance of ing THE OPENING 47 B 4. But the Knight has other chances of developR 3 and B 4, whence he can take his share in the ment to consequence White attack on the White Pawn at Q 4. In the action intercept to not B 4 in order postpone p_Q K must of the P—K at his Q B on R 6. Now, in that case White's Pawn K 5 has not sufficient support against the attack by Black's P—K B 3 (Diagram 31), and the latter move gives Black the advantage. The two main considerations are 3- variations illustrative : P—OB4 Kt— Q B 3 PxP Q-Kt 3 Kt— R 3 of these ;: 48 CHESS STRATEGY If Black were to play B x P at once, White could play Q— Kt 4 \\nth an attack on the Knight's Pawn. object Black's waiting move. of —B Wliite — — must That is the either play B— which prevents his Q Kt 4, or 7. Q 3, after which Black would take the pawn on B 4 with his Knight, getting rid of the White Bishop. 7. Q Kt 4 at once would be answered by P B 4. 7. Kt 3, — BxP P—B4 Kt—B 3 7. B-Q3 8- Black cannot castle yet, on account of the following threat, which I give in full because it occurs frequently in practice 8. ... Castles ; 9. B x P ch, K x B ; Kt— Kt 5 ch. K— Kt i 10. R— K I 12. Q xP ch 13. Q-R 5 ch R7ch; 15. Q— R8ch; 16. QxPmate. II. Q— R 5, ; ; 1^1 m^^M î 'm^. m 14. Q- m m'fî. III i ; ill. i 'mm WM i W/M i mm. Diag. 33. The position in the diagram seems favourable to Black as WTiite cannot castle for some time. For that reason another line of play has come to the fore, in which White exchanges his inactive some K B. 3. 4. Kt-Q B 3 B— Kt 5 Q B for Black's trouble- Kt—K B 3 B— K2 : THE OPENING K Kt- -Q2 5. P-K 5 6. 49 QxB BxB mAfMWm K li i « i Diag. 34. White has now the choice of two hnes of development. He can either prepare for P Q B 3 to support his Q P, or he can develop his King's side, holding the P at 5 only. — 7. 8. Kt— Kt 5 K Kt—Kt 3 P—Q B 3 9. Kt-Q R 3 10. P— K B 4 P-QR3 P-QB4 11. Castles Kt—B 2 12. Kt— B 3 13. B-Q 3 Kt-B3 B— O2 P—B4 The sacrifice B x P ch, as mentioned above, was threatened. 14. Castles 15. If R— Kt I Kt— R5 P-Q Kt 4 White does not wish to lose so many moves with his Kt, he can effect the intended protection of his Q P as follows 7. not P Q-Q 2 P-Q R 3 — Q B 4 at once, because of Kt — Kt 8. Kt-Q I 9- P-Q B 3 5. P-Q B 4 CHESS STRiVTEGY 50 II 7. 8. 9. P—B4 Kt—B 3 Castles p_Q B 4 p_B 4 B—Q 3 Kt 10. Castles —Q B 3 and so on. In both cases White has an easy development, whilst Black has no convenient square for his Queen's Bishop. To avoid this drawback Rubinstein has evolved the following variation, in which provision is made from the first for the freedom of action of the Queen's Bishop : 3. 4. Kt— Q B 3 Kt— K B 3 PxP B— Kt5 to open the diagonal for the Bishop at Q Kt 2, e.g. : 5. 6. followed by KtxP Kt— K B 3 QKt— O2 B— K 2'^ P—Q Kt 3 and B— Kt 2. We will now leave the French defence and tarn our attention to the Caro-Kann, of which the initial position was shown in Diagram 28. Here also we find two essentially different systems of development, according to whether White plays K 5 or gives Black the option of exchanging pawns by In the first case a very noticeable difference 3. Kt—Q B 3. from the French defence is, that Black can bring out his Queen's Bishop. Here the process of development may be P— : 3. 4. P— K 5 B— Q3 B—B 4 BxB Not B—Kt 3, because White could play P— K 6 and paralyse the whole of Black's game by preventing his playing the King's Pawn. ! 56. QxB Kt— K 2 or K R 3 P— K3 THE OPENING 51 Through this the move P — K B 4, which fits into this pawn formation, is kept in reserve. While White's development is easy and natural, Black has difficulty in finding good places for his King's side pieces. The game can proceed generally speaking on the hues of the French defence. Only Black can hardly attack White's — K centre with P B 3, since the Pawn at 3 would be weak in the absence of the Queen's Bishop. On the other hand, Black would be a move behind with an attack on the Queen's Q B 4 his pawn would have made two moves instead of one as in the French defence. A certain compensation lies in the fact that White's attacking King's Bishop has side, since to reach been exchanged. In practical play it has nevertheless been shown that White's attack is more likely to succeed, and for this reason a variation introduced by Niemzowitsch has been tried several times ; aims at the exchange of Queens in order to weaken and retard White's threatened attack, and to gain time for Queen's it side operations. Q~Kt3 6 7. Q — R 3 or Kt 4 Castles But after 8 Kt— B 4, Q X Q 9 Kt x Q, White is so much ahead with his development that Black's chance of equahsing the game would seem questionable. K R 3 on his sixth move, he foils at If White plays Kt once Black's attempt of forcing an exchange of Queens, as he ; — Q— K Kt 3. could play 8 On the whole we can conclude that in the Caro-Kann deK 5. fence White obtains a good game by 3 P A hne of play which used to be in vogue, namely, 3 Kt— — Q B3, PxP; 4 Ktx P. Kt— B 3; 5 KtxKt ch, K PxKt X Kt, gives Black an even chance, for although he pawn he obtains a good development, and later in the game he has opportimities of exercising pressure or Kt P loses his centre on White's Q P through his open Q file. ; CHESS STRATEGY 52 Except the French defence and the Caro-Kann, there is no game in which an irregular reply to White's i P K 4 necessitates any special considerations either in development — of pieces or pawn formation. In all such cases it is sufhcient to occupy such squares with the pieces, whence they cannot be driven away with If Black plays the loss of a move. Just one example I...P Q B 4 (Sicihan defence), White will not play his King's Bishop to B 4, because Black can reply P 3, and gain to maintain the pawn centre and : — a move by P —K —Q 4. B. Let us now consider the openings in which the first move Q 4 on either side. Here the centre cannot be cleared as early as in the openings beginning with i P 4. 4, P The advance of a second centre pawn, which there led to a clearance, is not feasible in this case. White does not command his 4, and for some time to come he will be In consequence pawn beyond unable to advance the 3. file does not seem a likely opening for the Rooks, and the another file must be found for them. The conclusions arrived at for Black in the French defence hold good for both sides in the opening now under consideration, and accordingly the Q B file is that most advantageous for the Rooks. The advance of the Q B P strikes at the opposing centre, and, that being of paramount importance, the Queen's Knight must not be developed at B 3 before the Q B P has been pushed on. Another development might be conceivable for the Rooks is I P — —K —K K K K K here, as viz. on the K B file, and also the K Kt or K R file we shall see, an occasion may arise for storming the opposing King's side by a pawn attack. But in this case, too, although ; it seems unnecessary to play the Q B P, it is advisable to develop the Knight via Q 2, as there is a constant threat of the Q B file being forced open subsequently by the opposing forces. We will start with the games in which the Q B Pawns are played in the earhest stages of the opening, so that the pawn skeleton in Diagram 35 forms the basis of development. The sequence of moves is of moment, because the advance of the K P, whether forced or not, determines the possibility of bringing out the Q Bishops. The simplest process of develop- THE OPENING 53 ment based on Diagram 35 is the following, in which both sides block up the Q B. M WÂ *< ^n^ *. ^ ô " m mmmWM.% m i ^^^' J™ \ ^ Diag. 35. 2. ?•'**»-' * K CHESS STRATEGY 54 P— P— B— Q R 3 ir Castles, Q Kt 4 12 Q 3, the result is the symmetrical position in Diagram 36. ; ; B— Kt 2, 1» 'm^.JmWA ^^^ ^ ^ ^ X ^P i^ ^ W ^ W ^^ i Diag. 36. When treating of the middle game, we shall find that even in this apparently fully equalised position the influence of the move is still at work. In order to obtain a more thorough understanding of the Queen's Pawn game, we must now turn our attention very closely to the opening moves. Already on the second move White can play 2. P Q B 4 and turn the game into a Queen's gambit, which Black can either accept or decline. Black would be justified in playing 2...PxP, and so furthering Wliite's first — object of getting his (Black's) Queen's Pawn away, if he could permanently hold the gambit pawn, or if the giving up of the Q 4 fits into a reasoned system of development. square at The latter was, for instance, the case in the play leading to the position shown in the Diagram 36. But Black is well advised to wait until WTiite has moved the King's Bishop before taking the pawn on his Q B 5. This forces the Bishop to move twice, and Black regains the move he lost in his development, when he played P x P. It would be quite incorrect to try to hold the pawn by P—Q Kt 4 as follows : 2. 3- P—Q B 4 Kt— PxP Kt— K B 3 : THE OPENING 55 P-Q Kt 4 P—K3 P-QR4 'M^JM^klMl Diag. 37. If now Black answers P xP, WTiite simply plays B xP and the P at R 5 is lost very soon. If Black plays instead : 5. . .P—B 3, P; White wins back his pa\Mi with 6 P Q Kt 3, PxKt is much moreover and QxP, ch by 8 7 PxP, PxP ahead with his development. These considerations point to the conclusion that after take the pa\vn. 2 p Q B 4 there is no inducement for Black to which White pawn, centre his cover will he On the contrary, or with K Q B 3. The either 3 away, wishes to tempt playing before Bishop 3 Queen's the develop attempt to remains pawn Kt's the because recommended, Q be to is not unprotected and open to an immediate attack by 3 Q Kt 3. ; — BxP P— P— P—K — Of the two remaining replies, 2...P— K 3 and 2...P— Q B 3, I natural of the will first discuss the former, as being the more opening the for Q B 3 does not fit into the scheme two, since can bring hand, other Q B file for the Rooks. White, on the P— out his Q B before playing P—K 3, in this way 2P—QB4,P— K3; 3Kt—QB3.Kt—KB3; 4B—Kt5, and the game might proceed as follows: 4...Q Kt— Q 2. (Diagram 38.) No fault can be found with this move, although it blocks the Bishop, since the latter can only be developed effectively Moreover, the Knight at Q 2 supports the projected at Kt 2. CHESS STRATEGY 56 —B P 4. WTiite cannot win a pawn now with 5 PxP, PxP ; Kt x Kt 7 B x Q, B— Kt 5 ch. Theremust be played first, and after B K 2 K 3 fore 5 P Castles; 6Kt—B 3, 7 R— B i, P— Q Kt 3; 8 PxP, PxP; all the pieces have found rational deveKt B 2, B 9 Q 3, 6 Kt X P, because of ; — — — ; — lopment. M mm A MeiaW » a i i B.._...M„„„m,.^ M M ^ 2 ^ Diag. 38. Quite a different system of opening ensues, when Black does not delay pushing the P to Q B 4 until after his pieces are developed, but makes the advance on his third move. Here Black has the advantage of being able to avoid the pinning of his Knight by the opposing Q B. 2. P—Q B 4 Kt-Q B 3 4. Kt—B 3 3. P—K3 P-QB4 Kt-Q B 3 ! Now Black threatens Q P x P with an attack on White's Queen's Pawn. If White plays 3 we get the position mentioned in connection with Diagram 35. If he wishes to bring out his Q B first, he must anticipate Black's threat by P— K BPxP. After 5. BPxP KPxP the third of the typical main positions in the Queen's gambit ensues, and is given in Diagram 39. THE OPENING 57 White can either Two continuations must now be considered. K B at Kt 2, and concentrate on the Black Q P, B on one of which is somewhat weak, or he can place the K In the first R 6. and the available squares between B i the Q B and all, at played instance, the K P need not be develop his Diag. 39. Kt 5. B 4. '«ind even K 3. for the K B. In the second, where the K P must make room Kt or 5, and only White must decide at once between B— B 4 retains the option of developing at B 4 can be seriously considered on account of 6. B—K2 B— Kt 5 KtxB 7. BxB White would only which only furthers Black's development. win a pawn with be justified in this course if he could now the superior have and 8 PxP, but Black would win it back «^'"'^"'' P-Q5 8 9. Kt— K 4 Castles B—B 4 and Q-R 4 ch. followed by this variation is The correct move in consequently 6 B-B 4, and a possible continuation would be : Kt— K B 3 ; 7 P-K 3. B— K 3 ; 8 R_Q B I or B— Q Kt 5 or B— Q 3vanations With this we will close the discussion of the 2...P— reply the study and initiated by 2 P— Q B 4, P— K 3, . . CHESS STRATEGY 58 Q B 3. file The first question which arises in our mind is Which Black be able to utilise for his Rooks ? An attempt : will file through P— K 4 is conceivable. But White can prevent this by simply playing Kt K B 3. There remains only the following variation, commonly called to free the King's the " Stonewall Defence," which leaves a chance for Black's Rook to act on the B file and eventually on the Kt file. K 3. Kt— K B 3 4. 5. K P- K3 P- KB4 Kt- -B3 P-K 3 Kt-K 5 BiH ^ ^ ^mHI mm ^M, mm. i * w%m P7^# Wm> "mk 4. ^M ^P ^ ^# ^PK„m.,M, mi ^ ^1 ^M & Diag. 40. The development metrical of pieces can now become quite sym- : 6. 78. P—B 4 B-Q 3 B— Q 3 Q Kt-Q 2 Kt-Q2 Kt-K 5 Only White has the advantage in that his Q B can take up a Kt 2, where it protects the Kt at K 5 past position at whilst Black's Q B is completely hemmed in. Q 4, At the outset, also, White can prevent Black's Knight from settling on his K 5 by maintaining the option of playing P-B P-Q B-Q B-Q Kt 3, 3 ; e.g. 6 3 J 7 3, Castles; 8 Castles, Q Kt— Q 2 Kt 2, and White has in con9 sequence by far the greater mobility. Of course the " Stonewall " can also be played by White, ; B— THE OPENING who is then 59 just shown. a move to the good in the variation from modern But this opening has practically disappeared easily be cannot B the Q tournament games, simply because _ brought into play. . .. ^ .t. c. .u " btonewaii The following variation is remmiscent of the centre pawns. White develops his in the formation of the shown m conQueen's side just as Black did in the opening nection with Diagram 38. 2. P-QB4 Kt—K B 3 Kt-Q B 3 Kt—B3 P-K 3 4- B-Q 3 5. P-Q Kt 3 6. B— Kt 2 3- 7. 8. P-K3 B—Q3 PxP O Kt— Q 2 PxP Castles MMP Â IB Ifti^Mmm ^m. ± Mi. X ± ^m. I'* Hi * ^ ^ W^, WM ii„« '^P 'mm. iMtfM fa, 181 Diag. 41- White can now settle his Knight at K 5, and B 4, Q-B 3, which King's side attack after castling, by P-K initiate a violent K-R P-K R-K Kt i. Kt 4, could be continued with been reached. has and so on. Once the position in Diagram 41 of the onslaught Black's resources against the dangerous making not by retahate, are scanty. Yet he can i, White forces moves, as menthe simplest and most obvious developing way tioned before, but in the following Q Kt 3 before castling, Black If White plays 5. with the Queen. Now White checks exchanges pawns and : P— has the disagreeable choice between B—Q 2 and P—B 3. CHESS STRATEGY 6o The former must be bad, being contrary to the plan of development as intended by P— Q Kt 3. The latter blocks the very diagonal on which the Bishop was meant to operate. White can open up the diagonal by playing P— Q B 4 after castling, nor would it really imply the loss of a move to have played the B P twice, since Black must move his Queen again from R 4, where she has no future. But in any case there remains the disadvantage that White was forced to play the B P, whilst before he had the option of withholding its advance until a more opportune moment. Another possible subtlety in Black's sequence of developing moves would be to withhold the advance of his K P until White has played P— Q Kt 3, and then to play the Q 3 to Kt 5. For, as I have already remarked, the objection to developing Black's Queen's Bishop lies in White's threat to attack Black's Q Kt P with Kt 3. That possibility disappears after P Q— —Q Kt 3. Before bringing the discussion of the Queen's Pawn to a close, I opening may remark that in tournaments it has become P— usual for White not to play Q B 4 at once, but to play Kt B 3 as a prehminary, in order to avoid the comphcations of the Queen's counter gambit: 2 O B a —K P— ^ P— K 4. If White plays 3 PxK P, Black's reply is P— ^' Q 5, and the P— K 3 fails on account of the following pretty combination: B — Kt 5 ch 5 B — Q 2, PxP; 6 BxB PxP ch 7 K—K 2, PxKt ch 8 RxKt, B— Kt 5 ch, etc! Instead of 4 P— K 3, White should play P— K Kt 3 and obvious move 4 ; ; ! ! ; develop his K B at Kt 2. Black could now try to regain his pawn with Kt— K 2— Kt 3, but he can also sacrifice a pawn by P —K B It 3, with a view to rapid development. now only remains for us to discover whether Black has any other answer to P—Q 4 which would necessitate close analysis on WTiite's part. — Here must be mentioned i...Kt K B 3, i...p Q B 4 and I...P K B 4. The former move prepares P Q 3, followed by P— K 4. In this opening there is no reason why White should play P— Q B 4, as there is no prospect of opening — : — Q B file for the Rooks. Furthermore, Black has relinquished the square Q 4 and made K 4 the basis of operations. the : ; 6i THE OPENING from playing be more advisable to prevent Black with a conformity in 4 as far as this can be achieved will It p_K 63:2 Kt-K B 3. A, Kt-K development, e.g. i then lead into the Not 2 Kt— Q B 3, because Black could B 4, after which and 4 Queen's gambit by playing to open the able being not of White has the disadvantage 3Kt-Q 2 4 4. Q Q B file. 2.. .P-Q 3 3 B and after Q 3 4 2^ Now Black can only enforce P-Q logical P-Q P-Q B-B P-K ; P-K ; P-B whilst Blacks Q B Meanwhile White mobilises all his pieces, remain at Q 2 to cover the remains blocked and the Kt must pawns m order K P. If. on the other hand, Black exchanges left. centre Black no is there to free the Knight, to i With regard to the second irregular reply open to White. namely, I...P-Q B 4, two ways are P—Q 4' One is playby ordinary Queen's gambit to turn the opening into an is second The on which Black can play P—Q 4- p_K 3 side P—Q 5. Black will then develop his King'sposted well The Bishop with P— K Kt 3 and B— Kt 2. position at K ing to play 2 is 4 an attacking here and can frequently take up Rubinstein v. Spielmann.) No. Game 45. (See or O 5 have after 2. .P-K 3 a Queen s If White plays 2 P X P, we before, this hne accepted by White, and, as pointed out . gambit of play is not commendable. mentioned above The last of the three irregular answers p_K B 4 leads to two entirely different plans, according I by White. to the second move chosen such as White can confine himself to a simple development : Kt-K B 3. B-Kt 5. P-K3. Q Kt-Q 2 (Kt-B 3 would P— B 4. because Black would only be good if preceded by with gambit Q B 4) 4 and Queen's again lead into a fact that the of view in following the is The other possibility development, P__K B 4 does absolutely nothing to aid I a violent attack by giving up his King's P-Q P— • : mite can initiate development. The Pawn (P— K 4) and thus accelerate his own P 3 Kt-Q B 3. Kt-K B 3 play might be as follows 2. .P X B X Kt followed by Q— R 5 ch) ? 4 B— K Kt 5, P— B 3 (P— Q 4 5 : . ; ; Black takes the pawn he lays himself open to an 6, which It seems best to play 5... irresistible assault. hindrance a as P B White's B and leaves White c p_B 3 If calls back the P-K Q to the development of the K Kt. CHESS STRATEGY 62 Irregular Openings Many openings in which neither P— K 4 nor P— first move lead to well-known positions Q 4 is the by a simple transposition of moves. For instance, a Queen's gambit may well have the following opening moves i P Q B 4 Kt K B 3 — : • Kt-K B 3. P-K 3 3 Kt-B 3, P-B 4'; 4 P-K P—Q 4 5 P— Q 4. or a French defence these i Kt—Q B 3 P-Q 4 2 P-Q 4, Kt-K B 3 3 B-Kt 5, P-K 3 2 3,' ; ; : ; '; ; 4 P-K 4. There are, of course, systems of opening which deviate absolutely from those which have been proved sound and are in general use. and it is those openings that puzzle the beginner most of all. He says What is the good of learning correct openings, if my opponent plays incorrectly and wins : all the same ? tion. This line of thought is wrong from its incepThe student is not supposed to " learn " openings by how the general principles of Chess Strategy are applied to any opening. Such knowledge can never be obtained from a tabulated analysis, but can only be arrived at by the application of common sense. If a player succeeds in wanning in spite of an inferior opening, it only proves that subsequently he has played a stronger game than his opponent, who, after playing the opening according to the book, did not know how to proceed further. And herein hes the weakness, and not in the absence of knowledge of the analysis of openings. The latter is rated far too highly. Any player will hold his own in the opening, as soon as he has grasped the real meaning of those principles which I cannot repeat often enough, viz. ist, quick development of pieces and avoidance of lost moves 2nd, the maintenance of a pawn heart, but to understand : ; centre, hampering the development of the opposing forces, and the avoidance of pawn moves that do not contribute to the development of pieces. How to conduct the middle game and end-game is not entirely a matter of deduction from such general rules. In order to play the end-game correctly, one must know certain things and positions which arise from and may be said to be peculiar to the purely arbitrary rules of chess. The same aoplies to THE END-GAME 63 the middle game, as in most cases it must be played with a view to the end-game which ensues, unless there be a chance oi The student should have, mating the opponent before. therefore, a knowledge of the end-game before he can hope to be able to conduct the middle game efficiently. For this reason of the end-game first. I have decided to treat CHAPTER V THEEND-GAME Just as it is difficult to state the exact point at which an opening ends, so is it equally difficult to say where the end-game may be said to commence. One of the main characteristics of end-games is the active part taken by the King. Clearly the King cannot venture out into the field of operations until there has been an exchange of the majority of the pieces, As so that there can be no danger of his being mated. material in soon as a player has attained some advantage which ensures the victory in the end-game, he will try to bring about the end-game by exchanging pieces, for there the lines on which to push home his advantage are clearly set out. It is first necessary to know what surplus of forces is the minimum required in order to force a mate. The positions in which the mate can be forced may be shown by a few typical examples. But I shall lay stress mainly on one point. That is the ability to judge whether an end-game which could be brought about by exchanges is won or not in other words, whether it can be reduced to one of the typical positions referred to above. It is obvious that the end-game is the particular demesne Nearly always one or more pawns survive of pawn strategy. the exchange of pieces, and the knowledge of the end-game will be invaluable for gauging the consequences of pawn moves The latter represents proin the course of the middle game. bably the most difficult aspect of the strategy of chess. In order to enable beginners to grasp the following chap; must again point out a few elementary considerations. Simple end-games, that is, end-games without pawns, arecom- ters, I paratively easy to understand. Let us first consider the case ; CHESS STRATEGY 64 of a King denuded of all his troops. In order to force the mate necessary to obtain command of four squares, namely, those four squares which he controls after he has been driven it is Supposing the Black King has been driven to into a corner. Q R I, the White King can prevent him from reaching two squares of different colour, namely, Q R 2 and Q Kt 2. Therefore it necessary for White still to have such forces as can is command two more squares of different colour, namely, Q R i and Q Kt I. As can readily be seen, it will be essential to have at least the Queen or a Rook or two Bishops, or a Knight and Bishop, or two Knights.^ We shall see that in the latter case it is impossible to drive the King into a comer without bringing about a stalemata The mates by a Queen or Rook are so simple that I only give an example of each for the sake of completeness. Position I—White K at Q R i, Q— K R i Black K at K 4 : : K— Kt I 2, K—Q 5 K— Kt 2 ; K— K4 3, 3 ; K—B 4. K-Q 3 4 Q-K 4. K-Q 2 5 K-B 5, K-B i 6 K-B 6. K— Kt I 7 Q—Q R 4, or Kt 4 ch, or K 7, or R 7 and mate ; ; ; ; next move. 2—White K at Q Kt 3, R K R 2 Black K at K 4 I K—B 4, K— Q 3 2 R— K 2, K— B 3 3 R— K 6 ch, Position : : ; B 6, ; K-Q 5, K-B 2 5 K-B K-Q 2 6 R-K R— K 7 ch, K—Q i 8 K— Q 6, K-B i 9 K— K—Kt I 10 R—K K—R 7 11 R— K 8, K— R 3 K-Q 2 K-B 2 4 7 ; ; 5, ; ; i, ; i, ; ; ; — R 8 mate. ; 12 R 3—White K at Q R sq, B at K Kt sq, B at K Kt 2 Black K at K R sq Position : : K—Kt 2 2 K-B K-B 3 3 K-Q I K— Kt K— K 3 4 B—R K-B 3 5 K-Q K-B 4 6 B—K K— Kt 4 7 K—K K— Kt 5 8 B—Q R K— Kt 4 K— Kt 3 10 B— K B K—R 3 11 K—B 9 B—B K—R 2 12 B—Kt K—R i 13 B— Q K—R 2 14 B—B 2 ch, K— R I B—B 6 mate. 2, 3, ; 2, ; 6, ; 3, 8, 6, 5, ; 7, ; i, ; ^ 5, ; ; ; ; 4, ; 5, ; How the King can be driven into a corner will be shown subsequently. ; ; THE END-GAME 6s Knight and Bishop. It is square of the same colour corner a on mate only possible to shows clearly. A argument following the as as the Bishop, does not comBishop the which corner the in position mating Diagram 42. in out set type of the be to have mand would Knight in the and squares, White on plays Bishop Here the in square White a to on move must checkmate to order Therefore, other words, he must come from a Black one. when the Bishop checked on the previous move and drove squares, the King away, the King had the option of two black It is more difficult to mate with ; He is only and had no need to go into the corner one. mated in consequence of a wrong move. ^ WA 1 ^^ WM. WM^y. ^P Diag. 42. As stated above, however, it is possible in all cases to mate in the corner square which is of the same colour as the Bishop. Tlie King is driven into the corner in this way not the Knight cuts him off such squares as the Bishop does illustration. as an serve command. Diagram 43 will B 3. B 3 3 Kt 2 2 Q 4> Kt 2, I Kt 6 B— K5, B B 4 3. 5 3 3 4 Kt— Kt 3, i Kt 8 B R 5, 2 K_Kt 3 7 Kt—K 4, ch, Kt— i Kt R B Kt— 7 10 I Kt 5, B 6, 9 K i 14 Kt— B i 13 B— R 7. Kt I 12 B— K 4, : K— K— K— K— K— K— K— K— n K— K— K— K— K— K— K K—Q I 15 Kt—B K—B 2 16 B— K K— Q 2 K— B 2 18 K— K K—B i 19 K—Q 17 K—B K—Q I 20 B— Kt K— B i 21 Kt— R K— Q i K— K— K_K K— ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; 5. 7, ; ; 4, ; 7, ; 6, 4, ; ; ; 6, ; 5, E ; CHESS STRATEGY 22 Kt— Kt 7 ch, K— B I 23 K— B 6, K— Kt i 24 K— Kt 6, Kt i 26 Kt— ch, K— B— B B K—B I 25 5 5, K— R i i Kt— ch, K— I 28 6 Kt R R 29 B— Q 5 27 B— K 6, K— 66 ; ; ; ; ; ; mate. ^ ^^^ WM^. ^ ?^ *'^*24 P i ^'^^ ^^ ^ ^'w^ '^'ww"^ » 1^ ^^ ^P ^^^ ^P ^W^ S\ S???2%?% Diag. 43. It is Knights. impossible to force a mate with the King and two On the same grounds as given with respect to Diagram 42, the mate can only be attained through the opponent making a bad move. But a mate can be forced if the weaker side has a spare move which prevents the stalemate, e.g. Diagram 44. ^^ W '^^ ^'w^!^ ^P. 'MM W3^^WB '^1 '^M Diag. 44. I Kt (K 3)-Q K-Kt 2 2 K-B K-R 3 3 K-Kt K—Kt 2; 4 K— Kt K—R 2; 5 Kt—B K-Kt 2; 6 Kt (B 7)— K K—R 2 7 Kt—Q K— Kt i 8 K— Kt ^ 5, 5, ; 5, 8, ; 7, ; 6, ; 4, ; K-R I II 67 THE END-GAME 10 K^-Kt 5. P-B 5 9 Kt—Q 7. P-B 4 J 1 ; Kt—B 7 mate. Having decided as to the smallest amount of material mate, we will without now turn our attention to simple game endings (still be only To judge such endings correctly, it will pawns). the obtain out whether it is possible to advantage with which it is possible to force a necessary to find minimum advantage mentioned. It is sufficient to discuss plays against a stronger cases in which a piece on the one side several pieces are one on the other, because in endings where circumstances are generally the left on either side, fortuitous to charactense deciding factors, and it would be impossible illustratypical giving and classify positions of that kind, by exchanges by later or Besides, they are reduced sooner tions. already, or are gomj to such end-games as have been treated to be shown now. Rook The Queen wins against any other piece; the a illustrate we Diagram In 45 alone may give trouble. ^^^5?^' sr^ m M "mA WM. WA i m m M m Diag. 45. position which is one of the most favourable to the weaker side. 2 I Q— R 6 leads to nothing, as R—B 2 ch follows, and after K— Kt 6 Black forces a stalemate with R— B 3 ch. It is necessary for White to gain a move in this position in other words. White must try to transfer to the other side the onus of having to move. If then the Rook moves away from CHESS STRATEGY 68 King plays a few checks or if Black's the King, it gets lost after 6 equally lost through to B I, the Rook is i i ch. 2 I 5 therefore White plays 2 3^.R-B example 5, and wins, I 3 ch. Ri 6 3 ch. ch, 3 2 5 5 ch, 4 K-Kt ; Q-K Q-R K-R ; Q-R K-R Q-K : fr K- Q-K . Q-R . Q-K piece in exceptional cases ^""Vhe Rook can win against a minor Bishop the weaker Kmg In endings of Rook against only of different colour from mult take refuge in a comer square For instance, Diagram 46 of his Bishop. : that — — mm ' m^wP^^^ M__MI Diag. 46. I R_Q 5 B-B 5 (or R 2) ; R-Q 8 ch, B-Kt i, and 2 the eighth Rank.' Black is stalemate unless the Rook leaves colour as that Any outside square which is not of the same the pieces Imagme King. of the Bishop is dangerous for the of the centre the towards in Diagram 46 shifted two squares board, as in Diagram 47, and White wins with 1. 2. 3. The Bishop B—R5 B—Ki R—Q Kt 5 R—Kt 8 ch R—R 8 is lost, as it is Black's move. In endings of Rook against Knight, the weaker where the Knight is cut off from his King. In this " oblique Q5 For instance, in Diagram 48, i squares: Knight's opposition" the Rook takes four of the side loses, R— t...Kt— K 8 ; 2 K—B Kt—B 7 5, ; 3 1 K— K 4. Kt—R 6 (Kt— THE END-GAME Kt 5 ? is • 4 always 69 In this ending there the position a fatal check at some point, and the R— Kt 5 ch wins the Knight). ! m 4/. \ ^ %yy. my& m^. ^^ ^/M ^1 ^ ^^ m§> f^/ '^/yyA %y,y 1^ •WMwM r4fcj WM m ^^^'1 5//////^ w3 ^5552^^^ ^'-^^ m Diag. 47. K—Q K—B 2 diagram is not in any way a chance win. 4 R i, and wins. Q R Kt— Kt 8 6 5 R— 5, 3, ; R— ; S » Diag. 48. support the As soon as the Knight can obtain the King's forced on to game is dravMi even when the King is already the edge of the board. Position— White Black: : I R_Q B 5, K-Q I ; 2 K at K 6, R at K5 K at K i, Kt at Q R 2 K-Q 6. Kt-B i ch ; 3 K-B 6. CHESS STRATEGY 70 Kt—K 2 ch, draw. In this case the King must avoid the comers, as the Knight would be bereft of his efficiency. Position—White Black I R_K 4, Kt—Kt I ch ; : : 2 K at K R 6, R at K R 4 K at K R i, Kt at K 2 K—Kt 6 and wins. We come now to the more interesting part of end-game play, namely, pawn endings. The best course will be first to study how to turn a material superiority in pawns to decisive advantage, after which we shall note particular positions, in which a win is possible with an equality or even an inferiority in pawns. The ending of Kmg and pawn against King is one of the simplest albeit one of the most important of elementary cases. The stronger side will evidently try to queen the pawn. But generally this is not possible if the adverse King has command of the queening square. One important condition, though, the weaker King must move into must be comphed with " opposition," and " opposition " is one of the characteristic and deciding factors in most pawn endings. It is absolutely necessary for the learner to understand fully the meaning of the term " opposition," and its value in elementary cases. This knowledge is of far reaching influence in end-games. : ^ fM ^ fM ^ ¥M THE END-GAME 71 With this move White assumes the opposition. That is, he moves into the same rank or file, separated by one square only, so that both Kings stand on squares of the same colour. White has moved last, it is Black's turn to move it is said " White has the opposition." We shall soon in this case that if he succeeds see that Black is only able to draw the game, having that, means in assuming the opposition himself (which ; the move, he should step into opposition). 2. . .K— Q 2 ; 3 P— Q 6 (Diagram 50). /'''''''^'W'^'^^''^^W% 'WM ii Diag. 50. I propose now to recapitulate. is the critical sixth rank. the reaches playing White for lost, This moment, namely, when the pawn If now Black plays K —K K—K 6 has the opposition. — i he is After 4^,,K— Q I, 5 P Q 7, Black is forced to allow the White King to move to K 7, covering the queening square; 5,..K B 2, But Black has a draw in the 5 Y^ K 7, any 7 P queens. (not K i). position of Diagram 50, by playing 3...K— Q i — — ; ! ! Now after 4 K — K 6 he keeps the opposition himself with K—K I and after 5 P—Q 7 ch, K—Q i 6 K—Q 6, he is ; ; stalemated, or else wins the pawn if White plays differently on his sixth move. The King draws against King and pawn retain the if he commands the queening square, and if he can into moves the pawn opposition on the first rank as soon as his sixth. It is of the utmost importance that the pawn should be : CHESS STRATEGY 72 at his sixth ; the pawn is still further back, the opposition if on the first rank is of no avail. Diagram 51 will serve as an example. mm. ' '''^^^""^''' '^wi ^'^^P mm I ^p Having the move, ^p p 'mm %m f£ vm Wm. Diag. 51. White would only draw with P—B 5, because Black's wins the pawn. Kt 6, B i But White wins as follows i K— : B 6, K— K I ; 3 K— K 6, K—Q i ; K—B 2 K— 2 K— K— K— Q B sq 4 ; 6, -« M^ M ^8 m « m WM»WM M «WM ^ m ^ ™WM» « M 'wm. ^ 'T€ wm. 'mm WM, m m. 'W^y wm Diag. 52. — K— Q sq. We see Black has just assumed the 5 P B 5, opposition, but the pawn has not yet crossed to his sixth square, : and White, by playing P to give up the opposition. —B 6, again forces Black THE END-GAME 73 with P-B 6 this way might be more clear to put it in a position about brings White wins the opposition, in that he White. for won is game the with Black to move. Therefore when avail, no of is rank outside Since the opposition on the weaker the square, sixth his to the pawn has not yet played xth the opposing Kmg from the s away keep to try must side is possible This rank. that reached rank until the pa.vn has the stronger such as that in Diagram 53, where : It in positions Diag. S3. pawn, and the King is not more than one rank ahead of his position m the In opposition. the weaker King can assume opposition the maintains and Q4 Diagram 53 Black plays similar position, typical a which after until the pawn moves, is brought Diagram with 50 connection to the one treated in K— about. If K—B White has the move, however, he wins 4, thus easily by i : I. 2. 3- 4. 5- K-Q3 K—Kt 5 K—B5 K-Q6 K—B6 K—B2 K— Kt 2 K—Bi and there is opposition on the eighth rank not reached the sixth. whilst the pawn has CHESS STRATEGY 74 If the King is more than one rank ahead of his pawn, as in Diagram 54, the end-game can always be won, for if Black 'W^ aXm. WWJ^ '^^^ " ^P^ »^^ BwmBi M. m. m im '^^ ^ 'wm . Diag. 54. takes the opposition with again, winning a move by K—Q 3, White deprives him of it P—B 3, and the position is similar to that in Diagram 53, with White to move. K-Q3 K-B 3 I P— Kt 3 3- K-B 4 2. and wins. This settles all typical end-games of King and pawn against King. There is, however, one exception to the rules set out, namely, when a Rook's pawn is concerned. Here the isolated King always succeeds in drawing if he can reach the comer where the pawn has to queen, for he cannot be driven out weaker The Rook's pawn affords another opportunity for the side to draw. Diagram 55 will illustrate this, and similar positions again. are of frequent — occurrence in practice. Here Black draws with I...K B 5. As he threatens to capture the pawn, White must play 2 P— R 4. Then after the reply B 4, White is still unable to cut the opponent off from the corner with Kt 2, as the loss of the pawn is still threatened through Kt 5. And after 3 P— R 5 Black attains the position which is typical for this end-game, namely the opposition against the King on the Rook's file. K— K— K— THE END-GAME 75 the contested cannot escape without giving up 3.-.K— 3; 4 ^7. B comer, and the game is draw-n. The latter K-B 2 K—B I K-R 8, K-B i ; 6 P-R 6. K-B 2 ; 5 ; and WTiite is stalemated. ; ^P-^ 7. 7 Diag. 55- End-games with a majority of one pawn, when more simple to manipulate. still have pawns, are much which Diagram 56 is a Such games result in positions of both sides ^ m m ^wM, i I m ^WMS ^B^ ^^^''^^ 'mm. ^P ^^ WM IM^y W3/, WM ^ 'mm. Diag. 56. Here White does not even need to Queen The mere threat forces the win. For the his passed pawn. typical instance. pawn at Kt 4 reduces the mobility of the Black King, in so CHESS STRATEGY 76 far as the latter must at all times be ready to reach the queening square in as few moves as the pawn, or else the pawn The White King can would queen unmolested. therefore capture the opposing Bishop's pawn in peace and then queen his own. K—K 3 2 P— Kt K— K 2 3 K— K I K— K K—B 2 4 K—Q and so on or I...K—Kt 4 2 K—K KxP 3 K—Q K—B 4; 4 KxP, K— K 3 5 K—Kt 4, 5, ; 6, ; ; ; ; 6, ; ; 5. 5, 2, and so on. Such positions as Diagram 56 are also reached when there are The stronger side exchanges several pawns on each wing. there is a majority until the extra where pawns on the wing pawn is passed. The winning process is not quite so simple when all the pawns are on the same wing, because exchanges are of no use unless the King can assume the opposition in front of the last remaining pawn (compare notes to Diagram 53). In Diagram 57, for instance, White must not play P B 4. Therefore he can only win by gaining the Knight's Pawn, — ^ ^ m m r M ^ W^M Wf3 m, ES^ i »j m wÂ ^^mm.wm El s m " " 'wm' »fwm""'' '' •/////////, B g gj B Diag. 57. that is, by bringing his King to B 5. This he achieves by King to relinquish the opposition with forcing the Black I P-B 3. 2 K— K K— Kt 2 3 K— Q K— Kt 3 K—Kt 2 5 K—B K— R 3 6 K—B and I...K—B 3 4 K—Q 5, 5, ; ; 6, ; 5, wins, as Black must abandon the pawn. ; ; 6, THE END-GAME 77 occnrrence This position, being o{ frequent study valuable a as it I recommend most imporis tant, and *' Before Tdiscuss positions of greater the onlv way to win is by m the use of complexity, in which sacrificing the extra pawn, I shall ensure li-games in which positional advantages shall we Here equal. pawns are the victory although the he about brmg manoeuvres cases in which pawn tjl find simple ^n,tnd more intricate ones in which King moves are the important type is the end-game ^''of^fhe' trmer the most the pawn." A typical example is with the "distant passed wms. Black Diagram 58, in which position in Diag. 58. The King's moves are outlined by the necessity of captur- after which the Black King is ing the opposing passed pa^^•n, (the Queen's side), so that the files nearer the battle-field two \\Tiite pa^vns must fall. xr+ K-Kt 4, K-Kt 3, K-B 3 3 xr KP-R 6 K-Kt 3, 4 K-B 5 3 K-K 4 4 P-B 4 ch, R4^K—B5; yKxP.KxP; 8 K— Kt 6, K—K 4, and so on. I K-Kt 2, K-Kt 2 . ; 2 : ; ; ; lost for For similar reasons the position in Diagram 59 wing White obtains a passed pawn on the opposite Black to abandon King Black the forces He that of the King. is to pawns, and these are lost. I give the moves characterbecause this is another important example his King's side in full — CHESS STRATEGY 78 istic of the ever recurring necessity of applying our arithmetical By simply enumerating the moves necessary for either player to queen his pawn separately for White and Black— rule. we can see the result of our intended manoeuvres, however far ahead we have to extend our calculations. I P— R 4, K— K 3 ; 2 P— R 5, PxP ; 3 PxP, K— Q 3 Now the following calculations show that Black is lost. White needs ten moves in order to queen on the King's side, namely, five to capture the Black King's side pawns (K K 4, B 5, Kt 6, R 6, Kt 5), one to free the way for his pawn, and four moves with the pawn. After ten moves, Black only — 1^ i WM,^ §M .... wM,^ m. ^» mi Diag. 59. pawn to B 6. He requires six moves to capture the White Queen's side pawns, one to make room for his pawn gets his B 3, and after three moves the pa^^^l only gets to B 6. White then wins by means of many checks, forcing the Black King to block the way of his own pawn, thus gaining time for his King to approach. As we shall see later on (p. 97), if the pa\vn had already reached B 7, whilst under protection by his K, the game would be drawn. at ' It is necessary to make it a rule to examine positions in which each side has a passed pawn, by counting the moves in the way first shown. It is just because end-games can be calculated +0 a nicety, there being no moves of which the THE END-GAME 79 note in contemporary consequences cannot be foreseen, that we middle-game by the simplify to master play a tendency advaninfinitesimal is an there as soon as exchanging pieces, Charousekgame the (compare position tage in the pawn Heinrichsen, p. io8). .-. We will now turn our attention to positions m which the , pawns opposed on each wing are of passed pawn can be forced through. the relative position of the Kings. ^-l. number and no equal Everything depends on The deciding factor m moves are possible, Vraluing the King's position is whether pawn nearly exhausted, so or whether they are already entirely or The followpossible. that only manoeuvres by the King are see that shall ing illustrations make the position clear. paramount. is opposition the importance of getting the simple instance in which there are no We Diagram 60 shows a mi Pi tiJ M. ^^ »^ ^'^^ ^ Wm ^^,^ WM fm , m fri Diag. 60. Whoever has the move wins by assuming The opposing King must then give the way more pawn moves. the opposition. free to one of the pawns. , that in The state of affairs in Diagram 61 is similar to opposition Diagram 60. Having the move, White plays into Black's Bishop's pawn is his way to 5. after which Q and forces "'iK-K4,K-Q3; 2K-B5. K-Q2; 3K-K5.K-B3; 6 K-Q 6, and so 5 K-Q 5. K-Kt 3 4 K-K 6, K-B 2 ; ; on (compare Diagram 57). If Black has the move he can only "; CHESS STRATEGY 8o draw, because the White Bishop's pawn is covered even though Black gains the square at Q 5. K K— K— K— B5 3 Q 2 and whatI...K— 4 2 Q 3, ever Black plays White wins the opposition, so that the Black 2 loses the game because King's ingress is stopped 2 ; K— K ; of 6 9 K-Q 3...K-K 5; K— B K— I, 4 Q6 7 ; 2, K— Kt K-Q 5 2, K— R 2, K—B 7, and wins. w^, ; 5 ; K-B ! 1 2, K— Q 7 8 K— Kt ; i, K-K 6; K—B 6 ^^ »M^M ™ m. m Wm^mm rf'^1 „. i mi. WM. 'W Mm ^Wi^mW.»J P^ ! Diag. 61. take this opportunity of explaining what is called In Diagram 62, White with the move wins by i K 2, thus assuming " distant opposition (squares of the same colour 11). If Black now enters his second rank. White immediately plays into opposition on I shall " distant opposition." —K his third rank, I...K— Q 2; 2 K— Q 3, and still mainBlack plays a waiting move such as 2...K K 2. Now Black has no further waiting moves, as White threatens to capture one of the pawns. But playing into the third rank is of no use, as White then assumes the direct opposition, and wins as in Diagram 60. Black must allow White access to one side or the other. He could not have remained on the first rank at the outset either, for after I...K— Q I, WTiite advances through a square, to which Black cannot assume the opposition, namely, 2 K B 3. If now Black wishes to answer the threat of K B 4 Kt 5 and plays K 2, White answers 3. K 3 as before. tains it — by 3. K K— e.g. —K 3 if K— — — — 8i THE END-GAME 2 then K—K 3 or K Q 3 would be wTong, as Black would and would K 2 Q succeed in assuming the opposition at to circumvent unable be would White be able to maintain it. pawns. this or to attack the or 2. Diag. 62. In this position, too, there ample scope for the study of is King" who has ''^Tfhe'pa^ are still standing behind, the advantage beposition has always the the most advanced th y the opposing pawns ôuW cause he threatens to' attack disposal, more pawn moves at his leave their base. White has opposition in assuming the succeed anT™5l nearly always wins move, White, having the For instance, in Diagram 63, the centre of the board because his King gets first into Black has ^-^.^•/lfr^'5KJ|ti,'8KxP,VBa. maintain it, having no pawn now the opposition but camiot King threatens to capture any moês avaUable, The White „ „ ,, " dP-B K-K 2 10 K-Q K-Q 2 and wins as K-K 2 13 P-B P B^ ch 12 K-K which a after K-Q Bkck wiU soon be compelled to play oawn that ventures forward. q K-K 5, • Tt 5. ; 5, ; ^ 4. 5. ! 2, Queen's Bishop s manLê shown previously gives White the P'Ts P-K R 4; M P-K R 4. P-R 4; K-Q 2 : 16 K-B 6, K-0 I ; 17 K-K 15 P-R 4I 6, and so on^ CHESS STRATEGY 82 Diagram 63 the King stood at Q 2 instead of B i, he manage to draw. WTiite takes eleven moves to capture the Black King's side pawns, and to queen one of If in could just rnÂ M S î#B mm '^. P fm m>. mm i ^P W3 W^ f/M i WM' i- fmmm f^m^m^ wm. '^m Wm WM m. WA WMA m Diag. 63. In eleven moves Black can be easily seen. captures the opposing Q B P and queens his own. We see here how the King's position can be counterbalanced by the weakness of a pawn, and lead to a draw. If the White Q B P was not isolated but standing, for instance, at Q Kt 2, Black would be lost, as calculation easily shows. The strength or weakness of a pawn position, which, as we saw, had so deciding an influence in the end-game position just treated, is one of the most important factors in a game of chess, and should have full consideration in the middle game. A pawn, when isolated, is naturally weaker than when it is or can be protected by another. It may easily lead to the loss of a game, as the mobility of the King or a piece is reduced by having to protect the pawn (compare End-game, his own, as p. 102). It pawns is frequently and erroneously thought that doubled Doubled pawns are weak when isolated, for they cannot support each other. But if doubled pawns can be supported by a pawn on the next file they need not by any means be at a disadvantage against three united single pawns on the opposite side. For instance, in Diagram 64, if Black had a pawn at Q Kt 3 instead of R 2, as such are a weakness. THE END-GAME 83 not attack White would have no winning chances. He could force a passed the pawns, nor would any kind of manoeuvres through pawn through. In the diagram, however, White wins wmWM W^:. WM ¥M ^P ^'y^'^ Diag. 64. I K—B 5 R3 ; 2 ; Black cannot then hold the pawn at B 3. i. . .P— P—Kt 4. fact In this particular case the win is made easy by the at pawn that the White King is able to attack the Black of weakness But even without this advantage, the once. %^M » 'm. t mm. W^M m. p II' mm 9a kwM WA 'W/Z/Z/A m wa WW mm wm^, W/Â mi 'a"''''''^^W/'. fm Wf/ W^^'C/ m. m WM Diag. 65. doubled pawns usually entails the loss of the game. Diagram 65 may serve as an example. B 4 ch 2 B 4, B 3 3 B 3 I Q 4. wins. and ch B B Kt 3 4 5 3 4, 5, Q K— K— ; P— K— ; P— K— ; K— K— ; P— CHESS STRATEGY 84 Doubled pawns are a drawback, even when not isolated, should there be no way of obtaining a passed pawn by exchanging them against a smaller number of single pawns. This is illustrated in Diagram 66, in which Black wins because the three pawns on the King's side hold up the four White pawns and the Black King can assail the White pawns from the rear, m n mm. W/ W4- m W « ™ fi ^mm. Wi. f£g M WM ^^ w/Jm m. M S wm mm Diag. 66. the White King being fettered by the necessity of capturing the Q B P. The proper formation for the Black pawns would be at B 3, Kt 2, 3, after which White cannot force a pawn R — — through by playing P B 4 and P Kt 5, as Black can refrain from making any exchange. Black could not afford to leave the pawns where they are, because even if there were no White pawn at B 2, White would, by playing P Kt 5, threaten to win in the following way — : I P—Kt 6, B PxP R PXP —B 2 ; P—R 6, and P—B 6, etc. —R ; or i... In a game Ed. LaskerMoll (Berlin championship, 1904), from which the position is taken. Black played P R 3 in order to obtain the formation mentioned above, and White resigned after 2 P B 4 ? P B 3, P Kt 5, Q 5. There was, however, a pretty win after ; 2 P 6, with P 6, etc. — — — — K— Black's P— R 3, namely 2 P— B 6, P x P 3 P—B 4, K— Q 5 4 P—Kt 5, B PxP; 5 PxP, K— K 4; 6 PxP, K—B 6; lost, because his own pawn obstructs 7 K—B 2 and Black : ; ; is the square B 2, and the King must release the square Kt 2, after which the White pawn queens. THE END-GAME 85 is only an interesting This winning combination, however, kind are generally this of exception to the rule that positions pawn. In this passed won by the side which possesses the secure by position the case Black could have made particular R Kt 2 3 for his pawns obtaining the ideal position of B 3 in so far. advance could pawns eariier before the White by won have still could Black the position of Diagram 66 4. 4 6, P xP 3 2 After 3. Dlaving to overtake the passed pawn which time has King Black the results on the Bishop's file. endings wth an equal To conclude the study of pawTi P-R P-B number of pawns on either side, we M WM m. K-Q P-B ; will discuss ; Diagram 67, i 'M. 'm^-'tm^WM. ' HI Diag. 67. occurring from time to which illustrates a curious position the move ^"^ ^-V "'°™S time in practice. Whoever has 5. should play therefore, White, into distant opposition. protectmg K-Kt 5, would play 5 would lose, as Black the protection of pawn, White the attacking his pawn and mov^ In the same way which White has to give up next K-Kt 5 because Wute with the move cannot play After I 5 Black caimot 5wins the pawn with R3; 2 Q 5. K-Kt 3 avoid the loss of the game, e.g. wins similarly move Q 6, and so on. Black with the K-K K_Q SLk K-Q K— K-K K— , K— 3 with K R 5- V- We have stUl to consider end-games m whicha win can • a majority of pawns, or where of an extra pawn. only be achieved by the sacrifice results in spite of -U « ^r.o,.r draw a — CHESS STRATEGY 86 Diagram 68 shows the latter case. Here White can only 2 K win in the following manner i P Kt 4 ch, P xP ch other would allow wins. Any way and K xP, Kt 3, K any 3 — : ; ; m. ^^ ^^ fm m «WM«WMW mWBmWMm m H mm mA ^m:^ 'W'^ 'W^ i 'M% f isj W^) 'i?-i ill ^mi l^j 'm. m » m WM WMm Diag. 68. Black to assume the opposition and to force the draw, I K—B K—B 3 2 K— Q K— Q etc. Not I K—B K— Kt 5 2 K—Kt K—B 2, 3, ! 2, ? e.g 4, 2, 4, 3 K— B 3, etc., as in Diagram 57. ^1 B « ^ r« ^ ^1 « a " S Diag. 69. A counterpart to this position is found in Diagram 69, which shows one of the few cases in which the possession of an extra pawn does not force a win. It seems at first sight as if White could win by simply assuming the opposition with ^7 THE END-GAME .K-K 2 2 K-Q 5, K-Q 2 3 P-B 5, I K-K 4 continued Black would reply i...^— K—K 2- 4 K—B 6, etc. ButK-B 3 followed by KxP B 5 ch! 'and after 2 PxP ch. : . . ; ; ensure the draw. We come now to those end-games in which pieces as well as pawns are left on the board. n , r , ,1 examples, I shall confine As it is my aim to give typical only one piece besides the myself to positions where there is several pieces can be reduced King. Most end-games with to that. ^,. , pieces the King s manceuvres In nearly all end-games with is endings are of no avail, as far as opposition , used in pawn opposition means that the concerned, as the advantage of and as long as there opponent is forced to move his King, "forced move" positions are are pieces on the board, such is of However, the strength of the pawn position infrequent. command the pawn endings, just as the same importance as in A is essential for the King. possible as squares of as many pieces. of mobility factor is again the third and very important position from a is found in Diagram 70. a A good example game Post-Leonhardt (Berlin Jubilee Tournament, 1907). Diag. 70. because the White pawns, Black's pawn position is weaker, be attacked by the Bishop, being on Black squares, cannot pawns on White squares. whilst Black has two isolated less mobihty than the has Furthermore the Black Bishop CHESS STRATEGY 88 White one, and finally the Black King is tied to his Q 3, to K These drawbacks 5. prevent White's entry at B 5 or Kt 3 3 2 R 4, B 2, I. .B— R 2 decide the issue. p R ^. (After B R 2 White would command the square at R 5) 4 R2 5 B i. and Kt 6 through Q 3. Black resigns, for White threatens to establish his Bishop at B 3, where the pawns at Q 5 and R 5 are both attacked, whilst the Black Bishop is at once forced to occupy the only . — ; — P— ; B— P— B— B— B— ; B— ; square from which both pawns are covered, namely B 2. As this square must be abandoned in the next move. Black loses a pawn and the game. 5...B— Kt I 6 B—K 2, B— B 2; 7 B—B 3, and wins, or 5...B— Kt 3 6 B— Kt 2, B— B 2 7 B— B 3, and wins. ; ; ; A corresponding instance of Knight v. Bishop is the endgame Blackbume-Schlechter (p. 102). It is difficult to gauge the relative value of Bishop and Knight in the end-game. The Knight has the advantage of access to all squares against that the Bishop is able to fight at long range, and offers opportunities of gaining moves in certain positions where there is a " forced move " (com; pare p. 90). As already stated, two Bishops are superior to two Knights because the limitation of the colour of squares ceases. A Rook generally wins against a Bishop or a Knight, sometimes even against a majority of one or two pawns, provided, of course, that there are still pawns on the Rook's side, and that their exchange cannot be forced. The following position (Diagram 71), from a game Moll-Post, shows how to proceed in such cases. Here White can force a win in the following way Kt 6; 2 I RxP, R 6, PxPj 3 RxP, B 2; : P— 4 R—B 2, B— Kt 5 ; R— R— B 5 4, B— R 5 K— ; P—B 4 6 ! The Black pawn position must first be torn up, if it is to be attacked successfully. Now Black's defeat is inevitable, whether the pawn is taken or not. The sequel would be 6...PxP 7 RxP, after which the Rook goes to K R 5 and the Rook's pawn must ; or: 6...K— Kt3; 7PxP,PxP- 8 R— B 6 ch, K— Kt 2 R—B 5, and the Bishop's pawn is lost, unless Black gives up his passed pawn. In this case Black loses also 9 R— B 5, B— Qi; ioKxP,K—Kt3; 11 K—Q 3, B—B 3 12R—B6, fall, ; 9 : ; 89 THE END-GAME It only remains necessary to give an example. Diag. 71. ..n.e. of Oueen v. Queen, Rook v. Rook, and minor number of pawns, one of which is passed. piece v. minor As a rule the extra Diag. 72. exceptions frequently pawn leads to a win. There are, however, specially. refer reaming in practice to which I must pawn and a Saâm 72 shows an end-game with a Rook's Bishop " of the wrong colour." CHESS STRATEGY 90 White draws with i Kt— Q 2, P— B 7 2 Kt— K 4 ch, K Kt 7 3 Kt X P, and draws, as Black, in order to capture the White pawn, after K x Kt must give the White King access to the Rook's square, from which he could not be dislodged except by a Bishop on White squares. In Diagram 73 White cannot win although his Bishop is of the " right colour " by i P—B 7, Kt x P 2 B x Kt, and White cannot win the Rook's pawn. He can only attack the pawn from Kt 7 or Kt 8, both of which are inaccessible as the Black King gets to Kt i. It is a stalemate position. If the White ; — ; ; ^P W^0 ^^ W^ f ¥Mm ^ % » ^ tim'^" ^ ™ H S^ H^ i Diag. Ti. pawn were still at R 5, White's King could attack the pawn from R 6 and secure the win. In the position given. White could only win by keeping pawn, and indeed it is possible to win by gaining a move with the Bishop. In the diagram it is Wliite's move. Black with the move could not play B 2 because Q6 his passed K— K— would follow. The Knight would have to move, allowing the pawn to queen. Therefore Wliite must try to bring about the same position with Black to move. He can do this, for instance, in the following way : B— Kt 3, K—B 2 (now 2 K— Q 6 would be bad on account of Kt— Q 5, 3 P— B Kt— Kt 5 ch, and Kt xP) 2 B— R K— K 2 3 B—K 5. Now Wliite's plan has succeeded the2, I 7, ; ; ; THE END-GAME 9^ As menis Black's move same position has occurred, and it s moves Knight but not move, tioned before, the King must S-Kt-Kt 5 If are of no avail. the alternatively or is lost, pawn ; 4 B-Q 6 ch decides, and on 3. -Kt-Q • :; B-B 6 ch, the Knight On 3...Kt— ^^. queens. i ; B X Kt would follow. 4 B-B 6 ch, K-Ki . ^ ., ^ •. • • out that it is imas a square which is Knight, possible to gain a move with a moves cannot be of number odd On this occasion I should like to point accessible to him in an number. reached by him in an even A simple instance is Diagram 74. Diag. 74- White loses, having the move, 2 K-R 2. Kt-Q 2 ; i K— R 3 K-R 8, Kt-B i ; 8. Kt— K 4 P-R 7. Kt4 cannot bring about Black with the move cannot win, as he move. to White the same position with which we have already In end-games of Bishop v. Bishop, of most pawn wins extra an Diagram 70. had an example in It is generaUy colour. same the of are cases if the Bishops one of the force an exchange of Bishops and obtain m possible to well-known pawn endings. different On the other hand an ending with Bishops of a against frequently even colour leads mostly to a draw, draw. is a Diagram 75 majority of two pawns. The position in 92 CHESS STRATEGY because it is impossible for the Wliite King to get round his Kt pawn to drive off the Bishop. H m M A ti Wm:^ M m mWfM '9 Sf & W9 s wm. ^Mi. •m. 'W^ WWA Diag. 75. With two passed pawns distant from each other, a wm can generally be forced, as in the folllowing position (Diagram 76). ^ „._. iP ^W^"^ ,^my M^^^ "'WM ''m. 'wm'' ""î^ H ^'"^^s^ M, MB ^''"'i ^'^ fc Diag. 76 The King moves up to the pawn, the progress of which is barred by the Bishop (not the King). He thereby forces the sacrifice of the Bishop. If the Black King comes to the rescue of the Bishop, the other pawn proves Black's downfaU. THE END-GAME 93 B-K 2 3 B-K 2 K-K K-K 2 2 K-Q K-Q K-B 6 K-K 6 and 2 P-Kt 5 4 P-Kt 6^-Q I K-Ki 6|-B2 B R7; tins; or5...B-B2; 6P-B6 B—Kt I 9 B— Kt 6 ch, K—B i 10 li y 8 K—K I 5. ; 4, 4, ; 7, ; ; 7. , 6, ! observe this rule if ""^men the pawns are united, one should n.ove to squares of : possible, they are attacked, they should, Bishop. the colour of the opposing Wt.te set »"'>" diagram 77 position Therefore in the the-re^^ i After 5 5. 5, but should not play the assume to White for no possible chance '"^T-ttl^t it is neces advance the pawns Black squares, and in order to if wM mm li ^m P-^ P-K P-B m& wiiA Wi ill m&. f^*'mf^''-m^"""''^M. P^ -m^, M WM m MiBlB wm>y. *^ in %&m ^^ Diag. 77. White and Black squares. In sary to force access to both would proceed on these lines the present instance play 4, B2 3 3, c 4 2 , p 6 i 6 ch, 6 5 B-Kt 5 5 K2 through get only White can 1 , 4, B-Kt 5R as 7 is ^''theKing-s Pal, "/ ^l^r^'^! square 7 play 7. *« to order in But set out above. can Bishop the time, so that must first be covered a second Therefore^ 8^C-Q pawns. two the for 5^ not be given up 10 i 6, 9 *) 7 ; 6 (B-B 6 7. and wins. I ; II 7 ch, ,„ ^^t„ on each side, an extra , V B—R 7p-B B-R K • K— K—K ; P-B ; K-B K— K ; K— P-K . B_R K-B K-B » ™-f P-K P-B P-K K-Q ; Knight In end-games with one K-B K-K K , CHESS STRATEGY 94 pawn usually decides the game much in the same way as in end-games with Bishops of the same colour frequently even with equal pawns, the possession of a passed pawn is sufficient, as it keeps either the King or the Knight busy, so that there is only one piece available for the defence of the pawns. An instructive example is the end-game Ed. Lasker-Rotlevi on ; p. 100. End-games with Rook against Rook are the most frequent, as well as the most difficult. Here the possession of an extra pawn is seldom sufficient for a win, unless the stronger side has also an advantage in the greater mobility of the Rook. Diagram 78 is typical of such cases, frequent in practice, in ,_ ..,.,,. B, 'WM '^W/M 'Wii '''l « wA^^^^^%mMk Diag. 78. which the greater mobility is the deciding factor. Although White has one pawn more, he can only win by reducing the mobility of the Black Rook through the following manoeuvre I B 2, Q 2 2 R 2, R 2. Now the Black R— : R— ; R— R— Rook has only one move left, whilst the White Rook has the freedom of the Rook's file. For instance, the Rook can be R posted at 5 and prevent the Black King from attacking White's King's side pawns, whilst the White King makes for the R at R 7 and effects its capture. If, on the other hand, the Black King tries to obstruct the way to the Queen's side, White penetrates into the Black pawn position. Black cannot maintain the opposition because the White Rook has spare moves, the Black Rook none, e.g. 3 K—B 3, K— Kt 3J R-R K-B 3 7 R-R 5; K-Q 3 A '^ ; ; THE END-GAME 95 K-K K-K 3 K-B 3 8 K-Q 5 4, ; 6 R-R 4. P-Kt 3 4. ; 9 the pawns. K-K 5, : and wins , ,, the game by Having the move, Black wonld draw I , R-Q 7 ch ; 2 K-R 3. R-R 7- , By placing his Rook condemns the opposing Rook to behind the passed pawn he file. free to move on the Rooks inactivity, whilst his o^vn is the force end the comes up, he will If now the mite King meanwhile but for the pawn, sacrifice of the Black Rook pa\vns. and with passed White the captures the Black King winning chances. pawns on the King's side might get of R against Wên there is only one pawn left in endings can comKing R the weaker side maintains the draw, if the position a shows m'and the queening square. Diagram 79 be mostly can and which favourable to the stronger side, a forces Black too, But here, this end-game. m ^ obtained in I...R— B 2 2 draw with a pretty manoeuvre is stalemate. Black and PxR, 2 ch 3 ; : R_Q R— K h.t 2, ; w tM » ^ « m Diag. 79* Q The chances of a draw are even greater evade seldom can side stronger the on against Q, as the King show a For the sake of completeness I will in endings of perpetual check. few cases in which Q or R cannot win against an advanced ^^Ti' Diagram 80 White can still draw, for in five moves by the King at R 7. and the pawn reaches Kt 7. supported in that time Black cannot come up with his King, so that he CHESS STRATEGY must give up the Rook for the pawn. Two passed pawns win, 56 even when the King is away from them, if they have reached In Diagram 8i, for instance, White is lost, their sixth square. m 'mm. wm wm ^p » M wm i^ WM wM. Diag. 80. as Black gives up his Rook at Q 7 and plays P —Kt 6, after which one of the pawns queens. The Queen wins against an advanced pawn, even when the only the R or B pawn can latter is supported by the King ; wfm, ^Mk Diag, 81. draw sometimes, when the pawn is on the seventh supported by the King, and the opposing Q cannot move to the queening square. THE END-GAME 97 The following illustrates the three principal A. Position—White Black cases : K at Q Kt 8, P at Q R 7 K at Q R 8. Q at Q B 3 : : plays Q-Kt 3 ch. Black must stop the pawn and unless White lets the stalemate is sq and answers with only be won if the can end-game Kt's file free again. This two moves. Therein opposition the stronger King can assume was standing at King Black the example fore if in the above Kt 7 ch i 2 I...Q— K follows '^' as Black would win « = Q, K-Kt 3. and 4 4 Q-lK 2 ch 3 K-Kt 8. White cannot cover the mate. White K-R ; B. Position-White : Black : White draws : i. . .Q-Kt 3 ch C. Position -White : Black : K— ; : K-B ; P-R K at Q Kt 8, P at Q B 7 K at Q 5, Q at Q B 3 ; 2 K-R 8. Q X P stalemate. K at Q Kt 8, P at Q Kt 7 K at Q 5. Q at Q B 3 White loses. Kt 5 ch 3 K— B 7, K-R 7 Q-R 5 ch 2 K-Kt Q— Q--B 3 ch K-B Q_B 4 ch 4 K-Q Q-Q 3 ch 5 ch 8 K-Kt 8, K-B 4; 7 K-R 7. Q-R 5 6 K-Kt K—B 3 9 K-B Q—R 3. etc. I ; 6, ; ' 8, ; ; ». ; 8, 8, ; End-games from Master Play some instructive examples In the following pages I give by step we will find how Step play. taken from tournament simple endings treated the of knowledge verv important is the it is often necessary to that see shall We in the last chapter. find the correct hne, but that consider many moves ahead to with possible to foresee every consequence it is nearly always of reduction because of the unfailing certainty. Moreover, coninto variations take very many forces there is no call to m modem This explains why there is a tendency sideration. of pieces, as soon as master play to enforce the exchange CHESS STRATEGY 98 there of the the shghtest advantage sufficient to bring about one elementary end-game positions, in which the win can is be forced. I. From a game Teichmann-Blackhurne {Berlin, 1897). m m mi »^M^ ^^^f \,m m m m m m mMm m « M ^ m w.'" f i i fil Diag. 82. Black has an extra pawn on the Queen's side. But as it is doubled, the material superiority is of no account. A perceptible advantage, however, lies in the fact that White cannot " forced move " position, as Black has bring about a move P the — Q B 4 in reserve. White has also an infinitesimal weakness on the King's side, the Rook's pawn having advanced two squares and being therefore an easy mark. This disadvantage soon becom.es apparent. 1. P—B 3 K—B2 3. K— Kt 2 K—R 3 2. 4. K—B 4 P— R4 P— Kt 4 K— K 4 With this move advantage is taken of one of White's weaknesses. White must exchange pawns. If the King moves. Black captures, freeing B 5 for his King, from where he can later on get to K 6 or Kt 6. But after the exchange at Kt 4, Black has the chance of obtaining a " distant passed pawn " on the Rook's file. 5. PxP K— Kt 2 7. K— R 2 6. PxP K—B 4 K—B 3 THE END-GAME If Black were to play 8 99 P-R 5 at once. White would reply \vith Black would have to K-R 3. and after PxP, 9 KxP- square at B 5 for 4, to gain the give up the spare move Kt 2 1 after 10 drawn be The game then would his King. opposition, the maintains White B "^ II B 2, because 6 or Kt 6. Black thereand Black cannot get through at P-B K— K— K— K in such a way that the square fore manceuvres his King the White King is at Kt 3. when at his 4 is only reached first B 8. g. K— Kt 3 K— Kt 2 K—R 2 P—R 5 In the first case Now neither P X P nor P-B 4 is of any use. Black obtains the distant passed pawn. obtains the distant passed pawn after 10 R4 P xR P, but loses it again after K— 10. 11. K-R 3 KxP K—B 2 P—B 4, P xB P n ; ; 12 K—R 3. ^—^ 4- PxP K—B4 At last Black has captured the coveted the spare move in hand. 12. In the second White square, whilst keeping K— B 5 now, because in that The White King cannot move to Kt 2 to the White Q B P and queen case Black would move the King only and White, after seven moves, would in seven moves, have the K B pawn at B 7. JO K— K 2 K— Kt 6 P-B 4 B P now, but must capand wins, for White cannot hold the K 14. K-K 3 King it, after which the Black ture the Kt P in exchange for : e.g. ahead, reaches the Queen's side two moves K— K 2 K-K 3 17. K— K 4 18. K— B5 jc 16. 19. KxP K— Kt 7 K-B 8 K— B 7 KxP K— K6, etc. ! if White had played Black would have forced a win also Kt 2, 12 B 5 Kt 2 on his twelfth move thus K— 13 K— B : 2. K— K— CHESS STRATEGY 100 Now White has the opposition, and after Black wrings it from him by playing the spare move P— B 4, he assumes it K— K K— K— K— K K— K— K But he cannot Kt 6 16 3. 2, again with 15 R 6 because the square at Q 3 maintain it after Black's After 16 Q 2, for distant opposition is not accessible. Kt 7 18 Kt 6 2. R 7 3, 17 K— 19 ! ; ; K—K ; K— K— ; K— K 3, K— B 8 we get the same result as before. II. From a game Ed. Lasker-Rotlevi {Hamburg, 1910). "^ fm III i —^ ^ P m. "m il S ^"^m Mmw—^. — "^fc ^^ ^ 1 ^^^ ^^ fc ^^^ Mm_ '^'fWA ^2 iSi^ Diag. 83. White has the advantage, because Black must keep either King or his Knight permanently near the passed pawn, guarding against its advance, whilst both White's King and Knight can attack the Black pawns. As yet they stand so far in the rear that the White King cannot approach them Therefore White must first try to force their advance. his 1. 2. Kt—B5 Kt-Q 3 P—Kt3 P—R4 This is now necessary, because the square B 3 is weak after P Kt 3 and the White Knight threatens to win the Rook's For this reason pawn eventually with a check at B 6. instead of the be played could not for instance, Kt Q 2, follow. Black would move in the text, because 3 Kt 5 now cannot exchange, of course, otherwise the position would resolve itself to an easy end-game win similar to the one in — — —K loi THE END-GAME Kt-Kt i to There would be nothing left but this would get the Kmght oppose fte\hreat of Kt-B 6 ch, and White could queen the passed Diagram .;6. entirely out of play, so that pawn easily after 4 K - 3. —Kt 6. P-B 3 K-K 5 The King was threatening to enter via Q 5 and B 6. Kt—K 3 and obviate the threat: Kt— K 5-B 4. If Black wishes to all the wins and B to goes 5 King Q Dlavs P-Kt 4. the White sacrifice a pawn 4. K—B 5 Therefore Black endeavours to Id two others, after which a draw con in order to exchange the White Knight for the remaining be forced by exchanging the pawns easily. P^""' P-B4 5.Kt-K5 I Kt-B 4 7. KtxP P-Kt 4 P-B5 M S « » y/f ^ wÂ WmiA mm. ^^î w/M/A mz^ ^^-^« 'ffm -/,//"' 'yW/M s Diag. 84. 8. 9. Kt—B4 K— K 5 K—B I Kt-B 6 ch Not K-B 2, because of 10 K-Q 4, Kt-Q 6 10. ! ; 11 Kt-K 5 ch. Kt— R 7 following answer Here White had only considered the Kt-Q 6 ch II K-Q 4. Kt x Kt P ; : 12 Kt xP, Kt-Q 6 ; X3 p_B 5, Kt-Kt 5 ; 14 Kt-B 3, Kt-B 7 ch ; 15 KxP, CHESS STRATEGY Kt— K 6 ch i6 K— B 5, Kt x P 17 P— R 4, Kt—K 2 20 K— B 7, 18 Kt— Q 5, Kt— B I 19 K— B 6, K— K i 102 ; ; ; Kt —R 7 ; ; — 21 K Kt 7, and wins the Knight. Black however draws, through a pretty combination ; TO : I03 THE END-GAME however, is inferior for Black, because the Q P is weak and through. eventually to force his Queen s Pawn White threatens I .... 2. QxQ 3. A. Q-B4 BxQ B-Kt 3 Kt-Q 4 Rxg RxR RxR ^. R_Ki he must yield up the Black wants to avoid the exchange, would surely spell disaster, as King's file to White, and that have field of action, and would the Black Rook would have no Kt Kt— 5 en, of a pawn through to go to Q I to avoid the loss the of possession would take after which the White Rook the into Bishop of the seventh rank, fettering the action ^''^^"" If 6.KXR 7. P_Q Kt 3 Black is condemned to inactivity, to work to force his pawn B-Q6 K— Q 2 and White can quietly set through. K— Q 2 B— K 5 g. P_Kt 3 B-Kt 8 11. K—K 3 Kt—B 3 B— Kt 8 8. 12. In order to play . P-Q Kt 4 and P-B 5, then to force must first have the oppor- Black to exchange at B 5, White Black's Queen s Pawn. tunity of bearing a second time on Kt—B 3—Q 2—B 4. Therefore he prepares the manoeuvre 12 I, K— K2 pllo kt 4 B—B 4 4. p_g 5 B-Q 2 15. 16. "^-^^l B— Q 2 K-Q4 Kt— Q 2 17. Kt—B4 18. PxP PxPch P—B3 advantage in position not yet easy to materialise the b Q 6 ch would be very bad. as B 6 and The advance tempting by starts White would be made accessible for Black. It is P— K CHESS STRATEGY 104 the pawns forv\'ard and thiis systematically creates points of attack. 19. 20. B—B 4 K— Q 2 P— Q R 3 Kt— Kt 2 P— Q R 4 21. P— R 5 The Queen's side is paralysed. The text move is forced, as P R 6 would give White yet another passed pawn. Now White turns his attention to the King's side. — 22. 23. 24. 2526. K—B 2 Kt—B 4 Kt—Q 6 B— Q 2 B— R 5 B— B 7 ch K—K 4 P—Kt 4 K-Q 4 Black wishes to play P B-Kt 3 —R 4, in order to get a passed pawn too, the only chance of saving the game. 27. — K— Kt I P— R 3 — Now P R 4 would be countered by Kt B 5, forcing the exchange and leaving a backward pawn at Kt 2 and the Rook's pawn would be bound to fall. 28. 29. Kt—B5 PxB BxKt K— B2 i 1^1 M * m. im iP I mm m 11 ''mf/. fa m „„„„„ ^^^ WM»._^ mi. fm Diag. 86. now seem as if Black might have played P —K — Kt 4 a passed pawn, and forcing a draw. After 4 Black would play P R 3, and it is not evident P xP e.p. K Kt 4 is parried by The difference in the pawn positions, which decides It would here, securing 30 P R how White is to win. — But 29... P — i°5 THE END-GAME White passed in the fact that the the issue for White, is found the support of the pawn at Q 5 is unassailable because P-Kt 3, ^^'^^t be taken away by Black's HJ H^* caZt at any t.me through paêd pavvn at his B 3 can be isolated on the P_R I—R ; V^fiite would take up atheposition push on ;P=^^^ R?f Knight's fUe with the King, and the text On prey. easy an then are The isolated pawns pawn on to compel P-K 3 move -White also pushes the Rook's King. The passed Queen s Tnd reduce Black to moves by the pawn decides the game. 30. K-K4 32. K-Kt 4 P_R4 P—R 5 33. 34. Otherwise there follows : K-g2 K-Q 2 K-B I P—^ 3 P— R 6, K—R 5> etc. K—B 4 36. K-K4 1^— Q ^ c!<. K-B 2 ^y P__Q6ch K—Bi 39. P—B6ch PxPch 40. K— (compare Diagram 68) Resigns B IV. 5 From a game Bird-Janowski. m m "If m WA i I mm ' i. 11 Diag. 87. material, the win is not an In spite of the preponderance of White's alarming pawn array easy one for Black, because of CHESS STRATEGY lOb on the Queen's side The King must first make use of his great power as an end-game piece. I. K—B2 K— K3 .. P— Kt 5 3. P— Kt 6 4. PxP 5- B-K 5 2. PxP K-Q2 P— Kt 7. But as White must first move his Bishop to cover his pawn, the Rook's pawn is lost, and the manoeuvre threatens therefore unsound. P— R 3 was indicated threatens the P—Kt 4 and their capture by it ; break-up of the Black pawns by the King. 5 6. K—B3 B— Q 4 R_R 2 ch RxP R_Q 7 RxB 7.K—K3 8. 9. K—B 4 ! P-Kt4 Black reduces the position to an elementary ending, which is theoretically a win. Whilst the two White passed pawns are isolated and fall singly, Black obtains two passed pawns, which are united and unassailable. 10. PxR P—K6 PxP P— R4 KxK P 12. K— B4 13. P— Q 5 ch 14. K— K 5 11. K X Kt P K—B 2 Resigns. V. From a game Steiner-Forgacz {Szekesfehervdr, ^*l W¥Â PPI 4. ^^# x'^ ^™."_^C..™ '^"' m ^...™.^ "^.,^. Diag. 88. «„A H 1907). 1^7 THE END-GAME greater mobiUty of his Rook, White has an advantage in the instructive fashion. and makes the most oi it in an P-Kt 3 R-Kt 4 I. White provokes this move in order ^^^' to produce a wealoiess at K-K3 R-K B I K-K2 3. R-K B 4 2. the Rook to penetrate into Black naturally dare not allow the seventh. 4. p OR^ P-Q ^4 P-Q 4 been exif the Rooks had This move would win the game, which the distant Passed pawn changed, because in that case the issue file would decide Black ciuld obtain on the Q Kt the centre pawns become But supported by the mobile Rook, B 4 was necesInstLd of the text move. P-K frresistMe. Rook. sary in order to release the c p_B3 6. PxP PxP P-KB4 not help Rooks, the centre pawns would either on obtain a passed pawn White, because Black would If it were not for the ""''• 7. K-Q 3 9. P-Kt 4 IrJÎ If P xP. 10 R-B 6 ch, K-K 2 ; P-K R 4 PxP 12. R— R2 13. R—R 6 ch 14. P-Q 5 10. 11. 15. 16. R-K 6 ch R—B 6 ! P-K Kt 4 R-Bi P-B 5 n R-R 6 wins. P-K R 3 PxP St/ K—K 2 P-?,^ K-Q 2 Resigns. B P, and RxR 17 PxR, White captures the on the Queen still For after overtakes the passed pawn which Black obtains s CHESS STRATEGY wing the pawns at Q 5 and B 6 are unassailable (K — K 8, p— Q 6, K — B 7, P— Q 7, etc.). The consequences of 16 R— B 6 had to be calculated to a nicety. If, for instance, the Q Kt P io8 ; were already at his fourth. White would lose. In four moves Black would have one of his pawns at his R 6, the other at Kt 5. In the meantime White would have taken the B P and come back to the Q file. No\v Black would win with P Kt 6, because after P x P the R P queens unmolested. — VI. From a game Charousek-Heinrichsen {Cologne, 1898). «^^ m.^^m,^m Diag. 89. White's position is superior firstly, because the only open file on the board is his, and secondly, because the Black Queen's side pawns are advanced, and therefore weak for a King's ending. After exchanging the Queen and one Rook, the possession of the King's file ensures the advance of the King to K 4 and from there to Q 5. Then the weakness of Black's pawns decides the game. ; I. THE MIDDLE GAME R-K 5. with pawns. 109 . By capturing. Black would only dislocate his ^^^^ K-B 3 P-Kt 3 R-g3 ^—^ 3 K-rs 4" I R_K 5 K-K4 g. P_K B 4 .. 8. chance by getting a distant Black probably hopes for a counter But he underrates the passedâwn on the K Rook's file. and even without ^^^^^ weakness of the Queen's side P^^^^s wm, by settling the King s side change of Rooks, White would the game side, as then tearing up the Queen's first P-Kt 12 5 eh, 2; II PxP, PxP; Kt 4, 10 m Ld . R-K P-K PxP; isPxPch. PxP PxP 12. PxRch K— K2 13. p_Q Kt 4 Resigns 10. seven moves in which to exBlack must capture, as he needs queen his Rook s pawn, wh 1st change the Knight's pawn and amve the Q P after PxP, and yet in thft time White can win queenmg. from pawn the in time with his King to stop then follows 14 KxP. After i^ .PxP, however, there his King, and with 4> White covers his passed pawn all the Black pawns. having full freedom, captures P-Q CHAPTER VI THE MIDDLE GAME General Remarks end-game, we should be Having now a fair knowledge of the how the middle game should be in a position to appreciate maintain a favourable end-game which might be pawn formation, in view of the the other hand, as soon as we forced on us by exchanges. On to secure the ^1ctory have gained an advantage sufficient pieces, ourselves, by the exchange of the end-game, we must conducted. We must throughout m iro CHESS STRATEGY try to reduce the position to one of cases which we have discussed. the typical elementary Now it will invariably be found that beginners are unwilling to make these essential exchanges. This is explained by the attraction which combinations involving the action of many pieces have for them. They assume that exchanges, particularly of the Queens, make the games dull. Such ideas only prove that the beginner has not grasped the nature of chess, the essence of which is stem logic and uncompromising conclusions, and this demands the shortest and clearest way leading to a mate. To the strong player, able to play logically, logic will always be inseparable from beauty in chess. To play logically means to subordinate all combinations to a leading plan of campaign, but there is difficulty in finding the latter. An unsound scheme, even if worked out to its logical conclusion, can of course be of no value. All the same it is And in time one gains by experibetter than no plan at all. ence, and develops a sort of instinct for rejecting from the large number of possible operations all those which, properly countered, cannot bring any advantage. Beside practical play, which is essential in order to gain this instinct, a methodical theoretical instruction is of inestimable value, and accelerates the development of the student's mind. Now the instruction I wish to give in the theory of chess will not take the form of an analysis, brought up right into the middle game, of the various openings, tested and found correct in master play. Such collections erroneously bear the title of " Theory of the Openings," and are, besides, quite useless at this stage, since they only embody the results of analysis. It is first necessary to ascertain a few leading principles, which can be taught in a most simple manner, by the exercise of common sense, rather than by applying oneself to the study The student will no longer need to of long-winded analysis. discover time-worn maxims in the light of his own weary experience, and on the other hand, these principles will help him to understand analysis, and to keep clearly before his mind's eye the common and principal hnes of play, of which he might easily lose sight in the labyrinth of suggested variations. I propose to show the apphcation of such principles to master play, and this will give us a further opportunity of THE MIDDLE GAME III out in the first part for deeper study, both of the rules set of the end-game princonducting the opening correctly, and considered. ciples, which should be well have I made the pawn skeleton with its attendant in the study of the grouping of pieces the main consideration problems of the the of investigation now in the opening from the transformation which the ; middle game I wiU start further operastarting-point for the best the In my tions. different pieces. choice of effective manoeuvres of the pawn skeleton has to undergo in the course of opinion this is must scheme we Before we are able to evolve a practical important points: following the consideration have under In other How do we know if an attack is likely to succeed ? it On what point should I concentrate the attack ? words direct to possible use should be clear to all that it is of no away. Yet beginners move can that anything an attack on I have often witfrequently infringe this obvious rule, and nessed manoeuvres such as these (Diagram 90): • rm A W^ m PK^^b' wm. m. m. m Diag. 90. p_Q R 3 2 P—Q Kt 4, and then, after the B has retired P-R 5- Meanto his Kt 3 even, 3 R-Q Kt i, 4 P-Q R 4. 5 to make a loophole while Black will have played P— Q R 31 B at R 2, and what is the result ? The Black Bishop at B 4. but White has advanced his is as effectual at R 2 as for his more Uable to pawns, and weakened them, as they are now CHESS STRATEGY 112 Moreover, White has used up five moves to achieve Therefore Black has his aim, whilst Black only needed three. the development of for use can gained two moves, which he attack. his pieces. Diagram 91 illustrates another mistake frequently made in the choice of an objective, and one which can utterly spoil the whole game, even in its earliest stage. Black has to m im/i^Mi^m/i m,^ U. lit..i..liiî » H Diag. 91. move, and his game is somewhat hindered by the dominating The latter prevents the Bishop position of the White Queen. from occupying a desirable square at his Q B 4, and also — makes the liberating move P Q 4 impossible. Therefore it would seem desirable to drive the Queen away. But this should only be done if it is not attended by some further disadvantage. Now the average player is not particularly fastidious in The Queen irritates him, therefore the Queen must be repelled one way or the other. He would probably try P Q B 4. The result is that the Queen selects another good his methods. — K R square, for instance at 3 or Q 4, but Black has not improved matters, for he still can play neither B B 4 nor P Q 4. — — On the other hand, irredeemable harm has been done, inasmuch The attack as the Black Q P now remains " backward." must consequently rejected. B be Q Queen by P on the 4 — such as these, in which short-lived attacks are made by They must pieces, are always of doubtful value. upon pawns Sallies THE MIDDLE GAME 113 pawn skeleton unquestionably be avoided if they break up the the mobility of which is formed in the opening, and confine the pieces. , , 1 intended solely Also with regard to manoeuvres of pieces, is obviously essential that to drive away an opposing piece, it purpose should not be their effecting in the attacking pieces out of play. become they lest afield, far made to stray too good underlying features the with dealing I shall delay treated by pieces and pawns, until I have , . forms of attack," both of the choice of an objective. From what we have already expounded, it is clear that the Should it, of evasion. subject of an attack should be incapable being from piece of attack, be desired to prevent a in the course " pm." A moved that can onlv be effected by means of a the pawn however, can be held in place either by occupying controUing the latter square immediately in front of it, or by bring to bear upon it. with more forces than the opponent can ill il § W>:i Diag. 92. Diagram 91 The last two diagrams exemphfy this. If in suggested, as B 4 Black makes the mistake of playing P-Q objective for White s the backward Q P becomes a welcome by playing QB4 attack. White can keep that pawn back develop would he which threatens to advance, after P— as soon as it quietly, double his Rooks, and bring the Q and Q B to bear m position not unhke that in a concentrated attack on Q 6. A defends the Diagram 92 will result ultimately, in which Black CHESS STRATEGY 114 pawn as many times as it is attacked, but in which Wliite can bring up his K P to the attack, as the Q P cannot move away, whilst Black has no further defensive move at his disposal. Play against a backward pawn nearly always develops on these lines, and is even easier when there is no defending B of the same colour as the pawn. (See p. 40, and Game No. 26.) Such manoeuvres, in the course of which pieces are pinned and attacked, are illustrated in Diagram 90. The most obvious move, which initiates an attack and at the same time completes the development of the minor pieces, is B Kt 5. Attacks by means of such devices are so frequent and varied that it will be necessary to treat them at some length, which I now propose to do. I should also add that, with regard to Diagram 90, the student will derive lasting benefit from a — thorough study of the position, and will thus improve his power open After B K Kt 5, the files, diagonals, doubled pawns, etc. threat is to attack the Knight a second and third time with Kt Q 5, and Q B 3, after moving the K Kt away. As Black's K Kt is only supported twice, and there is no chance of bringing up more forces for its defence, Black must undertake something to provide against the threatened onslaught. The most natural plan is to develop the Q B at K 3, from where it can be exchanged for the Knight should Kt Q 5 be played. The doubled pawn, which White could force by exchanging the Bishops, is in no way detrimental to Black's game. On the contrary, the opening of the file for the Rook, with the attendant chance of playing P Q 4 supported by the doubled pawn, gives Black the advantage. The doubled pawn which Black obtains after 2 Kt Q 5, to judge of the desirability, or otherwise, of obtaining — — — — — — Kt— K 2 4 B x Kt, would also 3 P X B (or 3 B X B), be of no help to White. The apparent weakness created in B 3 and Black's game at 3 by the disappearance B X Kt ; of the Kt P does not assist White in this case, because the pieces which could take advantage of such a weakness, the ; K R K Q B and the Kt at Q 5, have been exchanged. There only remains the K Kt and the Q for an immediate attack, whilst the Black Rook will soon get into effective action on the open Q 2, R i 6 R 6, Kt— Kt 3 Knight's file, e.g. 5 Q— K— ; Q— ; THE MIDDLE GAME 7 Kt—R 4, Kt X Kt ling of the ; 8 Q x Kt, Rooks on the Kt Q—K file. ii5 2, followed by the doub- Considerations of a similar Kt 5, 2 B x Kt. 2 B— Kt— K nature would tend to show that i The White Q B, which is so is in favour of Black. B3 weaknesses at Black's of advantage effective in taking is not Knight Queen's The exchanged. has been ; PxB K and R 3 K B P, as it would be exchanged or Compared v^nth the position Kt—Q 5, considered above, which occurs after I...B— K 3. 2 available for attack on the else driven off in time by P— B 3. his Q B, Black has the further advantage of maintaining his fourth, to on P B K weak the push to possible which makes it a useful and either exchange it or push it still further to B 5, and secure position. his King s Matters would be different were Black to allow dangerous wing to be broken up without getting rid of White's Let us consider what happens, if Black pieces by exchanges. prevents White's takes no measures against Kt— Q 5, but only K Kt 5. White uhimate Q—B 3 by pinning the Knight with Queen into play gains a decisive advantage by bringing his , B— the threatened before Black is able to secure himself against Kt by combined attack of Q and B, or alternately Q and K—R R—Kt I—Kt I, I will give two examples of 3. how the of the whole game now centres on the attack and defence how and Kt P, the points weakened by the disappearance of White pushes home his advantage in the one instance with of the Kt. the help of the B, in the other by the co-operation L I B— K Kt 5, B— K Kt 5 2 Kt~Q 5, Kt— Q 5 Q_Q 2, BxKt?; 4 BxKt, PxB; 5 Q—R 6, and ; ; 2 there no reply to the threat of KtxP ch and QxP mate, except through the sacrifice of the Q. Forcing the exchange of Knights is of no avail, for after 5...Kt—K 7 is K—R BxP ch 7 KxB, Kt—B 5 ch 8 KtxKt, and wins White occupies the Kt P X Kt 9 K— R i 11 RxR Kt R— Kt K 9...K—R i 10 R— K easily Queen. the of loss or mate by followed Q xR 12 R— K Kt I B— PxKt; R4 4KtxKtch, 5 3 Q_Q2, P— B3; ch BxP K— ch R Kt— K R Q— 7 7 BxKt; 6 has Black Now Kt Kt— R K— ch Kt— B 8 K xB, 5 9 ch 6 ; I, ; ; ; file first I, :' i, ; ; ; 1 II. 6, ; ; succeeded B P. i, in interrupting the i, 3. White Queen's action on the But it has taken many moves, with the sole result that CHESS STRATEGY ii6 All the other pieces, Black's Queen's Knight is better placed. however, occupy the positions they took up in the opening. The Black Knight, moreover, is only supported by the R P until Black manages to block the White Bishop's diagonal by P Q 4. Meanwhile White has gained a big start, and is ready to occupy the open file with his Rooks. The sequel might be 10 5 !, Q P x P Q 4 !, B xP (if P xP 11 12 Kt I, etc.) 11 B 3, Kt 3 12 Q Q i, — P—K P— R—K P— B— R— K— R I 13 R— K Kt Q—K 2 14 R—Q R—K Kt i R—Kt 2 (Kt xB 16 Q xP ch 16 R— B 15 R—R ; : ! ; i, ; ; ; 3, 3. ; ! ; !) ; ; 3, followed by BxP(B6). Taking it all in all, we see from the foregoing that the pinning of the Black Knight can only be injurious to Black if he does not take timely measures to provide against White's Kt —Q 5, attack on which threatens to concentrate more forces for the K B 6 than Black is able to mobilise for its defence. Beginners, after having experienced frequent trouble through their inadequate defence of this kind of attack, try to avoid their recurrence by making such pinning moves impossible from the first side the pin is threatened. — and playing P R 3 on whichever Apart from the loss of time, on which I remarked at length when discussing the opening, such pawn moves have various other drawbacks. With every pawn move it should be considered whether the squares protected by the pawn before it has moved may not need the support of that pawn at a later stage. This is particularly the case with regard to squares in front of the castled King. If one of those pawns pushes on, the squares which have lost its protection frequently offer an opening for a direct attack by the enemy's pieces on the King. A second consideration is the fact that the advancing pawn itself becomes a target for an assault in which the opponent, moving up a pawn on the next file, brings his Rooks into play, or in which he sacrifices a piece for the advanced pawn and the one that protects it, thus robbing the King of the protection he sought to obtain in casthng. The following examples will contribute much to the understanding of this most important subject, the grasp of which will mean a great step forward for the student. The position in Diagram 93 is from a game v. Scheve- THE MIDDLE GAME Teichmann (Berlin, 1907). 117 White played i P-R B— 3 in order Kt 5. ihe Knight through to avoid the pinning of his required for the move is not unjustified, as the Knight is move, however, support of the square at Q 4- The pawn must thmk White and has the drawbacks enumerated above, the King's on fight pieces for the of keeping a sufficiency of weakness the utihsing from wing, in order to prevent Black forces. superior thus created for a combined assault by Diag. 93. In this case White does not take piecautionary and succumbs in a surprisingly short time measures, PxP With this move White opens the 2. .Q Kt x P diagonal for Black's K B for no apparent reason. i...Kt—B 3 ; 2 ? ; . Instead of providing for the defence of his King's 3 Kt X Kt ? side pieces. 3. .Q X Kt wing. White exchanges one of the King's . White has provoked this sacrifice by his 4 Kt— Q 2 B X P B P is pinned, and the Q enters by two moves. The ! K last given up by way of her Kt 6. the protection of which was 5 P X B, Q— Kt 6 ch pushing on the R P. The rest is easy Kt^Kt 8 Kt— B 3, i, Kt K— 5 7 6 K-R I. QxP ch resigns. 10 BxP; Ri, Q—Kt6ch; 9K— Marshall-Burn Diagram 94 shows a position from a game ; ; ; ; Strong in the knowledge that the Black 1907). can only^ with Queen's side pieces are not developed, and defence of the King's side difficulty be of assistance in the (Ostend, ; CHESS STRATEGY ii8 because of their limited mobility, White takes advantage of Kt pawn the weakness created by the advance. of the Black the King's assault on immediate an initiates third, and his to K stronghold. mm hma î^^ Hi * wmr^wm - ^^ Diag. 94. I P file. —K R If White push 2. . .Kt style. 4, R— K I 2 P — R 5. This forces open the Rook's ; the pawn were still at XP on to Kt 2, Black would simply let R 6 and then reply with P—K Kt 3. R X Kt, White concludes the game in brilhant 3 Black's wrong development has given a welcome oppor; K B has an open tunity for sacrificial combinations. Now the diagonal, the pawn position is broken, and White's Q and R have no difficultv in using the Rook's file for a deadly attack. Kt 3 (if 3...PxR; 4 BxP ch, KxB; 5 Kt— Kt 5 ch, Kt I, then 6 QxP, Kt—B 3; 7 QxP ch, R i; K— K— 6 Kt—B P—K 4 7 Kt—R 4 ch, K— B 3 8 Castles, 8 Kt— R 7 ch, K—k 2 loKtxBch, 9 Kt— B 5 ch, K— K 3 K—K 2 II Kt—B 5 ch, K—K 3 12 P— Q 5 ch, K xKt K— etc.) 3, ; ; ; Q X P ch, K— K 5 R—Q 4 mate. 13 ; ; ; ; ; 14 Castles, followed by P —B 3 or In cases where both sides have already castled on the same wing, and the opponent has weakened his position by pushing on one of the pawns of that wing, it is seldom advisable to one of the pawns in front of the King, as the latter 's position would be weakened. An start an attack with the advance of THE MIDDLE GAME ii9 prospect of justified if there is a attack of this kind is only opponent the before force concentring with aU speed a superior has time for a counter attack. illustrates one much The Black position in Diagram 95 the advance of the " natural " players. Here favoured by Diag. 95- as his K R P would not be a suitable plan of attack for White be brought Rook is no longer on the Rook's file, nor could it endeavour to take back in time. In this case White must and K R 3, advantage of the weaknesses at Black's K B 3 the modus be will produced by his move P-K Kt 3. This exchange the R 6, forcing 2 followed by operandi : B— Q-Q B. After that the Q in conjunction of Black's valuable to force an entry at with one of the Knights will attempt following, the moves 6, as for instance in the B 6 or and took note watched once of which are taken from a game I K K KR of as being most instructive. 2 I ^ .r Q-Q P-Q3; 2B-KR6, PxP; 3BxB, KxB; Kt-Q 4 6 B-B 4. Q R-Q ^ 4 p X P. Q-Q 2 5 Kt-K 4, B-B i 9 Q-K^ 5, 8 Kt-B 6, Q-K 3 7 BxKt^PxB 4Q-B ^^^^-^ i, 10 Q R-K 4 (to prevent Kt-Kt 4) P— QxKt, 4; KtxKt; 13 B P—K R 3; 12 Kt—Q 4. i6 P-K Kt 4, B P-K 4. P-B 5 15 P-Q 2, 5 Q-Q 14 Q-K 3; 17 P-B 5> Q-B 3: 18 R-K 4. B-Ivt 2; -o > : ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; CHESS STRATEGY 120 R— B 3 !, 19 followed by R Q— B 4 20 ; QxP ch, KxQ — R 7 or Kt — R 7 mate. 21 ; R— R 3 ch, A somewhat more difficult case is shown in Diagram 96. m^W^m #j Diag. 96. Here the advance of the White King's side pawns has undeniably produced weaknesses in the pawn skeleton, and these would be fatal had the Black pieces as much mobility as the White ones. But the congestion of Black's pieces on the Queen's side makes his defence unwieldy, and White has no difficulty in accumulating his forces on the King's side for the final assault. The prospects are that White will be able to bring home his attack, before Black has a chance of forcing exchanges and of bringing about the end-game, which through the weakness of the White pawns would probably turn to his advantage. The play (E. Cohn-Ed. Lasker match, Berlin, 1909) is instructive, and shows how the attack should be conducted — — positions, i Kt Kt 3, B Kt 2 Kt i, 3 Q 2 4 4. B 2. The concentration of the White pieces has become alarming, and threatens to be continued by Q Q 2, R Kt 2, 2 K—R K— in 2, such P—B 3 R— K ; Q R— K Kt I, and Kt— B 5. Kt— ; — Kt—R — So the Black King decides on flight, but he finds no peace on the Q side either, because there his advanced pawns soon allow White to make a breach in the Black position. 5 Kt—Kt 2, K— K 2 B— B I. It is Q— K K R—K 6 2, Kt— Kt 3 B i, 7 Black's intention to play B 4 as soon as ; ; P— THE MIDDLE GAME to make an oi nracticable, and pracucduit;, tion on the n attempt at a counter demonstrai x ?• (Black should K V, A iv Kmg s side, 8 F— K 15 4, K—^ have kept to his PvP O PxP- original 10 121 intention Q—B 2, ^ and P^^V^^ ^-^ 4K Kt—Q 2; II P—Q R 41 I^Kt '2P 12 PxP, PXP; 13 RXR. BXR^^s opened up Now White out to do, He has achieved what he set u^se side, and is ready to Queen's the avenues of attack on which on by playing P-Kt 4 the weakness of Black's Q B P White file for the Black must submit to opening the either case White brmgs In B. White Q the diagonal for the on the Black King s position vastly superior forces to bear game Black escaped only and Black should lose. In this his opponent through a mistake on the part of weaknesses it was seen how fatal positions foregoing In the of the advance premature the can be which are produced by can pieces opposing the pawns 'in front of the King, on whom the on are concerned When the pawns force their attack. premature a of disadvantages opposite wing to their King, the The weakness concerns different way. ^Rf advance are felt in a the forces behind them and is the pawns themselves and not particularly of Rook end-game, apt to cause the loss of the in Diagrams 97 positions end-games. Let us compare the k ki r« *-....„.- i A '" Diag. 97- Black pawns is broken and 98. In the one case the chain of The of the Q Kt P. other by the absence of K Kt P, in the absence of the K Kt pawn can lead to serious consequences in CHESS STRATEGY 122 the middle game, because of the weakness of Black's and K R 3 (compare Diagram 90) ; it K B 3 can, however, hardly become awkward in the end-game, as the pawns on the B and R files are within the protecting reach of their King. wMi 'fm^^WMi il ilAlfiiP p^ Wf-"^ ^p ^ ^^ Diag. 98. On the other hand, the absence of the Q Kt P is of no consequence for the middle game. There is nothing behind it which could invite an attack. The Q R P and Q B P, however, are very weak for the end-game, as they are quite out of reach of I do not wish to imply the King (compare Game No. 19). that Black should have avoided the exchange at his Q B 3 at all cost ; such an exchange has always the compensating advantage of opening a file for the Rooks, which advantage often means a favourable middle game, as will be readily understood. Further, it is often possible to get rid of the weak Q R P by pushing it on, and eventually compelling the exchange of the opposing Kt P, an exchange which can usually be enforced if the Rooks have occupied the open Kt file. The pawn itself is often useful at B 3, in that it can support the advance of P Q 4 in the centre, should it be desired, or it can, by pushing on, be brought to exercise further pressure on the opposing Kt P. The break-up of the pawn position on the Q side can become awkward in the end-game and sometimes in the middlegame when the pawns can be attacked, and pieces brought to — THE MIDDLE GAME 123 the Knig's side side without leaving bear on the Queen's "^'m betlustrated by the position in Diagram 99- HlBlMMi ' • i" wMwsm^m W Bl M e" 7////X: i \ Diag. 99- (Paris, 1914) From a game Fr. Lazard-Ed. Lasker sides are broken, and the Here the pawn positions on both advanfirst, gets a decisive hat o^ccupie^s the open files move. We can conclude at In this case it is Black's mnst the opening âdly. He once that mite has played stiU to =^Pt"^« have lost two moves, for he has *%^^^^47. be his move. This disadvan then being White, it should with which White has emerged tage' small as it may seem, greatest to bring him into the from tTe opening, is sufficient defend the Pawn by d'Zities!%lack, of course, does not practically reduce the B to a 2, as this would S_Kt 2 or i, would both attack moreover^ White, by R-Kt i or Q Instead of that Black ut.hses file. The B and obtain an open ^n ;th«rhas, as it were as a gift •" the two moves, which he Kt file^ the Rooks on equalised position, to bring both rank eighth or seventh poUcy allows Black to occupy the rear or flank the White pawns from at wiU, and to attack the radius the hampers This menace acco d ng to circumstances. as they must always be ready pieces, White of action of the and this gives Black ttdefence of the threatened pawns, playe Ssf S B-Q 4e ms for by iar the superior game. CHESS STRATEGY 124 The play was continued as follows R— Kt 7 B— K 4, B— K 3 i. . .R : — Kt i ; 2 P—Q R 3, K R— Kt i. B x P, The White could occupy the Queen's file, but the White B at K 3, which prevents the entry of the Rooks at Q 7, makes the operation aimless. Therefore White is condemned to inactivity. On the contrary, ; 3 4 ; Knight's file is now definitely in Black's hands. Black's fine of action is clear. His entry on the seventh can only achieve something if White's Q B P can be deprived of — — its support. To do this Black has only to play P Q B 4 B 5 and P K B 4. This, of course, weakens Black's K B, and the White Rooks might obtain an entry on the K file. There- — fore Black will effect a timely exchange of one of his Rooks, K file. These con- after which his King alone will hold the — make the following moves clear 5 K R K i, 6 P K R 3, a further awkward necessity in positions of this kind. Before the Rook can venture out, a siderations P —Q B 4 : — ; loophole must be provided for the King. 6...P—B 5 7 R— K R—Kt 8 ch 8 RxR, RxR ch K— P— B— 10 R B B K—B 2 11 B— K 2 (threat9 4 ening R— Q B R— Kt 2 12 R— Q B K—B 3 (now B xP 3, ; 2, ; 3, ; 3), ; ; 3, ; — — not feasible on account of R Q B 2) 13 P B 4. White wishes to keep the Black King from his Q 5 but cannot do so is ; Black, however, can occupy the Q file with his Rook, and confine the White King to his wing. 13. .R Q 2 permanently. . — ; K— Kt R—Q 5 15 K— B K— K 2 16 R— K 3, K— Q 3 17 K— Kt R—Q 7 18 P—B B— B R—R 7 14 3, 3. ; 3, ; ; 2. 3, ; would be a mistake on account of RxB ch, but the Q R P — cannot escape. 19 P Q R 4, P 21 Q I, K 2, Q 4 22 B— B— R X R P. 24 R—B ; 2, —Kt 3 — — B 3, R R 7 ; Q 2, R6 23 Now at last Black has obtained material R— R—R 8 20 B ; ; R— R— ; which was made possible by his command of the open To convert it into a win by queening the extra pawn is only a matter of time. We have now seen how the possession of open files reacts on the mobility of the opposing forces, forever increasing their difficulties until the positional advantage is converted into material gain. We shall meet with cases later on in which the greater mobility of minor pieces achieves the same result and find more and more proofs of the truth of the main general principles which I introduced at the outset. gain, Kt file. THE MIDDLE GAME Let us now recapitulate the the course of our deUberations I25 touched upon in chief points : I. + ^ +^ jx. only be directed to Generally speaking, attacks should , objects which cannot be moved attack is aimed at driymg ott If in particular cases the favourable post opposing piece from an especially away. 2 an involves the weakenmg that attack is unwise, if it have to take up mthe pawn position, or if pieces effect their purpose ferior positions in order to either by leavmg Pawn moves always create weaknesses, behind, or by giving opother unsupported pawns formerly guarded by posing pieces access to squares specially so in front of the _ ^ them, and this more castled King. moves are only justiAttacks which depend on pawn be accumulated m can fied if overwhelming forces might become the pawns support, as the advanced object of a counter attack. some drawbacks, As pawn moves have very generally hunting ground. own pieces' the middle game is the of sound consideration first the . 4 < . As in the opening, make only such moves play in the middle game is to the pieces. of mobility as do not reduce the I shall now give examples As illustrative of such manoeuvres of these games annotations my from actual master play. In constantly before the student s mmd I have tried to keep which combmations different the the main ideas underlying avo d I thus strategical pnnciples spring from general into bnng mass of detail, and burdening his memory with a thereby of each hne of play, promi^^^^^^ the basic principle game, even for conducting a middle developing his capacity after an unusual opening. I have fixed mainly upon such of the openings treated cases the first moves gan.es as are illustrative In most in the first part of this book. need any special will, therefore, not being typical examples, will only remarks. The end-games, been rechapters in which they have need reference to the spectively dealt with. PART II ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES FROM MASTER TOURNAMENTS Game No. i V,Tiite : Tartakower. Black : Burn. King's Gambit declined (compare p. 30). I. ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES promote development either, and 7: 127 only compromises the Q B P Kt-B 3 B^Kt 5 King's pa^vn, which is deprived This is aimed at the White Black by the Q Kt. In this position of its^natural support his defend to than rather P Rite's does well to attack Being him. benefit only can wtusP an oDen King's file K reôrtirhêrocVythefilewithhisRookbefore White has time to bring his King 8. KtxP It would have been ^^^-^3. into safety. better to protect the pawn by ^ Q-K 2 (,^3^1^3 1 '"im i p.. "wi ^^5 •^ ...... Diag. 100. The beginning of a brilhant attack. changes the Bishop or the Knight, Whether White ex- he is overwhelmed. KtxKt Q-K i ™^;/°^-^1 After 9 BxKt, PxB; 10 KtxP. 9. would also lose because Black gains two pawns after Kt x P , note how speedily the II 0—0, KtxP. White's Q B 3 is brought to book. It is interesting to weakness at 10. BxP PxKt KtxP 11 II. 129 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Game No. 2 Leonhardt. Black : Marshall. Falkbeer Counter Gambit (compare p. 35)- P-K4 P-KB4 3. PxQP S'S^ P-§4 P-55 Kt-KB3 White : I. 2. 4;K^^3 the extra pawn ''^/f^/^P'"'^ followed by gl, ^^ his Rook and there B-B 7 ch or Kt-B 7. 6 B-QB4 .... 7. B-Q 2 continue with B-K 3 m of course Uke to would o White wouiQ the diagonal. He ssession of Black's chance of castling through °'^Td however bse h lines the where cases detrimental in all such K. time. any at open or likely to be forced PnThe LtT'arropen Ss r Castles B—K 2 15=B3 II. B-K 3 Kt— o 3 ? completed ^s White has not yet care should be to Js.t ^KKt5 Wnjent jf^^^^ bnng "'^t ^'^^^f Kt^''^^''I^Kt_R 3t;?:r°r^:vt?nte\%:i'not^^^^^^^^^ first file but gains a move 13- m so doing. Q-Q 4 ^Q 3 CHESS STRATEGY 130 Black's course is obvious he must win the P. The forces will then be equal in material, but there will remain a Q WM W^. ^P Mfl fM4 ^^ WIM P S ^ ^^ A. i Diag. loi. K B P, and this flaw in White's position, namely the exposed tells in the ending. 14. P—K R 3 Now the square at K Kt 3 is unprotected, and this is serious in view of a probable Knight's ending, where, moreover, K Kt 3 in orderBoth the K Kt P and K B P would be weak, with the King on the other wing, and be under constant threat of being captured. The game does proceed as indicated, and the simple and logical manner in which it will sooner or later be necessary to play to support the K B P. P Marshall brings home his advantage in a very short time shows convincingly how fatal a shattered pawn position can be for the end-game. Instead of the move in the text White should have played BxB followed by Kt— B which would 3, have completed his development without making another pawn move. 14. 1516. KtxB K R— K I RxR KtxKt IQ. P— K Kt 3 1718. making a loophole for the King. correct, as the threat of mate ties BxB QR-Qi RxR QKtxP KtxKt P— KR3 In this case the move is the Black Rook to his rank. ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 131 players are fond ol wrong to make a loophole, as weak that case," before it is shown doine as early as possible "in ending. will be a Rook a need for it, or that there It is therf wm be 20. P— R 3 Q xP on account of Kt-Kt 5. B 3- 21 QxP threatens KtxB P followed by Q-Q White is afraid of playing 20 which of Q-B 4 threatening would not be a sufficient defence because a 4 would conjure up mate, and on the other hand 21 the When Kt 4dang;rous attack, beginning with P-Q there is always the danger of wings, different on castle players and opening up files for Ins the opponent sacrificing pawns The game then assumes Rooks and Q against the castled King. settled one way generally are a wild character, and as matters considerations end-game or another in the middle-game, can be pawns, of position both with regard to number and who player the that shown disregarded. Experience has Q-R to win, and that it is of ittle develops his attack first is likely of this kind without atassault use to submit tamely to an tempting a counter attack. the beginner to underSuch games are very difficult for stand There is about them something violent and difficult m order to and years of practice are necessary weighing up the possibilities gain the judgment required for where the Kings have castled of attack and counter attack, on opposite wings. to estimate, 23. RxR P—R3 Kt-B 3 RxQ PxR 24. Kt-Q 4 Kt—K 2 K—B I 20 21 r:1q I 22. _. QxQ 25. Kt-K 5 irresistibly, and attacks The Black King now pushes forward King's wing^ The White King the weakened pawns on the the Black Kt would wm cannot get any nearer, as a check by a pawn at once. The end is easy. 26. 27. 28. 2Q. 30. P-B 3 K— B2 P-Kt 3 Kt—Q 4 ch P-KR4 K-K 2 ^—\^ Kt-B 7 K—B 3 P-KR4 CHESS STRATEGY 13^ Now the P at Kt 3 is " backward " and therefore lost. 31. White P-B 4 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES KtxKt 6. P— Q3 7. 8. P— Q5 PxKt Q—B 2 133 ! White offers his Q B P in order to be able to strengthen his centre by P Q 4, and to free his pieces. To protect his Q B P Kt 2 ?, would be inferior, e.g. 8 Kt— K 2, Kt— B 3 or 8 — PxP; gBxP.B—Kt5l; 10 BxB, QxRs QxBch; 12Q-Q2, Q-Q5. PxP? 8 It ch ; B— 11 Q—B 2, would have been better, of course, to continue developing B 3, which at the same time maintains the pressure with Kt — on Q 5. 9. 10. Intending Kt B-K 3 P-Q 4 Kt—R3 —B 4 with a view to exchanging the Bishop. After that; Black's position on White squares is weak specially Kt i, which was opened by Black's on the diagonal Q 7, K R fifth move, and on which the White Bishop can soon operate. The game is instructive in showing the development of that idea. B—K2 Q—Q 2 QxKt P-K Kt 3 13- B-Q 3 of Q— K 2 and B—B 4. threat White's prevent Black cannot Q—Q 4 14. Q-K 2 10 Kt— B 4 12. KtxB 11. M mm ^ 11 M H s ^^ Msfei,'^ gj mm, _ g^ * * Diag. 102. 15. Castles QxQ P ch CHESS STRATEGY 134 Black is obliging. The opening of files in the centre is favourable for "VVTiite, as he can make use of his Rooks in the combined attack. Instead of the move in the text, development with Kt— B 3 and Castles Q R was the last, though slender, chance of saving the game. B-K3 Q-Q4 If Q xP, Q— B 2 followed by B— Q 4, B— K 4, K R— K i and i6. Q R—Q I. Black has no sufficient means of defence to oppose this massing of forces. Q R-Q I 1718. Q-R 4 BxBP The end is swift, and easy to understand. R—Bi PxB 18 Q—Kt4 Q—R 5 ch 21. P—K 6 19. 20. R— B2 Resigns. Game No. 4 White : Tarrasch. Black Giuoco Piano P— K 4 Kt—K B 3 3. B—B 4 4. P-B 3 : Capablanca. P—K 4 Kt—Q B 3 B—B 4 1. 2. The beginning of interesting operations in the centre. steady development with 4 P Q 3, P Q 3 ; 5 Kt : Kt—B 3 B—K — B—K The —B — 3, Kt 5, 6 3 or Castles tends to a draw from the very first, and is thought dull. ; Kt-B3 Black can avoid the exchange of pawns, which White tries P— K to bring about after 2. Q 4, by playing his Queen to This covers his P a second time, and White's 4 can be K P—Q I35 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES obstructs the answered with B— Kt 3. White's Q B P then In a game von Schewe-Teichmann Kt's natural development on p. 117 was reached discussed position (Berlin, 1907) the Castles, :. Q 4, moves Q 3 6 5 after the following . P— P— P-R 5. B-R 2. ; B^Kt 3 7 P-Q R 4> P-Q R 3 J 56. ; 8 PxP P-Q 4 PxP B—Kt 5 ch Diag. 103. 7. B-Q2 is The pawn sacrifice by 7 Kt— B 3, Kt xK P 8 Castles of spirit the with keeping much more interesting and more in development and prethe opening.^ White obtains a quick P—Q 4- After playing by game vents Black from freeing his and after attack), (Moller P— 5 follows 8...BxKt; ! ; Q 9 1 various lines of attack The following two short games will give an idea of the which are to be found in this opening s -a -^ ^z^ England - America, 1907): »...BXKt; a Howell - Michell (cable match, Kt, Rx 11 l, Kt-K 2 3 B-B 3 ; 10 g 5 (Moller attack), would be this: B X B 13 Kt X B, B-B 4 (the only chance of a draw _ <i R-K P_Q 12 B-Kt 5, ; Castles; 14 Ktx R P. Kx Kt ,7 B-K 2. Kt-Kt 3 ! ; ; 18 15 Q R 5 ch, K-Kt Q-R 7 ch, K-B 2 B-R5ch,KtxB; 21 Q-Kt 6 with perpetual check) P-Q ; i ; ; R-R 4, J-K B4!; R-R 6, Kt-B 5 20 16 ; 19 ; 14 ; Q— B 3,Q— Q 2 (Bx R ; B 16 QxB, isQxPch followed by Q-K 6 ch andQxB); 15 B-Kt 5 Q xmoves. mate in a few P_K B 3 17 Q R— K I, PxKt; 18 RxKt ch and Castles; 12 P— Q 6, PxP; 11 RxKt, h X v.Y, first 10 moves as before: BxB; 15 Kt x B, Kt-R 3 (QxKt; 13 B-K Kt 5, Kt-B 4; 14 Q-Q 5!. 16 Q R— K i, resigns. 16 Qx P ch) !, ; ; ; CHESS STRATEGY 136 — — 9...B B 3, White wins back his piece by R K i (lo PxKt would not be good, as Black could free his game by Kt P x P and P— Q 4). On the other hand, after 8. .Kt x Kt P x Kt, White in addition gains a move,, as B x P is countered by ; . Q-Kt 3. As played here. Black succeeds in playing P— game is even. Q 4, and the Indeed the isolated Q P is a weakness in the White position. BxBch 7 QKtxB 9- PxP P—Q4 KKtxP 8. ! Q—Kt 3 KR K R—K I 10. Q Kt— K 2 11. Castles 12. Castles P—Q B 3 Now the Knight is securely posted in the centre, and Black can accumulate forces for the attack on the White Q P, possibly by Q— Kt 3, R— Q I, and Kt— B 4. P—Q R 4 13. in order to drive the Queen from her Kt 3, but this is " three-edged," as Master Gregory would say, is sure to prove advance and the pawn weak in the end-game. Q—Kt3 B—K 3 g—B 2 13 M- Q—R 3 p—R 5 Kt—K4 15. 16. Kt—K Kt 5 would seem to be stronger here. B—B 4 would then be answered by 17 B— Q 3. After B x B, 18 Q x B, White obtains opportunities for a King's side attack, in which the Rook could co-operate via 4 and Kt 4 or 4. K R OR— Qi 16 17. 18. Kt-B 5 P—K Kt 3 B-B I ? K K R 3, and there This produces weak points at B 3 and being as yet no definite threat in Black's Kt— B been avoided. It of attack, for there is is 5, should have of course difficult to formulate a plan no weak place in Black's armour. In 137 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES have played Q R-Q i and Q 2 in anv case White could safely on the King's file or Queen's file acorder to double the Rooks But now as soon as a Rook move^ cord ng to circumstances. end to support i-and that will have to be done in the to might become awkward. the weak Q P-Black's B-Kt 5 18. 19. 20. Q R-Q Kt—B4 Kt—Q 3 Kt—Kt 4 I l BxKt avoiding an isolated pawn in a subtle manner. W///9//A tW///A j*^ W/. Diag. 104. Q-Kt 4 22. Kt-Q3 23- Q Kt-K 5 24. KtxB 25- Kt—R4 21. RxB B—Kt5 P—R4 PxKt Kt—K 5 would be answered by K R—Q i 26 Kt xP, Kt xP If White stops threatening both Kt-B 6 ch and Kt-B 7. wms. ch both threats with Q—B 3, Kt— K 7 ; 25 26. KR-Qi R— K 7 Q-Q3 Now Black foregoes his well-earned advantage. Wliite's subtle move 28. P—R 6. 26 He overlooks Q—B i was mdicated. and there was time White's Queen's Pawn could not escape, seventh by to dislodge the White Rook from the R—Q 2, e g. 138 CHESS ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES I39 Kt—B 3 P_B 3 5. P-Q 3 4. of P—B 3, P_Q 4 would seem to be the logical consequence Black will move After the text preferable. and therefore pawn the advance of his own sooner or later be able to enforce the greater mobility. have then will to 4. and his pieces Q P--Q3 5 P— Q 4 at once. For if Here Black might have played in possession of the Black leaves White takes the pawn, he but plays so do not does g Kt 5 he pa^vn in the centre. If of exchange the and 2 be would Black's reply B— Q-K instead, pawns at K 5 would follow. a lost move. 6. B—K 3 White's P-B 3 is then clearly B—Kt 3 7. Q Kt— Q 2 i gt-B I Kt—K 2 Q Castles Q_K 2 lo! P-B 3 Kt-Kt 3 P-Q 4 PxP B—Kt 3 Kt—Kt 3 11. 12. PxP account of his Black has now the superior position on pawn centre. 1^5. Castles KR B-Kt 5 15. BxKt 14. B—B 2 P-K R 3 PxB Black's K B and 3 There is nothing in the weakness at of his K Kt Pawn, as White disappearance the by caused KR3 be a B. On the contrary the open file should has lost his are pieces Black's strong centre. distinct asset, for, having a attack. an get more mobile and he is more hkely to K Q—K 3 17. P—K R 3 16. in order to play Kt—R 5, which otherwise would be answered by B—Kt 5. 17 18'. 19. K—R 2 . K—R I Kt—R 5 B xP was threatened. K R—Kt I P—B 4 B—K 3 CHESS STRATEGY P—B 5 20. R—K Kt I 140 B ™ m m M B B W Wi W Wi ^ fWA i i m^. * .„„..., P m. h \> Diag. 105. —K 5 would seem to be P for the better, as it opens a diagonal K B, and a diagonal, too, for the Q B, as White has to exchange the pawns. Indeed Black would soon have obtained a winning advantage, e.g. 20. .P K 5 21 P X P , (Kt—R 2, Q—R 5 Q-R 5 ; — j Q—K Kt—K 4), B P x P 22 Kt—R 2, P—B 4), Kt—K 4, 23 Q-K 2 (P—K Kt 4 or B-Q threatening Kt little time, ; 22 2, —Kt 5 and Kt —Q ; i, 6. As it is, White gains a although Black's position still remains superior. 21. 22. to prevent P Q—K 2 P—Kt 4 Q-K 2 P—B3 —Kt 5 23. R Kt 2 24 25 Kt-Q2 QR-Ki R—Ki intending to play P —B Q-B2 3, thus retarding Black's P- -K 5, The which is still hanging over White like Damocles' sword. move, however, lets in the Knight. 25 26. 27. R—R2 P—B 3 Kt—R5 P—B4 P-K5 Now this move is no longer feasible, as White's brilliant ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES sacrifice demonstrates. To make the 141 move possible such as preparations would have been necessary, B—Q 2—B : long R—Kt 3, 3, etc. 29. QPxP KtxKP 30. 31. QxPch R (R 2)—K 2 28. QPxP PxKt R—Kts White The scene has changed with startling suddenness. Black's whilst forces, has open files and diagonals for all his Whatever he plays, Black must lose pieces are immobihsed. the piece he has gained. B-Q3 31 BxB Q—03 Q-B5 RxR 33. He cannot play B—Q 4 on account of Q—Q 402. 34. 35. 36. Kt—B 6 ch QR—Kych RxBch 37. Q_Q 6 ch K—Kt 2 BxR KxKt Resigns. Game No. 6 White : Black Mason. : Gunsberg. Giuoco Piano. _. 2. o. P— K 4 Kt-K B 3 B—B 4 % P_Q 3 I B-K 3 P—K 4 Kt-Q B 3 B—B 4 6. B-Kt 3 Kt-B 3 Q—K 2 I. 7. 8. A lost move. P-B 3 Q Kt-Q 2 P-Q R 4 The logical continuation is Kt—B i—Kt 3 and Castles. 8 9. P-Q 3 B—QKt 5 B-K 3 BxB this are doubtful. Generally speaking, exchanges such as the B file for opens it although However, in the present case, CHESS STRATEGY 142 White, White cannot prevent Black from obtaining the same advantage. 10. P—QR3 PxB Black gives up the move he has gained. There is no justifor this, as nothing prevents him from proceeding with his development at once with 10. .Castles. fication . 11. 12. PxB BxKtch P—Q Kt 4 White is anxious lest his Kt P should be made "backward " by P Q R 4 and P B 4. This is one of the drawbacks of the premature advance of the Q R P. — 12. — ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES intention is to play I43 P—Q 4. which, however, Black opposes at once. Kt-K 3 22. Diag. io6. now White plays P— Q 4, he loses a piece by PxP; 24KtxP?,RxR; 25 K x R, Q—B 3 ch. If 23. R—K I R— Q i, in order to play The Rook has no future here, and P_Q 4, is more logical. But as Black obviously threatens advisable to double his Rooks on the K B fUe, it would be to play for an exchange of Rooks, with and Kt— K i. : Kt—Kt 2, Q R—B i 24. q'r— K 2 R—B 2 Q R—K B I 25. 26. Q—Kt 4 23 27. 28. . Kt-K I Kt-Q 5 Kt (K3)—Kt 2 BxKt R— Q 2 KxB Kt xB is frustrated by Kt—B 6 ch. 28 Q-K6 All the Black forces are now in action, defence, as his pieces can hardly move. 29. K—B I and White has no Kt—Kt 6 Resigns. ch If R—K 2 or B 2, there follows RxR Kt—Q7ch5 32QxKt, QxQ. ; 31 RxR, CHESS STRATEGY 144 Game No. 7 White Black Marshall. Tarrasch. Max Lange Attack. P—K4 PxP P—K4 P-Q4 Kt— K B 3 B-QB4 Castles Kt-Q B 3 B—B4 Kt—B3 Black can avoid the complications of the Max Lange attack by 5...P Q 3. In that case White cannot recover the pawn, and in order to develop his Q Kt effectively, would have to — play P—B aiming at rapid development in return, after But Black can frustrate this plan either by pushing his pawn to Q 6, so that the Q Kt is barred from the square B 3, or by playing B K Kt 5 with this probable continuation 7 Q Kt 3, B x Kt 8 B x P ch, K B i; 9 P X B, Kt B 3, and Black has the better game, for White's King's side is broken up and his pieces undeveloped, while Black has prospects of attack on the open B file. 6. . .P XP ; 3, 7 Kt X P. : — — — ; K 6. — ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES This is the typical position in the Max Lange With his ninth move White threatened to win a Kt xB and Q—R 5 ch. 145 attack. piece by Black could not parry the threat by ch. g,,.Q_Q 3, on account of P xP followed by Kt— K 4—B 6 for Black, favourable be to appears diagram the in position The development as all his minor pieces are in play, whilst White's pawns at is somewhat restricted by Black's strong Q B 5 For a long time this opening has not been played and Q for White. in tournaments, being considered unsatisfactory With the present game, and his new move of 15 B R 6, Mar5. — shall has reopened the question as to whether White's attack on the K file plus the pawn at K Kt 7 is sufficiently tempting. 10. 11. Q—B 4 Kt—Q B 3 Q Kt— K 4 Castles QR This is imperative. If Black retires the Bishop from his unsafe position, White permanently prevents Black from open castling, which is bound to be fatal in view of the K Kt P— K 4, Be— 11...B—Kt 3 12 P xP, R—K Kt i 13 Q_Kt 3 14 Kt xB, P xKt 15 B— Kt 5. R xP 16 Q—B 3 e.g. ; ; ; ; ; with a violent attack. 12. KtxQB White tries to win the exchange in the following way 12P—KKt 4, Q-K 4!; 13 Kt—K B 3, Q—Q 4; 14PXP followed by Kt—B 6, Black can initiate a promising counter attack by 14...BXPI!; i5PxR=Q. RxQ; 16 Kt—B 6, QxKt 17 QxQ, BxQ. In this case White exposes his King's side by P— K Kt 4 in order to benefit from the unstable : If ; K B, but unless care is taken, he can position of the Black Kt file easily fall a victim to an attack on the open K 12 13. ]ôt PxKt P—K Kt 4 Q—Q 4, on account of P xP and Kt— B 6. 14. 15. KR—Kti PxP B—R 6 This is Marshall's innovation. - Q—K 4 play, as P— Kt 5 must It gets the Bishop out necessarily follow, yet the of pawn at K CHESS STRATEGY 146 Kt 7 holds the Black Rook, and there is a permanent threat B 6 either winning the exchange or, if the Knight is of Kt — taken, giving White a pair of formidable passed pawns. 15 i6. P—B 3 P-Q6 B— Q 3 This is quite to White's liking, since he wishes to advance pawns. Black's only chance of escaping disaster his centre would be: B—K 2, with R—Q 2, Kt—Q i—B 2. In- stead of this, his next few moves do not reveal any concerted plan, and he loses in a surprisingly short time. 17- ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 147 Game No. 8 White : Blackbume. Black : Em. Lasker. Scotch Game. P—K 4 P—K 4 Kt— Q B 3 Kt—K B 3 PxP 3- P-Q4 B— KtxP B4 4. Q-B 3 5. B-K 3 The threat KtxKt and BxB must be met in some way. 1. 2. p_Q 3 is not satisfactory, for Black remains with a trebled pawn after the double exchange. An alternative to the text move is B— Kt 3. Q—B 3, however, has the advantage of has no developing a piece, and although it is the Queen, White often as he such off, same early opportunity of driving the game. the in soon so obtains when the Queen comes out 6. p_Q B 3 K Kt— K 2 7. Kt—B 2 In order to develop the Q Kt. 7 P— QKt3! . Out of three possible moves, Lasker selects the one which nothing in contributes most to development. B— Kt 3 does Knight Black the that direction, and BxB would bring development the prepares further into play. The text move B at Kt 2 with the option of Castles Q R. If White of the his Q 4. exchanges Bishops he gives up the command of then the but result, same the glack's P Q 3 might have had on the pawns of majority White a exchange would have given held have would pawns side three Q whilst White's K side, the black Q side pawns, one of the latter 8. Kt— Q 2 being doubled. Q— Kt 3 — The exchange of Bishops allows White to play Kt K 3, B—K B 4 thus avoiding the weakening move P— K Kt 3. 9 is answered by P Q4 — !. 9. BxB 10. Ti. 12. Kt—K 3 P—Q Kt 3 B—B 4 PxB R— Q Kt I Castles CHESS STRATEGY 148 To prevent Black's P —B 4. At first sight it seems as if the Q B P ought to move to B 4, But White as the advance of the Q Kt P has weakened it. dares not allow a Black Knight to settle at Q 5. P-Q3 12 13. P-B4! m^ m,..^JMa Wl^ 9 t'f3 'S 9 Diag. 108. K— — Black threatens to play R i in order to play P B 4. White's position would then be very bad, and therefore he rightly decides to anticipate the move, even at the cost of a pawn. In order to gain the Q B P Black must waste a number of moves with the Q, and White gains time for a King's side attack. The pawn sacrifice is very promising indeed. Q-B3 13- QxQBP 14. Castles 15- R-B3 There seem to be many threats here, and the position is a one to fathom. After disentangling his Queen, Black tries very hard to force his P B 4. As soon as he succeeds in this he has a won game, for the open file is available both for difficult — defence and counter-attack. K—R I 17. R—Q B I Q-Q5 BxB 18. Q-Kt7 15 16. RxB B— K3 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Q_B 3 block the is K I49 impossible apart from the fact that it would 5. PxP; B P, e.g. 18...Q— B 3; 19 P—K 20 Kt— K 4, etc. 19. R— Q B 2 Q—B 3 Now the attack sho\vn in the last note could be answered with Q—R 5. 20. Kt—Kt 4 P—K Kt 4 could be answered by Kt—Q 5, e.g. 22 R— Kt 3, P—B 4. 21 P— Kt 5, Q— Kt 3 Q—Kt3 20 P— Kt B4 R— 21. 3 Q—K 3 22. Kt— K 5 Here ; 23. KtxKt 24. p_K 5 KtxKt Kt-Kt 5 ! This prevents the Rook from occupying the Q file which is about to be opened. 25. 26. R—B4 Q—R I PxP Q—Q 2 with unanswerable If now QxP, Black plays R—B 2 threats of R— K i or Q ! i. 27. 28. 29. 30. 31. 32. Kt—B3 Kt—K 5 RxKBP Kt—B 4 R—Bi RxQ 33. P— R 3 34. R-Q3 35.R-Q7 36. 37. PxP RxRP PxP Q—K 2 QR— Ki Q—K 8 ch QxQ KtxP P—B 5 Kt-Kt 5 E-^^' RxP Kt—Q6 threatens mate in six. 38. R—R I Kt—K 8 mate is again threatened. 39. 40. Kt—Q2 K— Kt I 41. K—R 2 RxPch R— Kt 6 ch R—Q 6 ! CHESS STRATEGY 150 RxKt 42. RxKt ch RxR 44. R— Q 7 45. RxP 46. RxP RxR R— K 6 RxP P—R3 43- R—B 6 47. A few more moves " for fun." 47 K~Kt 2 49. R— R 6 50. R— R4 48. R— Q B 4 52. K— Kt 3 53- R— B 3 54. K— R 3 55. R— B 4 56. K— R 2 57- R— R 4 58. K— R sq 59- R— Q B 4 60. K— Kt sq 61. R— B 5 ch 62. R—B sq 63. R—R sq 64. R— K sq 65. R—R sq 66. R— R 3 ch 67. R— R sq 51. Resigns. K— R2 P— R 4 P— Kt 3 K—R3 R—Kt 7 ch K— Kt 4 P—R 5 ch K—R 4 R_Kt 6 ch P—Kt 4 R—Kt 7 ch P_R 6 p_Kt 5 P—Kt 6 K— Kt 3 K—B 4 R—Q 7 K—B 5 K— K 6 R—Q 6 K—K7 Game No. 9 White : Salwe. Black : Marshall. Two Knights' Defence P— K 4 Kt— K B 3 3. B-B 4 1. 2. 4. Kt-Kt 5 p_K 4 Kt—Q B 3 Kt-B 3 ^^^ ^^ tempting, as the B P cannot be pro- J^^^^^*^^^ tected, but It IS against that elementary principle which says ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 151 opening until the that no attack should be undertaken in the that Black course of provided mobihsed, minor pieces are likelihood every is There moves. opening sound also has made lead to nothmg. that the attack in the present instance will reply, but now correct the find to years It has taken many disappeared practically has opening the that it is known, text. White the in move of the Instead practice. from master to a unavoidably almost leading can play either Q 3. might which Castles or piano, Giuoco the of variation drawing P— bring about the Max Lange attack after 4. . .B—B 4 ; 5 P— Q 4' PxP. P-Q4 4 Kt—Q R 4 PxP 5. ! The This is a typical position in the Two Knights' defence. as abandoned, former continuation 5...Kt xQ P has long been KxKt P, KtxB the attack that White can initiate by 6 3, is dangerous, 3 ch, forcing the Black King to 7 the text breaks in the result is uncertain. The move j K Q_B though the attack from the very first, and Black ii,'i Jm.k mm gets the advantage '^m mm W3. 'm. "W'iW S s B Diag. 109. two minor pieces which as he can gain time by attacking the and in addition obtain a it should be noted, are unsupported, speedy development, worth more than the for it. 6 P-Q3 pawn given up ; CHESS STRATEGY 152 B— Kt 5 ch is an alternative. The advantage is Black's also—5.^. P—B 3; yPxP, PxPj 8 B— K 2, P—K R 3 9 Kt—K B 3, P— K 5 10 Kt—K 5, Q—B 2 11 P— Q 4, B—Q 3 (or PxP e.p. foUowed by B—Q 3); 12 P— K B 4. PxP e.p. 13 Kt xP, Kt— Kt 5 or 11 P— B 4, B—Q 3; 12 P—Q 4, PxP e.p.\ 13 KtxP, Castles. Black in this case ; I \ has an easy game and open lines. 6 7. Kt— K B 3 8. Q— K2 9. PxKt K Kt—Q 2 10. P—KR3 P— K 5 KtxB B— QB4 The Knight must move sooner or later. 10 11. 12. Castles Kt—Kt 3 Q—B I B—K Kt 5 A sorry retreat, but the plausible Q — Q 2 would be disasP— K 6 13 P xP, Kt—K 5 and Q—R 5 ch trous, e.g. ! ; B—Kt5ch 12 Black's superior development begins to tell in no uncertain Now White can neither play 13 B —Q 2 on account of B X B ch 14 Q Kt X B, R— K i, followed by P— K 6, nor 13 Kt B 3 on account of B x Kt 14 P x B, P—B 3 regaining the pa\vn fashion. ; ; and maintaining positional advantage. White has therefore no alternative but B 3, which weakens his Q 3, where a Black Knight soon settles down. P— P—B 3 P—K R 3 15. P— Kt 4 13. 14. B— K 2 B—R 4 B— Kt 3 At last White can castle. He can, of course, only castle on the Queen's side, because his King's side pawns are shattered. Now games in which the Kings castle on different wings are more or less beyond calculation, as pointed out before. On the whole, the player who first attacks wins. But experience has shown that the Queen's side is more difficult to defend on account of its greater expanse, and this theory is supported by the present game. In addition, White's develop- ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES ment is not completed yet, whilst all ready to strike. i6. 153 the Black forces are Kt-Q2 Kt—K 4 B-K3 17. Q Kt— Q 2 P-Kt 4 18. Castles is pecuUar to this kind Storming the position with pawns opposmg paxvn The intention is to break up the of game. are cheap Pawns Rooks. position, and to open files for the m such cases. matter, and that Open lines for the pieces are the thmgs open more the left, are the fewer pawns there lines are available for the attack. IQ. Kt— Q6ch PxP QxP K— Kti 21. K—R I 20. White wishes to The King was not safe on the diagonal. 4-B 5, and so on) But push on his King's side pawns (P-B check by the there would be a fatal discovered after P xP e.p. Black Knight. QxP 22 marked. He has Black's advantage becomes more on both sides he attacks covered his pawn, and for the ensuing re- •is better placed, having already two 22. P-KB4 23. QR-Kti 24. Kt— Q 4 open files for his Rooks. £-954 P-^?4 Q—I^ 5 1 »aMmrm^mm ^g g| mi m. * 8 :W Ml A ill mi. m, WM m mwM, MM. m. Diag. no. , CHESS STRATEGY 154 The position liristles with chances for daring sacrifices. After 25 KtxB P, for instance, Black could play !; 26 P X R, Kt 5 ; 27 P X Kt, P X P ; 28 3 (Q—B 4 ch ? RxKt P—R Kt— B—B 2), B—B 3; 29 K— R 2, QxP ch mate. 25. P-Kt 3 ; 30 PxQ, RxP ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 155 Kt—B3 B—B4 Castles VM^/^Z/t, _jt«v W^^ WM.3::m^m M^ ^® „.„„«,mm. J //»' ^ T . I w. Diag. III. The idea underlying this pawn sacrifice is to open the K file Black that, with correct play. or the Rook. It will be seen wmnmg though White, and Manages to castle just in time, The opening position. back his pa^vn. has no advantage m is seldom played by modem masters. the White can hardly defend Instead of the move in the text. captures the pawn simply Black with Kt-B 3. as K P with a satisfactory position and recovers his piece by P-Q 4, reply Black if White plays 6 B xP ch m It is even better for more imcapture of White's K P is far to ^ KtxP. The B P, particularly as the portant than that of the Black dangerous on the diagonal White Bishop, which could be l^t><is.t, Kt 8. is exchanged, e.g. 6...KxB; 7 O 3. Black continues Kt I 4 8 Kt—Kt 5 ch, open lines for Rooks and Bishops. K R 2-K K— P_0 has K—R 2 R—B I and • P-K R ! KtxP 4- B-B Then he must 4Black can. of course, develop his attack (5 Q 4- \^^\^ either submit to the Max Lange case he loses the giving up the useful B, in which P— play B xP, pawn gained after 6 KtxB, 8PxP, PxP; 9 B— K 5. KtxKt ^-^ ^ 4. P-Q 3 Q—B 3. 7 Kt 5, and eventually P-Q 4 ; ^ CHESS STRATEGY 156 R— K I at once would lead to nothing. 5 6. R— K I 7. 8. BxP! Kt—B 3 PxP P— Q 4 QxB PA^#8J ^^^ ^ ^ WM^W^, ^^ W mwrnkWA wm, ^ wî § m^ms. teg ij^^ iijcj Diag. 112. This attack has been analysed extensively by Steinitz. Hie only square where the Queen cannot be attacked at once by the minor pieces is at Q i. After 8...Q— Q i, Black obtains quite a satisfactory P—B game: 9 RxKt ch, B—K 2- 10 KtxP, This is Pillsbury's move, intending to 4. displace the Rook. Black has then open Hnes for his two Bishops as compensation for his shattered pawn position .^^'^^^'' ^^ KtxKt, QxQ ch; 13 KtxQ, ? ^7^x? PxKt. Now not easy to find a reasonable plan 4' It IS for White, as Black threatens to cramp White's and P— game with B— Q 3 is therefore necessary for B 5. White to take measures against that by playing B 4 and B 4 If Black stiU plays 3. 4 foUows, with the intention of exchanging and of provoking Black's 4, which leaves It B-Q theQP "backward." ^- •• 9. KtxKt 10. 11. 13- 14. B— Kt 5 BxB QxP Q R~Q I B-B R— B— P-B Q— KR4 B—K2 B— K 3 KtxB Castles KR i57 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Now mite is aW ^^^l^^^^^Z''%','^t:\^l^^l nvi. ô. n^ Oueen better piacea. nlav ana and his m play ^^ vvmi-c r\^Ti play QxR. ^^ > r ly ^ y L as attacked by he ue -Knight away by the Black Kni^m, rv. fhP Oneen being driven \-n VcJ R— pawns. Blacli Queen's side Kt—B 3 Ti P-QKt 3 P-Q ^ 4 S: Qxl 19. 0-K 5 weataiess Tt is created createa watch how this very slight h.mmto advance ot his P-wns brings ^^^^ ^^ j^,^ q g_ ^hich s instructive to hy oy Ha I's n'tger guaêd by the Black Q B P. and paralyses the whde j-uc JS^mg s me. the possession of the bj e a gets ^-phf ann^t move'until the King move often affords an entry we have seen, such a pawn tinn is ^^^^ As to the opposing pieces. 20. W P-K B 4 B—^ ^ P-Q Kt 3 ^^^ Q"^^ ^' K 3 is to go to Kt 2 so hold up a B 3 may also STt the threat of mate after Q-Q Not BxP ?he because of which cannot remain at of course, White piece. 21 B—Kt2 Q-Q 3 P—B 3f p—B5 fa.Q-K^y 23. R—K 2 Compulsory, as otherwise P-B 6 forces the Kt P ^ Totl^hS rp'a^l^ÎySrg XerPxP there 24. 25. is —e^ to^RrOnL^^h: hand, Kt^R 5-B 6, and Black is m a mating net. Kt-K4 Kt-Q 6 Q-Q 4 B—B 3 CHESS STRATEGY 158 The threat was Q x R ch and 26. R— K 8 mate. P—K R 3 in order to retreat to R 2 in case of Q—Q 8 ch. In way P—K R 3 creates a certain weakness, as the square ata Kt now defenceless, but Black has no pieces with which 3 to take advantage of it his Rook cannot move, his Bishop is on the White squares. If Black had a K B instead, the move is : would be very doubtful, because then Black might through White's K Kt 3. break in P—B5 26 White's threat was to repel the Black Queen by P—B 4 and to mate in five moves, beginning with K 6 ch. 27. Q— P_K R 3 P—B 3 m »«....^^....S mi wm. mmt, l4%5^ vy/>97y^. ^^P v^yj^ ^^^^P Wi WW' ^^^^ ^ ^.^ Diag. 113. This disposes of the winning of the Queen by the threatened mate. But it creates a weakness at Black's Kt which 3, White exploits in grand style. He decides to play the King himself to Kt 6, threatening mate at Kt 7. In spite of several raids by the Black Queen, this quaint device is crowned with success. The weakness created by P K R — could not be demonstrated more drastically. K— R2 K— Kt 3 30. K— R4 28. 29. P-Q Kt 4 P-QR4 P-Kt 3 3 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES If White were to play PxP now. Black would mate him one move earlier (Q-Kt 4)first, and Black is helpless. Of course he parries the threat QxKtP Q-B 7 R-K3 31. R-Kt 3 32. I59 K—Kt 4 on P—Kt 4 eh White could not play 33 would play He 6. B-B account of the pretty mate by K-R 5-Kt 6. After PxP R-Kt 4 35. K—R 5 g-S^^l! Q-Bych 33. 34. Resigns. superior position A most instructive game, showing how the by reducmg the indirectly to a win of the pieces can lead impotence and compelling him opponent's pieces gradually to decisive affording opportunities for a to move pawns, thereby entry. Game No. ii White Schlechter. : Black : Janowski. Ruy Lopez (compare p. 40). 1. P—K 4^ P—K 4 Kt-K B 3 3. B-Kt 5 2. 4. Castles A continuation, which has lately Kt-Q B 3 Kt—B 3 KtxP gained in favour, is : P-Q 3 B—K 2 (see p. 39)- and 5. B-K2 P-Q 4 for an dangerous to gratify White's wish The move may be playable in the open me by playing PxP. "Riga variation" see Game system of defence called the advantageous to be able to close No i^) Here it would be -^^tter when intendmg to p ay It is clearly very fhe' K B's diagonal. " Riga variation " the third move. It to have played P—Q R 3 on tne i6o ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES i6i which the Bishop gets to Kt 2 with a threat of mate, and the Q R is free. i6. 17. B-B I Q-Q Kt 4 Kt— K 4 a Fine play. If Black captures the pawn, White obtains only can Black which to Kt, and combined attack with Q, R, oppose the Q, so that the result cannot be in doubt— ^.g. ch Q B 4. P 18 Kt—B 5. Q3 19 17...OXK Q— Q— R—K 8 ch, K—R 2 P—K R 3 P_Kt 3 (Q— Kt 3?; Kt— Q 3 and R— K 7. 20 RxR, ; 17 18. 19. 20. 21 23 Kt—B 5 R—K 3 Q-Q 4 21. P— Q B 4 preventing R RxR Q—K 4 ch, ; ; ; ; 22 QxQ, followed by KtxP); 23 Q-K2 R— Kt 3 P— Q R 4 R-Kt I — Kt 4 21 22. P— Q Kt 3 R— Q I R— Kt 3 25. RxR 23. 24. P—K3 Q— Kt 4 Q—B 4 PxR K— R 2 Black has built a wall of pawns round his King, but it does not avail against the superior forces which White can concentrate. He will advance his pawns, and White's plan is clear. the Black King, always taking surround break up those that his Queen's side meanwhile. free not care that Black does and Black is forced to easily, in break then His pieces will look on passively. 26. 27. P— K R 3 P-Q R 4 R—R I to prevent the sacrifice of a pawn by bring the Black Rook into play. 27 28. 29. R-Q 3 K—R 2 P—R 5. which would R— Kt I Q— Kt 4 Q— K 2 ! CHESS STRATEGY l62 30. 31. P— B4 P—K 6 Q-B2 ! ^ ... W3. 111 J WW/ * pi J '•yy/^z:. ^'-rv'- 121 m Diag. 115. A beautiful move which robs Black of his last chance of freeing his Queen's side, which he might have accompUshed by the pawn sacrifice of P —Q 3132. 3. ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 163 Game No. 12 White Black Rubinstein. Teichmann. Ruy Lopez (see p. 37). : : P—K 4 Kt-Q B 3 P— Q R 3 P_K 4 Kt-K B 3 B—Kt 5 B—R4 By exchanging the Bishop White could not prove P— Q R3 with the Q P, obtains to be a lost move, for Black, by retaking to an easy developaddition open lines for Q and Q B, and in agamst a certain set-off is a ment, retains two Bishops. This the fact found be may weakness in Black's game, which on three to pawns four has PxP, White m P— that after Q 4, on the Queen's side are the King's side, while his three pawns one of which is pawns, opposing able to hold the four in the end-game, tell only can doubled. But this weakness and to which purposes, practical for which is too far ahead of play will line usual the of example An it may not come at aU. be found in Game No. 18. Kt—B3 B— K2 P—O Kt 4 Castles R—Ki B—Kt3 P-Q3 P—B3 r- /c. t^^/'îi // > • 1 Diag. 116. Castles CHESS STRATEGY i64 In Capablanca's opinion Black should not castle before White's intentions in the centre have been made clear. It makes a great difference whether White plays his Q P to Q 4 or to Q 3 only. Kt— R P— B— B 2, B 4 White plays: 4 9 further to Q 5 as pawn move his is to intention 10 P Q 4, his soon as Black has castled, and then to attack on the King's If after 8...Q ; — P— K Kt 4 and Kt— B 5. wing with Q Kt— Q 2— B i— K 3, For this reason Black should force White to disclose whether he intends to exchange his Q P or to advance it to Q 5. In the latter case Black can refrain from castling altogether and counter-attack on the King's wing, e.g., 10 P Q 4, Q B 2 — — ; now 13 P— K R 3, B— Q 2 12 Q Kt— Q 2, R— QB i P— Q 5 then P— R 3 followed by P—Kt 4— Kt 5 gives Black 11 ; ; if : many chances. If on the contrary 13 P x P, then Black need no longer fear an attack on the King's side after he has castled, as his Rooks will have a favourable opportunity for operating However, there is still the dison the open Queen's file. advantage for Black of having advanced Queen's side pawns, which are liable to attack (P Q R 4). — The game takes a different course when Black exchanges the pawns in the centre. The continuation would then be : II , P X P ; Kt-B 3 14 P ; 12 Q Kt-Q 2, B— Q 2 X P, P X P ; 15 13 ; Kt-B i, B— Kt 5, Q-Kt 3. difficult to decide which side has the advantage. It is Black has an extra pawn, but White has the initiative. If in Diag. 116, after 8... Castles White plays 9 P Q 4 at once, Black has an opportunity for the following interesting attack Kt 5 10 11 9 3, Kt x K P Q 4, 2 12 B X K Kt, 2, 13 5. 4 5 ; K R 3, 16 Kt x Q, 14 15 5, B x Q 4 B X B 17 Kt X R, X Kt. White cannot take advantage of his Rooks, as there is no open file, whilst Black threatens to initiate a strong attack with P B 4. Aljechin has analysed a variation of this line of play, which he thinks leads finally to White's advantage 12 P X P, Kt— Kt 4 13 B X Kt, B X B ; 14 R 3, B x Kt ; 15 B 8 Q X B, Kt X P 16 R X Kt, P X R 17 B x R, 18 Kt R 3, Q Q 7. I doubt that White can win this game. — P— B— B-Q Q-Q P— B-R : ; ; B—K ; P-Q Kt—K ; ; B-B P-K ; R ; — : P— K ; — ; — 9- ; B— ; P-Q 3 In this less aggressive continuation, in which nothing is ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES immediately 165 attempted against Black's centre, White prepares gradually for with a King's side attack, as in this game for time obtain But Black should Kt 3. Kt— Q 2—B I— operations in the centre. Kt-QR4 P—B 4 9 B—B 2 11. Q Kt— Q 2 12. P— Q R 4 10. Kt—B 3 advance is always In many vanations of the Ruy Lopez, pawn, because the good if Black cannot avoid exchanging the difficulty, White Queen's Rook, which only gets into play with In any case file. can either be exchanged or hold the Rook's If, as end-game. the the Black Knight's pawn is weak for useless is play P-Kt 5. 4 in the present game. Black can this P-R and even doubtful, as the Rook's pawn weak in the end-game. itself may become B— Kt 2 12 Ruy Lope:^ the This causes the loss of the game. In the B i— R 6, Bishop is nearly always needed on the diagonal Q B 5, which at White's to prevent a Knight from settling Kt 3. a most otherwise cannot be repelled except by would continuation undesirable consummation. The proper the capturing 2 and 4, 3, have been P-Kt 5, game. next the Queen's file. Compare note to move 13 K P-K P-Q m Q— B 2 P—Kt 3 B-K Q-B 13. 14. Kt—B I Kt— Kt 3 mm ZwM ' 'WM WÂ mm, ,^mm:^^m. IS mi Pi S mm^^m f^ Diag. 117 W V^T^//a K CHESS STRATEGY i66 Here is the weakness. White first provides against Black's — P Q 4, and then starts a sharp attack on the King's side. 15. P — Q R-Q I B x Kt. B-Kt 5 Q 4 at once is not feasible, because of 16. 17. PxP Q-B I PxP This brings the Q away from her file, which Black could now —Q secure by P 4, followed by P x P. KR—Ki 17 The proper continuation is the one outlined in the note above. 18. P—R 3 White has now ample leisure to prepare the advance of his K B P. R—Ri RxR B—Q B I 18 RxR Kt—R 2 21. P— K B 4 22. P— B5 23. QxB 19. 20. Kt—K I BxB Q—K2 Black seeks salvation in exchanges, which White, of course, having good prospects of driving home his attack. His pieces are concentrated on the King's side, whilst the Black forces are scattered, and unable to get back in time for the defence. Moreover, it is likely that the weakness at Black's K R 3 and K B 3 will prove fatal as the Black K B is exchanged. tries to avoid, 24. 25. 26. Q—R 6 Q—B I R—B I Q—B I Q— Kt 2 P—Kt 4 White was threatening to play Kt Kt— R 6. 27. 28. Kt—Kt 4 KtxKt ch —Kt 4 with PxP and Kt—B 3 QxKt One of the attacking Knights is eliminated. another, which forces the entry at 29. P—R 4 But there is K B 6 and K Kt 6. ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 167 K R Q-Q If Blrxk 6. Queen at to gain access for the White 6, ^ ' 5. : 30 3\ captures there follows example of the wealiinstructive an 6 ch, B -B I ; 32 Kt-R Q-R Kt— Q— ness created by P —K Kt 3. P—R3 Q-Q I 29 30. Kt—R 5 31. P—B 6 All this is easy to understand. K—R2 B—Kt5 K— Kt3 3132- PxP 33- Kt— Kt 7 3435. 36. B-Qi Q-Q 2 Kt—B5 PxBch Resigns. BxKt K— PxP; R 2 37 ^—^5. The conclusion might be: 40 Q-R 4 B-Kt 6 ch, PxB I Kt 39 R_K QxP, 38 ; ; ; mate. Game No. 13 Wliite : Black Teichmann. (see Lopez p. 37). Ruy Move 1-8 as in Game No. 12. Diag. 118. : Schlechter. , CHESS STRATEGY 168 10. P— Q 3 B— B 2 11. Q Kt-Q 2 9- Kt—Q R 4 P—B 4 Q-B 2 K P, this is not a lost move, Supporting, as it does, the although White has not played P—Q 4. It prepares Black's P—Q 4 (after Kt—B 3), the K P being fully protected against White's double attack by P x P. 12. 13. Kt—B I Kt—K 3 Kt—B 3 B—Kt 2 —K The logical move would have been B P—Q 4. 3, to enforce Black is then very well developed, whilst White labours under a somewhat undeveloped Queen's side. An attempt to exert pressure in the centre with 4 in order Q to prevent Black's Q 4 would be belated. Black would gain the advantage by: 14...K PxP; 15 PxP, PxP* 16 P— P— Kt X P, Kt X Kt 17 Q X Kt, Kt— Kt 5 Nor would B— Kt Kt—K 3 be more successful after B— K 3 14 Kt—K 35 QR— Q i; i5P_Q4, BPxP; 16 PxP, PxP; i7KtxP,' ; ! before ; ; Q— Kt X Kt 18 Q X Kt, B 4, Black has the better chances in the end-game. The move in the text is not good because, ; as we saw before, the Bishop is wanted on the other to cover the square at 14. 15. K B 4. Kt—B 5 diagonal K R—K I Kt— Q 2 B— Kt 5 Even now it was desirable to aim at P— 4, therefore R— Q i Q Q was preferable. 16. B— Kt 3 Tlie position of the White pieces points to a dangerous menace to the opposing King's side. Kt—Bi 16. 17. B-Q 5 ! I The beginning of a brilliant combination. and Black must first cover his B at K 2. B x Kt is threatened ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 17 18. Kt— Kt 3 -' KKtxB BxB Q Kt xB is not feasible, because of B xB and KxB 19. BxPch!! 20. 169 Kt x Q P. Kt—Kt 5 ch Diag. 119. are hidden in Quite a number of charming combinations If P KtxKt then 21 i. Kt or If 3 this position. B 3 White can captuie the P first with check. K-Kt ! R K— 20 21. K—Kt 1 Q—R 5 22. QxRPch 23. QxKt ch 24. Q—Kt 6 ! KtxKt K—B I K— Kt I ! P— Kt 3. which would allow This prevents Now nothing at Kt 2. defence Black to bring up his Q for the 3— K B 3 or R 3. can be done against the threatening The point. R— 24 25. Q—Q2 R-K 3 Resigns. A wonderful game in which Teichmann, the great judge of master in hand-to-hand position, proves himself also a combinations. sacrificial of chaos ing, in the wild fight- CHESS STRATEGY 170 Game No. 14 White : Black Spielmann. : Tarrasch. Ruy Lopez (see p. 41). P— K4 Kt— K B B— Kt 5 B—R4 Castles P-Q4 P— K4 Kt-Q B 3 P-QR3 Kt—B3 KtxP 4 ill i i ill i * l"^." 11 i » g ^' Wk^m^m m..^^,:mm Diag. 120. PxP In a game between Riga and Berlin was tried for the first time, a bold venture which anticipates White's desire to open the King's file. After 7 R—K i Black can defend the Kt by P—Q 4, but after 8 KtxP White threatens again to win the Kt by P —K B 3, besides attacking the Q Kt a second time. However, Black has a surprising answer in readiness. He initiates a violent counter attack which keeps White busy until Black, by castling, escapes the dangers of the double pin. (Compare Game No. 17.) 6 B-Kt 3 8. P-Q R 4 7. P—QKt4 P-Q 4 This gives Black an opportunity of disposing of his Q Kt by exchanging it, thereby enabling him to round ofi his pawn position by P Q B 4, at the same time threatening to cut off — ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 171 P-B followed by 3 is the 8 5the Bishop by book this of part the first natural continuation, as shown in useful a on operate can because the Bishop, retreating to B 2, PxP P-B ^^^g°^^^- QKtxPl 8 an O R—Kt I would not be so good, because White obtains absolutely The move in the text is an open file for his Rook. Schlechter in his match agamst valid defence, as was proved by _ Lasker. ^^. PxKt KtxKt 10. Kt—B 3 P xP and P—B 3 seems a more natural continuation. KtxKt 10 9. Not P xKt, on account of B xP. P—QB4 B—K2 PxKt 11. RPxP 12. in order to castle in reply to B—R 4. Q-B 3 13. Here White should have got back his second pawn by P X Q P. ^^P, BxP, 4> Castles; 15 If then 13.. .P-B 5: 14 or i5. his for retreat a Q B 3, providing White plays impossible, becomes manoeuvre After the move in the text this B 3 can be attacked twice but has because the B after lost the support of the Queen. B-R R P— P— 13 B—K3 14. Castles RxP 15. PxP 16. B—R 2 P-B 5 Now the Bishop is hemmed in permanently ; in other words. B— R4 Black is a piece up and must win easily. rate three pawns for any at get to order in compulsory was Therefore 16 the piece, thus : 16...B-Q2; 17QXP. RxR; i8PxR. BxB; 19QXP. 16 17. 18. 19. PxR B—Kt I Q-Kt 3 RxR 0—R4 P—B 6 CHESS STRATEGY 172 White tries to work up an attack on the King's side while Black is still occupied on the other wing. 19 20. 21. 22. R—Bi B— KB4 P— B 4 R— K I K—R I In order to answer B-B3 BxQ P by 23 B— K 3 and P—R 7, 22. . .Q X P is not feasible because of P— R ^ 22 R— Ktî QxP Q-R8 P—R 3 24. B— K3 25- R-Q I 26. Q— K I 23. 1^^ Q x P. wm 'mm X. WM> m% _^HiflBIMWA Diag. 121. The sequel forms an instructive example of how superior development can afford winning chances even when there is no immediate prospect of material gain. The opposing pieces are gradually constricted until the defending lines are weakened by compulsory pawn moves. In the present position Black quietly sets to work to bring his Bishops to bear on the White King. 26 27. 28. K—R 2 Q—B I B— K5 B— K 2 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES to free his game somewhat with P-B 5. which Black prevents ^tonce. ^g I73 p__g^ ^^^ B—R 5 29. R_k I Black makes a few tek^^^^^^^ Being probably short of time, openmg of the K Kt file but the If his aim was not moves Queen, he might have played the subsequent sacrifice of the Q__Kt 7 at once, followed by Q— Kt 4. B—K 2 P—Kt 3 00. B-Q 3 B-B 2 R-B I î. ^2. 34. 35. 36. R_K I R-B I R-K I Q-K 2 37. R-Kt 1 ô K— R 2 R—Kt 3 B-R6 Q-Kt 7 R-Kt 5 R-Kt 3 upon a counter attack, be< Otherwise White might embark is impossible on account this ginning with P—Kt 4. Now of R-Kt 3. 38. 39- Q—Kt 4 R—K I Q-R 5 Black would win easily by After the exchange of Queens, X Q, 40 2 also fails on account of Q X Q ^Q 7 the and P B x 5. 6 42 3, 41 7 proWhite move text the passed pawn costs a Rook. With at Kt 8, apparently not seeing Queen the of sacrifice the vokes disposal on the forty-first move. the fine continuation at Black's R_Kt R_Kt B—R ; B-Kt 39 40. 41. Compulsory. ; B-Q ! ; R R-K QxBl RxR RxQ P—Kt 4 B—Kt i would be followed by R— Q B 8, etc. B-B 8!! 41 Resigns. Q-R P-Kt 3 43 4. B xP ch There might follow 42 K-Kt 3, 4I.-.B— Q 3 would have P—Kt 4 ch, and so on. 44 would still have game his though given White a little respite, ) KxB been hopeless after P xP and R— K 8. ; CHESS STRATEGY 174 Game No. 15 White : Black Aljechin. : Niemzowitsch. Ruy Lopez (see p. 41). P—K4 Kt— KB 3- B— Kt5 4- B— R4 5. Castles 6. P-Q4 7- B— Kt3 8. PxP 9- P— B3 P— K4 Kt-Q B 3 P-QR3 I. 2. 10. Kt—B3 KtxP P-Q Kt 4 P-Q4 B— K3 B— K2 R— K I a ^^^ s^ ^^ mm. 1 *»* ^;;, aw pa - i*r/^ Diag. 122. is one of the most important positions in the Ruy Black has the better development, but his centre is less secure. Whilst White has a pawn secured in the centre. Black has a Knight there which will soon be driven away! This Lopez. Q 4, the basis of his centre, is entirely in his hands, while Black's Q 4 is exposed to a steady pressure by the White pieces. Finally Black's Q Kt is unfavourably placed, obstructing as it does the Q B P and preventing it from falling WTiite's into line with its fellows. In Petrograd, 1909, Lasker tried the i75 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Kt—B 4 followed by B—Kt 5. giving following new defence : pressure on up the moves gained before in order to relieve the ultimately at Q 5. the Black Q P and to exchange the same have been disposition the The various possibilities of added that cussed in connection with Diag. 22. It may be move than better a surely is 2 Q after 10... Castles Q Kt— developed be should side Queen's the as the usual Q 4, Kt X B, ? 12 2 (11...Q— Q attack an before undertaking thought that followed by R X Kt). For a long time it was which enables after Kt— Q 4 Black had to exchange Knights, " " 3. White to make the pawn at Q B 7 backward by Kt his guard 3 to For Black must first play However, a 4B 3 and against the threat of move was Kt's the sensational innovation which refutes sacrifice following is the introduced in Breslau in 1912. It 12 P B 3, Q3 11 Kt— Q 4, Kt 10... Castles Q 2, Kt 5 5 with an over14 13 PxKt, powering attack. ; Kt— ; B—K P— P— K R P—K R : xK ; B— 10 ! ! ! ; '• I Kt—B4 11. B—B 2 B—Kt 5 12. Q Kt— Q 2 Castles 13. '• Q— R Q— ; B— P— Kt—Kt 3 Kt—K 5 Here Lasker played Kt— K 3 against Janowski (Paris, Q 3 dis1912), but it proved to be inferior, because 14 Q— organises Black's King's side forcibly. The move in the text is not really a pawn sacrifice. After 16 Q 4, Kt x Kt i4BxKt,PxB; isQxQ.QRxQ; —Q 17 KtxKt, R 4, K Kt— White cannot play 18 RxP, because of P_Q B 4 19 Kt—B 2, B—B 4 or 19 Kt—B 3, R—Q 8 ch 22 R—K 3, 21 R— K 2, B—Q 6 20 Kt— K I, B—B 4 ; ; ; B—Kt4. 14. P—B4 KtxP(B3) Kt—K 5 ? CHESS STRATEGY 176 This loses the Q B P, and weakens the Q P. Black might have would then have been P—B 3 after moving the Kt away. If Black was anxious to preserve his two Bishops he would even have risked P— Kt 3. After 17 R 6, B 2, the Bishop could have been driven away again by the K Kt from Kt I or Kt 5. The open file offered some compensation and chances of counter attack. BxKt B— 17 QxB, Q 3. possible to support the Q P by tried ; It B— 17. BxP R— Q-Q2 Not QxB because of Q x P ch. 18. Kt— K5 BxKt KtxKt B— R5 bad because of 20 R x Kt, B— K B 4 20. B— Kt3 BxB 21. RPxB B— B4 19. R X P is ; 21 Q— Kt 3. Now R X P was feasible with a level game after 22 R x Kt, B—B 4 23 K X R, B X R 24 Q any, Q—B 4 ch, followed by BxB. After missing this chance, Black soon loses the game. ! : ! ; 22. 23- 24. Q—Q 4 Q R— Q I Kt— Q2 K R— Q I Q— Q B 2 KtxKBP A last and desperate attempt. Black obtains Rook and pawn against two minor pieces, but has no time to initiate an attack with the Rooks. The wisest plan was to give up the P, with a view to effecting the exchange of the minor pieces, because an ending with Queen and Rooks generally produces a draw. Black could not play Kt xKt P instead of the move in the text because of 25 B Kt 3 !. — 25. KtxR QxKtP K—Ri QR-Bi Q-R5 R-B3 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES White now obtains a passed pawn, and a Q-B3 33- PxQ R_52 oA PxPv^ 36. 8^8, P-Kt3 R-Kt3 R—KtSch P-Q R 4 K—B 2 \n. R-Q B 8 K— Kt 2 RxB RxP K-R 3 R-B 5 î P_B 5 p_B 6 39 40. 41. 42. B—B4! RxR R—Q 7 ch K-Kt 3 Kt-B 2 43. 44. Mate was threatened by: 46 R-Q 5 ch, P-Kt 4 speedy win. Q— R 4 Q—B 2 3132. I77 47 ; K-Kt 4 K—R 4; 45 Kt— Kt 4 ch, R-Q 6 and R-R 6 mate (or RxKt ch, PxRmate). K-B R-Q 5 ch RxP 4546. 3 Resigns Game No. 16 White : Black Yates. : Gunsberg. Ruy Lopez. 1. P— K 4 P__K 4 Kt— K B 3 3. B-Kt 5 2. 4. B-R 4 5. g. 7. Castles p__o 4 B—Kt 3 PxP 9. P-Q B 3 10. B— K 3 8. in order to exchange the P-Q R 3 Kt-B 3 KtxP B-Q Kt 4 P—Q 4 B—K3 B-K 2 Black Knight if played to B 4. Castles jQ ii! Kt— Q B 3 Q Kt-Q 2 ^ if CHESS STRATEGY 178 If Q—Q 3. then Kt— R 4 ; 12 Q Kt—Q 2, P— Q B 4. KtxKt II This furthers White's development, and should not be played unless there is no other move available. To be con- P— B— K B 4 and Kt 5. An argument against that White can deprive Black's weak centre pawn of one protecting piece (12 e.p., Kt (B 13 sidered are P—B 4 is PxP Kt xP 3) ; Kt— and experience has shown that White obtains the superior game, 5), 12. QxKt 13. B—B 2 Kt— R4 Kt— B 5 A very dangerous manoeuvre, as White can evade the exchange of his Bishop and the Black Kt does not get back in time for the defence of the K side, where White's attack becomes virulent. He should have played Q B followed P— by Kt—B 3. 14. 4 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Q R— K I 19. 20. 179 P-QB4 P—K 6 A brilliant sacrifice to which no satisfactory reply can be For instance, 20...PxKt; found. 22 RxKt. PxR; 23 P—B 25BXP, etc.; or 24... K 6, Q—K I ; 24 or 23...P—Kt 4 KxP 25 Q—R 5 ch, K—Kt i ; PxB, PxP, ; 26 ; 24 PxP ch, P—B 6, BxP; 27 Bx 21...B—B4; 22 PxP ch, KxP; 23 BxP ch, P, etc. ; or PxB 24 P ; Q— Kt 4, Kt—K 6, R—KB i; 25 PxPch, RxP; 26 Q— 27 BxP, etc. ; 21 5, BxP; —B 5, etc. There are many variations, all leading to a speedy end. '^? mm^M mmkm is i A wf$ X 4. mi Diag. 123. 20 B—KB3 21. PxKt Q—Kt 4 22. P—B 5 23. P-Q6 BxKP BxP PxKPthen 24 PxKt P, Kt—K 4 25 RxKt, BxR; 26Q—R5, Q—B 3; 27 RxQ,BxR; 28 PxP ch, K— R 1 or 26...B xP 27 B— B 8, etc. 29 Q—B 7, etc. If ; ; ; 24. 25. PxB K—R I Q—Kt 3 ch Resigns. ! CHESS STRATEGY i8o Game No. 17 White: Black: Riga. Berlin. Ruy Lopez. Move 1-6 as in Game No. 16. = mm, •'^ _ ii i >y^^/A i il i Diag. 124. PxP Compare note to move No. 6 in Game 14. 7. R—K I 8. KtxP P-Q4 B-Q3 This is the key to the variation. Black threatens to obtain ch, followed by by perpetual check through This is not good enough against ch. Q 5 ch and a weaker opponent in a tournament, and a strong player cannot afford to play the Riga defence. But that is not a point against the variation. To prove it unsound, White has BxP a draw —R QxP to find a win. 9. 10. After 10 KtxKt K—R I BxPch K—B i Black has a tremendous attack, and drives it home before White can manage to bring his extra piece into play. A game Maroczy-Berger (Vienna, 1908) is an illustra10 K B i, Q R 5 It continued in this way tion of this. : — — ; ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES i8i Kt-K B 3. B-K 3, Castles I2 Kt-Q 4. B-Kt 5 I3 continuation. Q_R 4 Now White has no satisfactory difficult to bring II ; ; Queen, and it is 14 Kt— Q 2 obstructs the action. 14 Kt—B 3, Q Q » concerted the Rooks into KtxKt, PxKt; QxP; 17 PxB. 16 BxKt; 3, i=i i, 20 2. Q-Kt 5 ch 19 6 ch 18 3. PxP; 3, 4; 22 4? 21 B-Kt 3. R— ^ 0-0 0-B Q-R R-Q ; K-K R-K R K-B ; P-B Resigns. Q-R 5 10 But a fine sacrifice forces pieces, and saves the attacking Black's were lost. It now looks as if White the exchange of all situation. 11. 12. 13. 14. PxR QxQ RxKtch Q-Q8ch KxKt KtxQch KxB ^ » *• iS,^,^^^^^^^8-^„„,» p Diag. 125. After the terrible Black has a clearer. somewhat Rook and two pawns for two minor slaughter, the position is advantage for the end-game, but as yet there end-game. White, in possession of two is no thought of an which the Black King Bishops, with an open Queen's file on and most masters would stands, has good attacking chances, think the position favourable for White. pieces, a slight 14 B-K 3 ! CHESS STRATEGY i82 P —K B 4 is a plausible move, but is followed by a pretty — Kt 5. The move in the text threatens to eliminate the K B by P— Q B 4, P— Q Kt 4. P— K B 4 15. B— K 3 16. Kt— B 3 K— K 2 17. P— K Kt 4 mate by 15 B — Tarrasch recommends 17 R Q i, threatening Kt Q 5 ch. B 3, White could play 18 B Kt 6, thereby permanently preventing Black from contesting the Queen's file, and then try to exchange Black's B by Kt K 2 Q 4. With two Bishops, White would then have winning chances. A subtle idea underlies White's move of P K Kt 4. He wishes to take advantage of the fact that Black has exchanged the K B by playing P Kt 5, thus holding all the four pawns on the King's side. But Black finds a surprising reply, which seems to refute White's plan. Capablanca played against Ed. Lasker (New York, 1915), 17 K Kt 4, K Kt 3 18 Kt 3, K R 4 19 P X B P, R 5 ch 20 R 2, P x P 21 Kt— K 2, Kt 4 22 Kt 3, B X B 23 R P x B, K K Kt i 24 Q I, Q Q I 25 R x R, K X R 26 Kt— K 4, winning a pawn. If P — — — — — — — P— P— ; R— P— P— B— R— ; K— ; P— ; ; R— ; ; P— K Kt 3 17 K— ; ; 18. P— Kt 5 Q R— K Kt I ! Black offers the exchange in order to get rid of White's Q B. If White accepts the sacrifice, he loses his K Kt P, and Black retains three passed pawns for the piece, at least an equivalent for the end-game. White should decline the doubtful gift and meet the threat of R 3 and K Kt 4 with 19 K Kt I. P— R— P— B— Q 4 BxR P— R 3 20. B— B 6 ch K— B 2 RxB 22. R— Q I in order to play 23 B— Q 7 in answer to P— B 4. This explains 19. 21. White's check at move 20. PxPch 23. K— Kt 2 K—B3! If now 24 Kt— ch. Black would assail the 5 White King Q with K— K 4 25 Kt x P, B— B 5— K 7— B 6. The Black 22 ; phalanx of pawns becomes menacing. 25. R PxB 24. B— Kt 3 K— K 3 BXB 26. P— Kt 4 R— R 2 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 183 Black need no longer fear to exchange Rooks, for he would then threaten the Queen's side pawns with his King whilst the passed pawns kept the White forces occupied. 27. 28. 29. The aim R— Q 2 K— B 3 P— B 3 Kt— K 2 Kt— Q 4 ch P— Q B 3 move is not clear. Black should adopt a P— Kt 5, P— B 5, R— R 2, etc. P— Kt 5 30. R— K R I of this forward policy with 31. R— R 8 Now none of the pawns can advance R— R— K 8, K2 answered by 32 Kt 3 and one of the pawns is lost. 31 Kt— K 2 33. Kt— p 4 32. R— B 8 ch R— Q 8 R—Q 6 37. Kt— B 2 38. R— Q 7 ch 39. R— Q 6 34. 35. 36. 40. ; : P— B 5 would be 33 R X R, K X R ; 34 Kt— R— K 2 R— Q 2 R— K 2 K— Kt 2 P— B 5 K— B 2 R— K 3 R— K 2 R—K 3 R-Q I costs—and loses. By a forcible advance on the Queen's side, he creates new chances, but also White tries to win at all new weaknesses. 40 41. P— B 4 R— Q 4 R_Q 6 44- P— B 3 42. 43. K—B3 R— K 2 K— Kt 4 P— K 6 ! P X P fails on account of P— B 6 ch and R— R 2. 44 45. 46. Kt— K I P-K7 P— Kt 6 P— Kt 5 Too late 46 47. PxBP R— R2 PxP CHESS STRATEGY i84 R— K 6 K— Kt I Kt— B 2 51. RxK P 52. Kt— K I 53. R— Q 2 R— R 7 ch R— B 7 RxP R— Q 6 R— Kt 6 P—B 6 48. 49. 50. 54. P-R 4 Kt-Q 3 Resigns The R P cannot be prevented from pushing on to R 6, R on the eighth R—Q i would then be compulsory. But that lets the Black Rook in on the seventh (K R — R 7, followed by after which a mate is threatened by the Black rank. P— B 7 ch). Game No. 18. Emanuel Lasker. Capablanca. Ruy Lopez (see p. 37) 1. P— K 4 P— K 4 Kt— Q B 3 P— Q R 3 Kt—K B 3 3. B-Kt 5 4. BxKt 5-P-Q4 2. Q PxB PxP — Worthy of consideration is 5...B K Kt 5 6 .P x P, X Q Q ch 7 K X Q, Castles ch 8 K— K 2, R— K i 9 P— K R 3, B X Kt ch 10 K x B, P B 3 with a good game. : ; ; ; — ; ; ; In this opening Black is justified in assuming the initiative, as the exchange, which has opened a diagonal for his Q B, has furthered his development. If he does not do so, and confines himself to defending tamely, the chances are that he will lose on account of White's majority of pawns on the King's side. 6. QxP QxQ If B — K 3 instead, 7 B — B 4 attacks Q B 7. reply to that would be inferior. in By exchanging 3 Q — Bishops White would render the Black Q P " backward," and Compulsory. B on the open file its capture would be inevitable. 7. 8. Kt X Q Kt— Q B 3 B— Q 3 Kt—K 2 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 185 It is more side. Black prepares to castle on the King's to castle on the Queen s side, as usual, and probably stronger, which in the present case the King then protects the Q B P, exchanged. would be weak if Black's K B were to be 9. 10. Castles. Castles R—Ki P—B 4 -fMAm^mWm wm. • w ^ ^ mf^. Diag. 126. on the King's Black allows his opponent too much latitude P-B 5, which obstructs wing. He should prevent White's K 5 the game would be After P— Q B, by P— K B 4. B— K 3. and xKt, B B— B 4. equalised by ,, ^. certain, with the Bishops practically be then would A draw would not his . , , Black probably thought White But with unfailing judgrisk weakening his K P by P-B 5of the greater ment Lasker foresees that, in consequence before a successful be will mobihty of his pieces, his attack instituted. be counter attack on the weak K P can of opposite colours. II. P—B3 Kt— Kt 3 would keep Even now P— K B 4 was imperative, though continuation could have the Bishop from that square. The it been 12 P-K 5. B-Kt 5 ; and the Bishop is safe. 12. P—B 5 1 1 I3 Kt-K 2 (or R 4). Kt-Q 4. CHESS STRATEGY i86 This move has a twofold aim. allows B —B 4, It shuts in the Bishop, and exchanging the Black Q B. P-QKt3 12 The diagonal Q R i— K R 8 is the only one in which the Bishop has any prospects of action. However, as soon as he relinquishes his present diagonal, a White Knight settles at K 6 and the Black Rooks are very much hampered. 13. B—B 4 B—Kt 2 Black should have exchanged the Bishops. Now he gets a weak pawn at Q 3. Before playing B— Kt 2, P— B should be played to prevent the Knight getting from Kt 14. BxB 15. 16. Kt-Q 4 Kt— K 6 17. 18. 19. 4 3—Q 4—K 6. PxB Q R__Q I R_Q 2 P_Q« Kt 4 Q R— Q I Kt—B I R—B 2 K R— Q 2 ^ This holds Black's Kt at B i. White's next move prevents the Bishop getting into action by B 4. After depriving all the Black pieces of their mobility, White turns his attention to a determined assault on the Black King. P— 19 20. P-Q Kt 4 P—Q R 3 K—B 2 23. P— Kt 4 24- R— Q 3 25. P— KR4 21. 22. 26. PxP QR— K2 K-B 2 B-R I R— R 2 p_R 3 P—Q R 4 PxP R(R2)— K2 There are no prospects on the Rook's fUe, and Black is restncted to keeping his pieces mutually protected. He cannot prevent White from penetrating the King's side. K—B 3 K—B 4 29. R— Kt 3 30. K—B 3 27. 28. If R_Kt I p_Kt 3 p_Kt 4 ch Black captures the pawn, he would lose it again forth- ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES with through Waiite's also be captured. 30 187 R-R 3. and the pawn at R 3 would Kt— Kt 3 ;••• RPxP R_Q2 PxP 32. R—R 3 33. K-Kt 3 31. fM i wms^wm Diag. 127. P— B4 The White King leaves the diagonal because Black's intends White which by interfere with the combination would to annihilate Black's game in a few moves. K— Ki 34:QR-KRi 35- P-K 5 B— Kt 2 1 A beautiful final stroke 35 36. .. Q PxP Kt—K 4 R— R 7 ch and Kt x P. 1 threatening mate by 36 Kt-Q4 B— B I 37. Kt (K 6)—B 5 of Kt x B and account on Rook the move White dares not Kt—Q6ch. KtxR 39. R— R 7 ch 40. R— Q R I 41. R— R 8 ch 42. Kt—B 5 38. Mate in two is threatened. BxKt K— K I K—Q I B— B I Resigns. Black's only move is Kt— K 2. CHESS STRATEGY i88 is helpless, and White can capture the pawns one by one at his leisure (R B 7, etc.). In this game, so beautifully engineered by White, we have a further example of Lasker's remarkable grasp of position. after which he — Game No. 19 White : Eduard Lasker. Black Four Knights' Game. I. : Janowski. ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES because 189 P-Q 4. threatening to fork t^° P'^«^' *°''^^**'' »l^t—v5' After7...B-Kt 5 on the other hand, we get the 9 B-B 4, B-B 4. ^vhich White obtains the adin on p. 115, change of Black's centre pawn. Kt!!l-Q 5 • , positi'on discussed vantage bv Q-Q 2. Instead of 9.. -B-B 4, Black should But he has not the co,„st Bishop for the attack and White oLv 0-0 2 with a similar threat. peLLôf hrs King's ^° K* >< ^^ "^^ 6 fails on P-KR3(BxKt; 12 P x B, Kt xKt ch Kt i) 12 manages to escape with a draw, e.g. 9. -Q-Q 2 ?tKt iiBxP Tccouni o l-R X and R-K j3%"kI B-K R 4 14 K-R 15 R— K kt I. ; ^ iMW; Q-R P-B ; ; 3,. K-R 2 (Diagram 129) I, 'Wm BF V/W//.'^ tuntr^' I Pi I Bl*M * wm mk fM, Bi : H la i Diag. 129. Black had his B at B 4, as This is the saving clause. If now White would first have White has in the corresponding attack. after 2, and would be lost to protect his B P with 15 as Kt 3 17 R 4 fails Kt i, Kt I 16 on the ^nd Kt 3 3 18 6 because of B i, plays Black other hand, after 17 RxR. attacking the B P a second time. ^, , ^ Black does not With the Black Bishop at Kt 5, however, Kt i 16 15...R— be could The continuation succeed. draw. probable a with 4, Kta; 17 R_Kt3 both sides, and it has This line of play is most difficult for tournaments. been avoided so far in continuation for many In Diagram 128 the favourite Q-K R—K ; Q-R R—K ; R— B-K B— ; , R-B ; R-K PxR K R— B—R ; CHESS STRATEGY 190 Kt—K years was: 7...BxKt; 8 PxB, 2. The opening of the Kt file by 9 B x Kt is not to be feared, because of the reasons given when discussing Diagram 90. But White obtains the advantage with 9 4, preparing the opening of the B file by 4 and P x P. 9. .Kt-Kt 3, in order to retake with the B P after 10 Kt xKt and to open the file for Black's Rooks, is not a sufficient reply, because after 11 K K K Kt—R P-B . P—B 4 and PxP White has a clear advantage, having an extra pawn in the end-game. For the three Black pawns on the King's side are held by the two adverse pawns, which thev cannot pass. effect for The attempt to expel the troublesome Bishop 9...Kt-K I by P-K B 3, and then play for a —B after centre by Kt— B 2 and P— Q 4 fails on account of the withering attack which White obtains on the K B file ee Q Kt— K i 10 B-Q B 4. K-R I n P_B 4, P_K B 5' 12 V^ Q-R 3 -^ 5, PxB; 13 PxP, etc. In consequence the defence by 7. .B x Kt and Kt— K 2 has been 1 3, • ; ; . abandoned. In the present game Black reverts to a very old defence compnsmg the moves BxKt, Q— K 2, Kt— Q i— K 3. : It had been abandoned because White, by playing K i ^7^9 ^'^^^ eventually B-B i and B-R 3, forces the exchange of Black s centre pawn, and obtains an advantage, on wellknown grounds. Here Black strengthens the defence by R— P-K R interpolating 3 !, after which White must come to a decision as to maintaining the pin. If he decides to do so the White Bishop will no longer be able to threaten the Black Queen from Q R 3. BxKt 7- PxB 9. B— K R 4 P-KR3^ 8. If fence the B retreats to B i or K 3, Black can adopt the deKt-K 2-Kt 3. Then Kt-R 4 would be inferior, because Black can simply play P-K Kt 4. In this case the advance of the pawns is justified, because Black can bring his Kt to K Kt 3 and have practically one piece more on theQKing's side, and good prospects for the K-R 2, R— K Kt I, attack which he can open with w n Kt-Kt 3—B 5. P ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Q-K2 9 P 191 —K Kt 4 would be premature. White would win at 11 B x P, as he can attack the once by 10 Kt x Kt P, P X Kt K B Knight a second time by 4 and P x P before Black can the "pin." relieve or sufficiently either protect it ; P— Kt— Oi Q-Q 2 P— Q4 12. O— K 3 13- QxB 10. B—Kt 5 II- It BxKt Kt-K 3 would be wrong to play for the gain of a pawn with P—K Kt 4 and P X P, e.g. 13. .P—K Kt 4 P xP 16 P— K 5, etc. 15 R— K I . !, 14 ; B—Kt 3, P x P ; ; 14. BxKt Black's threat was to develop an attack, similar to that described at move 9, with P 14 15. 16. —K Kt 4 and Kt—B 5. QxB PxQ QxQ B—B 4 exchange the Knight, which is generally superior to a Bishop in an end-game, as mentioned before. in order to PxP PxB 16 17. 18. BxKt PxP p^ tl^ ii w^ s B ^p Wm I'^f Diag. 130. Ci '^1 iMi 192 . CHESS STRATEGY In the end-game thus brought about the White Rooks have more freedom, as they can be mobihsed easily on the third rank to act on either wing. stronger, being easily protected Black's pawns, however, are by the King, whilst White's weak pawns at Q R 2 and Q B 2 are at too great a distance from the King therefore White must see to it that Black does not open files for his Rooks on the Queen's side. ; QR—Bi 18 19. 20. 21. Q R— Kt I K R—Q I P— Kt 3 K R—Q I R—Kt 3 White must now allow Black to occupy the Q B or Q file. P Q 5 Black would simply play P x P 22 P x P, After 21 P —B — ; 3, with a certain draw. 21 22. P— Q 4 R— Kt 3 ch —K B 3 was the correct move here, in view of subsequent threats of mate. 1^ K—B 2 22. 23. 24. 25. PxP RxP P_Q R 4 R—Q R 3 P— K B 4 ? A mistake under time pressure, costing a pawn. Q R Q 3 was the move. P—QB4 RxP RxP R_Q 7 25 R-QB3 27. R— Kt I 28. RxKt P 29. P— K R 3 30. R— Kt 5 QR-Qi 26. Not RxP, on account of R— B 7, and the K Kt P cannot be saved. 30 R— K Kt 3 32. P— B 4 33- R— K Kt 4 34- R— Kt5 31. 35. P— R 4 R— (B5) B7 P_B 4 P_B 5 P_R 4 RxP ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 193 Mate was threatened in a few moves through R and R (R 7)—R 8. — Q B 7 —B 8 R-(B7)Kt7 35 —B White would win the K B P or obtain a Q Kt 8— Q Kt 7 ch, followed by perpetual check (36 still draw, can White text. in the K B 8). After the move as he wins back his pawn. If now R 36. 37. 7, R— R— RxR RxR RxRP? This careless move now loses the game. Of course White R 5, 5 held the should have taken the B P. If then pawn from behind, also after 37. .K—B 3 ; 38 x Q R P, as the White B P 4, a draw would have been the result, R—R P— P— R . K —R would soon have become threatening, e.g. 39 R 8, K—B 4 ; P—B 6, R—Q B 7 42 R—Q B 8, K_Kt 5 43 P—B 7. K xP 44 K—R 2, P—K 6 45 R—B 8, RxP; 46 RxP ch, K— Kt 4; 47 R— K 4, R—B 6; 40 p_B 5, P— K 5 41 ; ; ; ; 48 46 ; K—Kt R—K 3. etc. I, or 44 ; R—B 7 ; R— K R xP 45 R xP, K—Kt 6 RxP 48 R— K 3 ch, 47 K—R 8, ; ; i, ; and so on. 37 38. P-R5 P—R6 RxP Resigns. After 40 R—R 5 there follows P—R 7 and R— Kt 8 ch, or K—R 2) P—B 6. Game No. 20 White : Eduard Lasker. Black : Englund. Four Knights' Game. 1. P— K 4 P—K 4 Kt—QB3 B— Kt 5 Kt—B 3 Kt—Q 5 Kt— KB3 3. Kt— B 3 2. 4. 5. KtxP N (if 194 CHESS SIRATEGY Black can now get White's K P by playing Q — K 2, and moreover exchange White's valuable Bishop. Instead of the move in the text it is advisable to retire the Bishop to R 4 or B 4, or else to play 5 Kt x Kt, P x Kt 6 P— K 5, P x Kt Black would then play Q x P and not P x Q P ch, 7 P X Kt. as the latter move allows White to develop quickly, and Black ; ; has no time to castle— ^.^. 8BxP, QxP; 9 Castles, 10 B 3, followed by 1 B— R—K ; Q-K2 5. 6. B—K 2 Kt-B3 KtxP? lHitf*iAJ 11 ^ ^. fm e^?^ mi 5 mi Diag. 131. Here Kt x B was essential, followed by QxP, freeing the Bishop. After 7 Kt xKt, QxP ch ; 8 Q— K 2', ^y.(^ ch ; KxQ, Kt— Q 4 (10 P— B 4, P— Q R 3), Black completes his development a little later (10 R — K i, P — K B 3; 11 K— B I ch, K—B 2), but after the exchange of Queens 9 there is not much to fear from an immediate attack, and the value of the two Bishops soon asserts itself. In a match game Ed. Lasker— Cole (London, 1913) the continuation was P—Q 4, P—Q R 3 13 Kt-B 3, KtxKt 14 PxKt, P—Q 4. Here the doubled pawn a disadvantage, in that 12 ; ; is the pawn at B 2 is immobile, and constantly hable to attacked by B—B 4. P—Q 3 was the better move. 7. Castles KtxKt be ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 195 After Kt x Q Kt there Now Kt X B was no longer possible. K i and P—Q 3. would be threats of Kt xB P as well as of as the King stage, this The game is almost lost for Black at castHng. file by the K attack on cannot escape the impending R— 8. QPxKt 9. QxKt 10. KtxKt ch Q—B4 B— K 2 R—K I ch B-Q 3 prevents castling, as Q— K 4 would win a piece. P-Q4 II 12. B— K 3 11. White has the development of the B gratis, as Black must lose time with the Queen. 12 13. 14. Black being Q—Q3 Q— K B 3 B— K B 4 QxP!! behind with development is already If he takes the Bishop B i 16 Q 8 ch !, B xQ his threatened by sacrificial combinations. K— B— Kt 5 ch, he loses by 15 15...P—B 3 or mate, 8 K 17 R— Q— ; ; ; 16 B xP ch, and so on. P-B3 14 15. Q— K 4 16. R— K 3 B— K 3 B— Q B 4 Here Black might have castled on the Queen's side, but R Q I would have had much the same sequel as in the actual game. — 17. 18. B— K 5 R— Kt 3 A sorry retreat. Q-R 3 B— K B I But after Q— Q 7, which may have been Black's original intention. White plays R— K B i, threatening B— KB 4. 19. R-Q I This move completes White's development, and only seems to give Black a chance of castling. However, Black has no satisfactory continuation. CHESS STRATEGY 196 19 Castles ? QxPch 21. B— R 6 Mate 20. PxQ Game No. 21 White : Eduard Lasker. Black Three Knights' Defence. P— K 4 Kt—K B 3 3. Kt— B 3 4- Kt-Q 5 1. 2. Developing another piece by B more in accordance with principle. 4 : Aljechin. P—K 4 Kt—Q B 3 B—Kt 5 —Kt 5 or B 4 would be B—K2 There was a threat of Kt x B and Kt x P. If Black plays P—Q 3, the B must retire all the same after 5 B — Kt 5. It seems best to retire the B to K 2 rather than to B 4 or R 4, because there remains the threat of a pin subsequently by B K Kt 5, which might become serious with the Knight at Q 5. — 5- ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES II. 12. 197 BxB P—Q4 PxB B W^m. W'^ ^w iil m. W£ mm. A K^ A r/!^^ ^ %«fi Wi.^ « pr^ 4. ^^ Diag. 132. 13. PxP The second mistake. Unimportant as it seems, it leads to the White did not defend the pawn by Q—B 2, loss of the game. lost it would have proved 10 Q— Q 2 to have been a But giving up the centre is a far greater evil. Black now commands his Q 5 and K B 5, and this enables him to The game shows start an attack to which there is no defence. because move. conclusively how important it is to maintain the centre. KtxP 13 14. Castles 15. 16. KR P-Q Kt 4 Q— K 2 P—K P—B4 P-Q Kt 3 which would now be countered by K 5 cannot be prevented PxP and Q B 4. However, as permanently, and the Q must move in any case, Q B 2 would have been the better move, as there the Queen cannot be molested by a Rook. to prevent — 5, 16 17. 18. 19. P— Kt 5 B—Q 2 R—R4 P— — Q-Q3 Q Kt— K 2 Kt—Kt 3 Q R—K I CHESS STRAIEGY 198 Black's game is beautifully developed, whilst White cannot make a combined effort. The Black Rooks are particularly well placed, and threaten to take an attack in various ways. losing the centre. 20. All this is effective part in the the outcome of White P— K Kt 3 — is Though this prevents Kt (Q 4) B 5, it weakens K B 3, which more serious as Black threatens to open the file by all the P-B5. Q-Q2 20 If now White refrains from taking the pawn, Black plays P-Q R 4 1 21. RxP 22. Kt— Q4 23. 24. QxP Q-K 2 P— K5 PxP Kt—K4 P-B 5 All the avenues of attack are now open, and White's game collapses quickly. 25- ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES would support the advance Q B 4 and also be of use eventually in an attack on K Kt—Q 2 is better, because of p I99 it P—K B 3. The text move allows the White's centre by exchange of two minor pieces, which can only be to White's advantage, as Black cannot get his Q B into play, and is for a long time practically a piece down. 6. BxB KtxKt After P X Kt the pawn would be very weak, and could hardly be held for long. 7. QxKt KtxB P—K Kt 3 To be able to play P— K B 4 before developing the Kt (see p. 49). P-QB4 8. Kt— P-QB3 B3 9Q-K2 10. P— K B 4 B-Q2 II. Q-Q2 Castles K R 12. Kt— B 3 P—B5 13- B-Q3 P-Q Kt 4 14. B—B2 P—Kt 5 15- Castles K R P-QR4 16. Q R— K I 8. wm WM ^Ml A WM A IfTi WM W^> w/V/, j*v Diag. 133- So far the game is easy to understand in the light of the remarks made on page 44, when treating of the openings. The continuation shows in an instructive fashion that White's CHESS STRATEGY 200 attack is the more effective, being directed against the King's side. P—B5 17. fice K PxP ! This sacrifice of a pawn in conjunction with a second sacrion the next move, produces a combination of rare beauty. 18. P—Kt4! ! PxP If Black did not capture White would. In either case the storming of the position by pawns achieves its object and the lines of attack are free for the pieces. 19. Kt— Kt 5 P_Kt 3 Now that White has made an opening for himself at K B 6, 19. .P— R 3 is of no avail. The sequel might have been 20 Kt— R 7, K R— Q i 21 Kt—B 6 ch, after which White wins after either P x Kt 22 Q x P or K R i the rest is easy. . : ; ; KtxP. 20. R—B 6 Black gets no breathing space. Q R— K B I Q—B 4 23. P— K 6 24. Q— K 5 25. Q R-B 5 21. 22. K—Kt 2 If P —R 3, then 21 B xP. B— K I Kt— Q I R—R 3 K—R 3 Help! 25 26. Kt—B 7 ch 27 R—R 5 ch 28. RxKt Pmate BPxP Q X Kt K—Kt 2 Game No. 23 White 1. 2. 3- : Yates. Black French Defence. P—K 4 P-Q 4 Kt— Q B 3 4. B— Kt5 5. BxKt : Esser. P—K 3 p_Q 4 Kt— K B 3 PxP PxB ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES If the Queen recaptures, 201 White obtains too great an advan- submits to the tage in development, and therefore Black a handicap, means this if doubtful doubling of his pawns. It is Black keeps his although the King's side gets broken up. For succeeds White unless weapon, two Bishops, a powerful present The side. King's the on attack developing swiftly an both to afforded chances the shows and game is instructive B 6. at exchange the by about brought sides by the position m K 6. P—KB4 KtxP advance As the K B obtains a long diagonal at Kt 2, this to objections strong be would there Otherwise is justified. apart and attack, to subjected be to likely it, as the pawn is from that, it gives up command of Black's K 4. 7. Kt-Q B 3 Kt—Kt 3 would seem more natural, firstly, because Black K side, and White will need has weaknesses on the and secondly, because the Q P ought quarter, for attack in that B 3, as Black will attack it by be supported by his pieces P— to B—Kt 2. B—Kt 2 7 8. Kt—B 3 9. If Castles B—B 4 now the Knight were at Kt 3, White could play P— B 3 and B Q 3. This is the proper place for the B, which might obtain an open diagonal after P K Kt 4. — 10. 11. 12. Kt— K 2 B-Q 3 P—B 3 Kt— B3 Kt—R 4 P-B 4 P— Q B 5 p_Kt 3 seems preferable, as the text move releases the hold on White's Q 4. The isolated pawn resulting after is not to be feared, as the B at Kt 2 would have 13 Kt i), and WTiite would not be so greater efficiency (Q PxP R— firmly established in the centre. 13. B—B 2 14- Q-Q 2 P— Kt 4 CHESS STRATEGY 202 There now ensues an interesting struggle. Wliite builds up an attack with Q and both Knights and eventually the B (P— K Kt 4). If Black can manage to play his King into safety at R I in time, and then occupies the Kt file with his Rooks he would have the better of it, his pieces having by far the greater range of action. B— Kt2 Q—B 4 Q-B3 K— R I and K R—Kt i might be considered. 16. Kt-Kt 3 B—K R 3 17. Q— B 7 Q_Q ^ Î 18. Q-K 5 14 15. Wîte gains a move by attacking the Knight's Pawn may seem far fetched if I now point out that this could It not have happened if from the first Black had given preference to the pawn formation at Q Kt 3 and B instead of Kt 4 and B 4 5 though the whole game would almost certainly have taken a different course. Still, when advancing a protected position there always is the risk pawn into an unof its becoming the object of an attack at an opportune moment, the plan of development does not necessitate and whenever such moves they are best avoided. B-Q4 18 19. 20. Kt—R5 Q— Kt 3 ch Kt— B 3 ? ? ? Wi^^''/^ If » ^^^ Wfm. ^*%i t * m 4???%^/^^ m Diag. 134. m. ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES The last moves have decided the game. 203 Both players have — overlooked that 20 Q B 6 would have won a pawn at least (QxQ, 21 KtxQ ch with KtxB and BxP). 20...BxKt 22 Q xB folleads to an immediate loss by 21 Q xB. B xKt ; lowed by P —K Kt 4 with an overwhelming attack. ! P— B 3, Instead of i9...Kt—B 3, Black should have played i and the occupation of the Kt file by the followed by Rooks. K—R White's last move allows him to do this with even greater effect. 20 21. K—Ri R—K Kt I Q—R 3 Black has now a preponderance of material on the field of not being battle, and it can be concluded off-hand that White, able to bring his Rooks into play, must lose. 22. Q-B3 Kt—Kt 3 23. K— B I K—K 2 is a shade better. But there is no longer any adequate defence. R—Kt5 Q R— K Kt I 23 24. R— K I 25. Kt-K 5 Black was threatening BxKt, followed by R— R 5 and P—B5 KtxKt 25 26. PxKt 27. 28. K—Kt I Q-Kt 4 BxPch RxKt? Q-R 5 QxQ and B— K 5 ch was simple and effective. BxR 29. RPxR BxQ 30. QxQ R-Qi 31. KxB 32. P— B 4 R— Q I is much more promising, although it means the loss R and B—B 8, etc.) With Bishops of different of a pawn (R X . colour the game is not easy to win even now. CHESS STRATEGY 204 R—Q7 32 PxB 34- R— Qi RxB 33. R— Q 7 RxRP 35. 36. RxKt P K— Kt 2 R_QB7 — Kt 5 at once. He could have played P R— R 5 37. 38. R-Q Kt 7 P-R 4 R—R 3 would only have drawn out the agony a httle longer. P-Kt 5 38. Resigns. Game No. 24 White 1. 2. 3. 4. : Atkins. Black French Defence. P— K 4 P-Q 4 Kt-Q B 3 B-Kt 5 P-K 5 6. BxB 5- : Barry. P—K3 P-Q 4 Kt— K B 3 B— K2 K Kt— Q 2 QxB i ^ î » s m w aMim^mam "i ^M' '^^'ît/^^2^^^^^' Diag. 135. 7. Kt-Kt 5 The intention is to strengthen the centre by P-Q B 3 Though It takes a number of moves to bring the Knight into ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 205 this varia- the tournament games in Plav again, yet most of side White, mostly through a Kmgs «on hfve been won by the notes to Game No^ 22^ attack on the lines set out in show that this ,s d"e to the Investigations by Alapin tend to devoted h.s attention to Queens fact that Black in all cases Game No. 22 ) when he could have side operations (just as in by himsel starting a utiUsed White's backward development, then either aim at can He counter attack on the King's side. B4 play else or B 3, the White centre at once with 2 i-B Kt-B 3-Q by Kt P and prepare the advance of the Simple discussion. under various lines of play are still to the move in the text. development is probably preferable B 4 9 Kt-B 38 4, 3, Castles eg P-K P-K K mse 7 B-Q ; P-B 7 P-Q K-Ql J ^tion of Rooks into ';°n<=^rted action^ It the forfeiting There can be no advantage in of getting the Kmg mto way other no be there unless castling safety and of bringing the of pieces is otherwise the free development is obvious that appreciable danger for hindered, and the King is in ^^^^^^ pawns than on the wings where the to open files in the centre Kt-Kt 3 is the only move have not advanced yet. Therefore worth considering. P-K B 3 p_Q B 3 9. PXP 8. With the Black King remaining in the centre. Vv-îte has no maintenance of his pawn at further interest in the centre. contrary he will try to clear the K 5- ^n the PxP P-B3 9 Z Q-Q2 I?. Kt-Bi K^QR3 Black will have to trymg to complete his deveconfend titWifhcnfties in is barred on accoun B At this early stage it bpment clear that is The usual way (P-Q 4) Black's King with which a of tTe dangers to centre is fraught. 12. 13. B-Q 2 Kt-B 3 P—K Kt 3 I clearance m the CHESS STRATEGY 2o6 As Black can force this advance at any time by playing I, White decides to develop his B at Kt 2, thereby R— K Kt covering his K K B 3 and K R 3. The weakness of the latter squares would not be of any great moment if White were to castle on the Queen's wing. But as P— Q B 4 is necessary in order to break up the centre, castling K R is the right course. 13 14. 15. 16. B—Ki B— Kt 2 Q Kt— Q 2 KtxP Kt— QKt3 PxKt Kt— Kt 3 P-B4 PxP KtxKt 17. 18. Castles 19. 20. 21. 22. KR K R—K I B— Q 2 R_K I Q—B 3 Kt—Q 2 P~Q R 4 Q_B I ! White wishes to get rid of the pawn at Black's order to break in with his Knight at B 5. Black Kt 3, in has no means of preventing this, and soon succumbs to the overwhelming array of White forces. 22 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. 29. 30. P—R 5 Kt— Kt 3 BxKt RxR ch Kt—B 5 R—K I Q—K 3 Q_B4ch Kt—K2 p_Q Kt 4 Kt—Q4 KPxB BxR Q_B 2 K—B 2 B—Q 2 Resigns. If K— Q 31 KtxP ch followed by K— B I White wins by 31 Q—Q 6 and R—KKt—Q 6 ch. I, 7. Game No. 25 White: Emanuel Lasker. Black: Tarrasch. French Defence. 1. 2. P— K 4 P-Q4 p_K 3 p_Q4^ If ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Kt— K B 3 Kt-Q B 3 B—Kt5 B—Kt5 Pi-TMi Pi 207 tBi 1^ ^p ^ W If p p s m .^^ Diag. 136. This line of defence, called the McCutcheon variation, was recommended for many years by Tarrasch as being the 5 leads to The most obvious continuation 5 P strongest. reached. been yet not has verdict final the comphcations, and to be thought is continuation best the R 3, After 5 P PxP; Kt i; 8 4. PxP. 6 PxKt', PxB; 7 —K K R— QxP. loQxRP, Q— B3; 9Q—R5. P—K R White has an easy development, whilst Black, as m most to bring his variations in the French defence, finds it difficult to retire After 3, it is not advisable into play. Q B P—K R P-K Kt 4 7 B-Kt 3. for here the 4, the Bishop 6 bemg free Bishop is out of play, and Black's King's Knight K B. Black's can play to K 5 for concerted action with simple once at is Lasker's continuation in the present instance system of deand effective. It leads to an entirely different velopment. ; B-R 5. PxP ; QxP move Black recaptures with the pawn, he must lose a isolated doubled with the Bishop in order to avoid getting an B 3. The doubled pawn which Black pawn after 6 not be isolated, get after the move in the text would If Q— may and therefore not necessarily weak. It could become a CHESS STRATEGY 208 weakness Black were to castle on the King's side. But otherwise it might even become a source of strength, supporting, as it would, an advance of Black's K P against the if White centre. 6. P—B4? Kt—B 3 Black should retain the option of castling White exchanges at his K B 6 have been better. 78. ; Q R, in case P—Q Kt 3 and B— Kt 2 would BxKt PxB Q-Q2 9- QxB ID. R-Qi BxKt Kt—Q 2 PxP 12. Q-Q2 Q-Kt3 R—KKt QxP II. guarding against the mate at Q i before moving the Kt. But this would have been better effected by K 2. Aftei Kt 3 the Knight cannot move yet because of Kt 5 ch. Q— B— Q— Wm IS -mîi. ± Jî wm M ^m. my'.. W^ s m^ ,BP 11 2 Diag. 137. P—B 3 Q-B 2 15. P— K Kt 3 13. 14. 16. B-Kt2 Black wishes to push on the K P. P-QR3 P—B4 Kt—B4 Q-B 2 White, however, prevents this at once. Q-K 17. 2 18. Castles P—Kt4 B— Kt 2 ILLUb'lKAllVE GAMES 209 The The Black position has any number of weaknesses. King cannot castle into safety the pawn position is full of WTiite takes full advantage of this holes, and open to attack. and wins in masterly fashion with a few strokes. ; P—Kt 5 P—B 4 Q—Q 2 19. 20. R— Kt I Now Wîte cannot capture the Kt P because of BxKt. But he does not want the pawn, he wants the King. 21. Q—R6 BxB 23. KR—Ki 24. Q-B 4 25. Q-Q 6 22. BxKt Q—K4 QxP V^ § P-B 3 ' Mate in two was threatened (B—B 6 ch, etc.). B—R 5 ch 26. BxRch 28. RxPch 27 R—Kt 3 PxB Resigns. Game No. 26 White : Capablanca. Black : Blanco French Defence. P— K 4 P—Q 4 3. Kt-QB3 4. KtxP 5. Kt— K B 3 1. 2. 6. KtxKtch 7. Kt— K 5 P—K 3 P—Q 4 PxP Kt—Q2 K Kt—B 3 KtxKt This crosses Black's plan of developing the Q B at Kt 2. B-Q3 P-B 3 Q-B 3 Kt xP was threatened. 9 B— Kt 5 ch, P— B 3 10 7 8. ; Q 10' II. p B 3 B— K Kt 5 B-Q 3 Castles B— K 2 CHESS STRATEGY 210 Whatever Black plays now, he must create some weakness in order to provide against White's Q— R 3, BxKt, QxR P, and White's attack must succeed. The whole of Black's plan as the onty reason for abandoning the centre is thus frustrated, by P X P was the occupation of the long diagonal by the Q B. Now the Queen's side pieces cannot get into play without much difficulty, and by the time they have succeeded it is too late. m 11 i m I fm.^ wm i IS HH am M wm>. wm m>. W/. lit wm. SJ ^ i^ ^ Diag. 138. Kt—Ki II. K Intending to intercept the diagonal of the White B by If Black plays Kt 3 with the same intention, White plays P R 4-5 and P x P, and brings the Rook P— K B 4. —K P—K into play. 12. Q—R 3 P—K B 4 — K R 3 would lead to an immediate disaster 13 B x P, P PxB : ; 14 QxR P, P— K B 4 ; 15 P— K Kt 4. The move in the text avoids the immediate attack on the King, but the King's Pawn is now " backward," and White immediately fastens on this weakness. 13- BxB KR 15- KR— Ki 16. R— K2 17- Q R— K I 14. Castles 18. P-QB4 QxB R—B3 Kt-Q3 B-Q2 R— Ki Kt—B2 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 19. 20. 21 P-Q5 211 ^^""^L P—KKt3 RxKt BxP was threatened. K—Kt 2 Q—R 4 21. P-g 4 Q-Q 4 23- g-B 3 24. PxP 25. B—K 2 22. P-Kt 3 B—Bi The Bishop now settles at Q 5, and whether Black takes the the pawn or not, he is paralysed either by the pawn itself, or taken. is pawn the if Bishop pin of the BxP 25 B—B 3 27. B— Q 5 28. Q— K 3 29. Q— R 6 30. P— K R 4 26. The deciding manoeuvre, tearing front of the K. K—B 2 Q—Q 3 R— K 2 K— Kt I up the chain of pawns in P-QR3 P— B 5 30 P—R 5 32. PxP 33. RxB 31. PxP Resigns. RxR After RxR, 34 RxR, A beautifully concise game. 35 QxP ch wins a piece. Game No. 27 White : Black Niemzowitsch. French Defence. 1. P—K 4 : Tarrasch. P—Q B 4 This opening is called the Sicihan Defence. White, howvariation of ever, adopts a continuation which leads into a the French Defence. P—Q B 3 P—Q 4 4. P-K 5 5. Kt-B 3 6. B—Q3 2. 3. P—K 3 P— Q 4 Kt-Q B 3 Q-Kt 3 PxP CHESS STRATEGY 212 Black seeks to demonstrate that White's Q P is weak. The present game, however, seems to prove that White is able to guard it adequately, thus permanently supporting the K P too. It would therefore appear to be better to attack the K P itself, and to play P B 3 on the fifth move. Now B Q 2 would be better than the text move. As White cannot give further support to his Q 4, he would have to play P x P, and the protection of the K 5 would have to be undertaken by pieces, which is not desirable. — 7. — B—Q2 B— Kt 5 ch. PxP Not Kt xP, 8 Kt xKt, Q xKt, because of 8. B—K 2 The B cannot go to B 2 on account of Kt 9. 10. — Kt 5 and B — Kt 4. KKt— K2 8 P—Q Kt 3 B—Kt 2 Kt—B 4 Now White's centre is safe from further attacks. Tme, Wliite has forfeited castling, but as he dominates the King's side, where Black cannot undertake anything, there — Kt harm in P 3, 10 11. Directed Kt — against no B—Kt5 ch B— K 2 K—Bi BI 12 P- -Kt 4, driving off the Kt. R 5 would follow. 12. is preparatory to " artificial casthng." P—Kt 3 P-QR4 Diag. 139. Now ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 213 This manoeuvre is unwise White counters with 13 P ; —Q R 4, a move which was necessary in any case, in order to develop getting the Q Kt via 3, this being the Knight's only chance of times three into play, because as long as the Q P is attacked R That is a Black to for necessary was weakness in White's game, and P— Kt K R 4 was 4. prevent his Kt being driven off by P—K P play to also had White K R 4 to the correct move. Then played have could Black case which prevent P K Kt 4-5, in concerted into P Rooks his brought K Kt 3, and have 13... P K Kt 3 would have been necessary before castling, action. because White's B Q 3 would have attacked the K Kt. The latter could not then capture the Queen's Pawm on account the lines of B and Q must not be interrupted. it — — — — — of a discovered check, e.g. 12... Castles ; 13 —Q B 3, Kt xP ? ; 14 KtxKt, KtxKt; 15 BxKt, QxB?; 16 B— R 7 ch, and P— Q R 4 is not only a lost move, In Diagram 139 Black's but moreover allows a White piece to settle permanently at Q Kt 5. It also prevents the Knight from playing to Q R 4, from where White's P Q R 4 could be answered by Kt Kt 6 — — eventually. 13. 14. P-Q R 4 B— Kt 5 R-Q B I Kt— Kt 5 All these skirmishes only result in the exchange of pieces, and as long as Black's K R is out of play this can only be of advantage to White. 15. Kt-Q R 3 Kt-B 3 This is in order to drive off the B. Black should have exchanged his own inactive Q B, as the White B might become R 7, whilst Black's Q B effective on the Diagonal Q Kt i— K has no future. 16. 17. K— Kt 2 B— K 2 Kt— B 2 B—Kt 5 Black cannot yet castle, because of 18 19B-QB1). B—Q 3 Kt— K R 3. CHESS STRATEGY 214 i8. ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 215 R—Bi 25 P—^ 3 RxP Kt—Q 3 26. 27. KtxKt QxKt 28. 20. Kt—B 3 PxP B—B I P—Kt5 31. BxP 32. B— K 3 PxP R— Bi Q—K 2 30. Q-Kt 4 33- Bishop by This provides against Black attempting to free his Kt 6 ch. White Q 2 is countered by Black's 4. mobility greater the through new wins surprisingly quickly, B— B— P_K oi his pieces. Q-B3 33 R—R I R—R 5 34. R— Kt I 35. K-R I Here Black could have held out a little longer by ing his Kt P K—Kt I ; : 38 35. . R—R 5 QxP (RxP, 39 Q—R 5) .K—B I B— Kt 5, ; 36 R-Kt 3, ; ; 37 39 defend- Q—Q R—Q 3. ^' QxP; 40BXR, QxB. RxP Q—Kt 3 B—Kt 5 was threatened, and after R— R 36. Compulsory. i, Q X P. Q X Q, R X Q, the R P wins easily. BxR QxP 39-Q-Kt2 40. RxQ 41. P— R4 37. 38. KtxB Q-B6ch QxQch KtxP Resigns. Game No. 28 White : I. Black Alapin. Defence. Sicihan P—K4 : Rubinstein. P-QB.4 as At first glance this move would seem to lose time, opening strategy, does nothing towards the main object of shall find that we But pieces. of development namely, the it CHESS STRATEGY 2i6 does contribute to that aim, although indirectly. For one thing it could, by a transposition of moves, lead into an openin other ing in which P Q B 4 is played in any case first the against the from it acts that in openings it is of use, formation of a strong white centre. Concurrently it prepares it — ; the opening of a file for the Rooks. 2. Black should not play P —K Kt— K B 3 Kt—K B 3 ? Kt—K B 3 as long as White's means the clear gain of a move. of developing moves to choose from. 5 There are plenty can be followed by Black develop at K 2 or Kt 2. In the first case (compare Game No. 29) P 3 is played. In the this course 2. .Kt QB3 second case, the opening might take Two systems of development according to whether the KB is to —K : 3 . — ; P—Q 4, PxP; 4 KtxP, Kt—B 3; 5 Kt— Q B 3, P-Q 3 —K Kt 3 (not P at once, because White would exchange Knights P—K B—K P— 6 K Kt 3, and K Kt by 3, 5) is superior, as he has a pawn in position White's B the centre in conjunction with greater mobility. Black will Nevertheless his find it difficult to bring his Q B into play. and drive off the — ; Kt 2. position is compact and difficult to get at. 3- P-K 5 Undoubtedly Rubinstein had taken this move into account K B 3. His idea was to provoke the advance of the K P. The pawn at K 5 is weaker than at K 4, particularly as Black's Q B P prevents its natural support by P Q 4. Moreover Black's Q 4 is free from interference by White. White refutes this ultra subtilty by simple and straightforward play, and he gets such an advantage in development that his attack succeeds before Black is able to demonstrate any weakness in WTiite's game. when playing 2...Kt — — 3 4. Kt-Q4 Kt—B3 KtxKt QPxKt Kt—B3 B-Q B 4 P-Q 3 After 6. .P— K 3, 7 B — B 4 would restrain the Q P. PxP 7. B— B 4 5. 6. . ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 217 satisfactory means of de- At this early stage Black has no velopment. The Q P is attacked t^^^V'T'^'''^ B be developed at Kt 2. the the K P cannot move, nor can is refuted by B-Kt 5, in order to play BxKt and PxP, about the exThe move in the text which brmgs ch at the piece another White change of Qiieens. but develops watch to instructn^ same time, is more or less forced. It is matenahses. soon how White's advantage in development f^tT K BxP KtxP QxQch 0. RxQ 10. BxKt P-QR3 8. KtxKt Kt 5 ch could not be panied by White's threat of Q 2 because of 11 B xP ch. B— B— wmtm Ri t HI '9' WM •f f^-f Wm « ^m.M m 1 fM y/sm ^^ ^^ ^.easij z;z^:^' Diag. 141. B—Kt5 B—B4 B—B 7 P—B 3 13. B— Kt 6 14. B— Kt 3 15. B—R 4 ch 16. P— Q B 4 11. QR—Bi 12. P—K4 K— K2 Here White could have won a pawn at If then K— K 3, 17 P— Q ^ 4- 16 17. 18. 19. 20. K— K—B2 BxB B—K2 B2 B—Q7! R X B ch K R—Q I P—B3 once by 1 R— Q 5' CHESS STRATEGY 2i8 The pawns can wait. fitable because of 20 R—Q Kt i. RxP would not have been pro- K— K3 20 RxP B—Q3 Black might have resigned here. It is 21. only a question of time. 22. B—R7 R—B3 —Kt Otherwise there follows R 23. 6. P—QR4 R— R I P—R 4 P—R 5 RxP R— Kt 7 25. R— Q 5 24. 26. 27. 28. P—Q R 4 P-Q Kt 3 R (R i)-Q B 1 R— Kt 5 Resigns. Game No. 29 White Teichmann. : Black : Spielmann. Sicilian Defence (see p. 215). 1. P—K 4 P—Q B 4 P— K 3 Kt-Q B 3 3. K Kt— K 2 2. — — This comes to the same as Kt B 3, as after P Q 4, P x P the Knight recaptures. If, however, Black plays P Q 4 — there is a certain advantage for White to have the Kt at e.g. 3...P_Q4; 4 PxP. PxP; 5 P—Q 4- If does not exchange pawns. White is able to bring his bear on the centre after Kt 3 and Kt 2. P—K K 2, now Black K B to B— Kt-Q B 3 3 White can exchange this Knight later on, and thus make —K P 5 possible as soon as he should deem it advisable to drive the Black Knight from his B 3, where the same is K bound to develop sooner or later. It is perhaps wise to prevent P— K 5 by B 2 instead of the move in the text. This is an old defence, introduced by Paulsen. Though it retards Q— the development of Black's minor pieces, it produces a strong ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES defensive position, and the opening side. ing chances on the Queen's like this: 6 219 Q B file gives attack- of the The ^f Q-B2 Jl"". 3...P-QR3; 4P-Q4.PXP; 5KtxP ^^%-^l B—K 3 Kt-K B 3 7 B-K B-K 2 2, ; ; 8 Castles, P-Q Kt 4 Kt-Q 2, etc. followed by B-Kt 2. P-Q 3. Q PxP P-Q 4 45- KtxP 6. KtxKt P-QR3 Kt PxKt B-Q3 P-Q 4 B— KB4 B—Kt5 78. Castles 9- Kt—B3 î/# ^ 1 Diag. 142. 3, As White can force Black to play P— have played should Black Q-Kt 4. move, by P-K 5 and P—Kt 3 at once, so as to have Kt—R 4 in answer to P—^ 5. Kt a weakening of the King's side. thus keeping one piece for the defence text, and White s The latter is in jeopardy after the move in the attack succeeds. P—K 5 Q—Kt 4 12. K R-K I 10. 11. Kt—Q 2 P— Kt 3 P-Q B 4 sacrifice of the ex- Of course Black must not accept the Kt-K 4, B xR 14 Ktchange by playing P-Q 5- After 13 in a matmg net, from which is Black R X B, BI ; K— 15 6 ch time to collect sufficient forces there is no escape, as he has no The move in the text does not stem the tide for the defence. • — CHESS STRATEGY 220 either, and White quickly forces the win by a beautiful combination. P-Q R 3 B— K Kt 5 13. 14. B—R 4 Q—Kt 3 Q— B 2 leads to the same conclusion. 15. P— Kt4! PxP KtxP 16. P—K 6 17. PxKt The object of White's fifteenth move is revealed. K I would now be attacked. With- out it the R at P—B4 17 Kt —B 4 fails on account of 18 P x P ch, K x P ; K 7 ch, followed by Q— K B 4. 18. PxKt double ch 19. B x P ch 19 R KxP Resigns, Game No. 30 White : Tarrasch. Black : Spielmann. Sicilian Defence. P—K 4 Kt—Q B 3 3. P— K Kt 3 1. 2. P—Q B 4 Kt—Q B 3 Speedy development by Kt— B 3 and P— 4 is more desirQ Black may have time to get a firm footing able, as otherwise at his Q 5. 3 4. B— Kt 2 P—KKt3 B—Kt 2 The Black Bishop is the more effective, as the line of the White Bishop is masked by the K P. Small as this advantage would seem, it becomes serious later on. It is another confirmation of in the the doctrine that the value of each manoeuvre opening depends on the measure of mobihty it affords for the pieces. 5. 6. K Kt—K 2 P-Q 3 Kt—B 3 221 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES freer game with P-Q 4- Here White could still obtain a a pawn Perhaps he was afraid of losing ^^^^l^-^''^' 8 K Kt x ^t m it, e.g. nothing is there Kt X P Kt X P. But -7 (KtxKt P? KtxKt Q KtxQ KtxQ; 10 KtxB P! xB P ? n Kt xR. B xKt '11 B xB?R-Q Kt i) K xKt (Kt There was Lxr'; 12 KtxP. KtxP: 13 KtxP), KxKt. nothing else to be feared after P—Q 4; • P-Q 3 6 B—Q 2 and B-R 6 and to exchange in order to play Q-B i 7. Castles be weak points at Bishops, after which there would K R 3 and K B 3. 8. P—K R 3 Castles P-K R 3 9. B-K 3 Black also prevents an exchange of Q-Q 2 11. P— B 4 10. The position has Whites Bishops. K-R 2 Kt—K I now become exceedingly difficult. In of his favourable development order to make the most of the moving Queen's side. But the on advance B Black must m K must to the Queen's side, Black his king's side pieces over with attack an might get chances of proceed warily, as White overwhelming forces on the King's side. 12. P—K Kt 4 Kt—B 2 13. Kt— Kt 3 R-B in order to Pây the 2 Here it was necessarv to play to drive the Kt to manage could Black R to K B I before Q Q I by P— Q Kt 4-5. 13 14. It would still have leave jc P-QKt4 Kt—Q I ? been better to play Q R—K i and to possible after the Queen's side to itself as long as Kt— P—Kt 5, Q I in order to start an assault on the King's side with Kt 5. After the text move the and p_B 5, P—K R 4, P— Queen's Rook remains shut in. 14 15. Kt— K 2 QR-Kti 1 CHESS STRATEGY in order to play P— B 3 and P— Q 4. The whole plan, how222 ever,^ IS inconsequent, King's side. as he has started an attack on the Now he suddenly opens up files on the Queen's where Black has assembled superior forces. The result White gets into trouble on both wings, for as soon as he gives up his King's side attack, the advanced pawns there, as one knows, are only a source of weakness. side is that P—Kt5 Q-Bi PxP Q-R3 15 P—B3 17. PxP 18. P— Q4 PxP 16. 19. 20. 21. PxP R—B I Kt— Kt 4 P-Q 5 m m^mM^ Diag. 143. This shuts in the White K B altogether, and at the same time opens the diagonal of Black's B. Therefore on principle alone the move is questionable. In effect it gives Black an opportunity for a beautiful winning combination. Unly 5 was worth considering, as then the opposing Bishop would have been shut in and White's own diagonal K P-K 21 QxKt 23. QxKt 24. KtxB 22. Kt— Kt 5 Kt-Q5 BxQ 1 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 223 generally an equivalent Although three minor pieces are game collapses quickly White case the for the Queen, in this too many weak pomts produced The advanced pawns have Black forces. which afford an entry for the KR-Bi 24 RxR, Q-R 6 RxR R-B 2 27. R—K 2 25. 26. But the text move is of no avail comthe game with another fine B-R ^ was threatened. either. Black winds up bination. j^_g s * If I QxB BxR 28. R—K Q—B 4 I, QxKtch Kt—B3 29. B—Kt 4 K_B 2 30- Resigns Game No. 31 White Black: Janowski John. SiciUan Defence. P_K 4 Kt-K B 3 o P— 04 liaxP 1. 2. P-Q B 4 Kt--Q B 3 PXP Kt-B3 Kt-B 3. and mcidentThe aim of this move is to provoke P-Q B 4. ally to prevent command of his The latter move would give White Q 5 and not only prevent buTalso immobilise Black's K " backward." 5. Q Kt-B 3 P unless his Black s P-Q 4 Q P is to remam P-KKt3 must be played first. In any As shown on p. 216, P-Q 3 playing P-K Kt 3^ If for ms ance case Black must be wary of ^^th 6 B-Q B 4, and Black rephe^ after P-Q 3 White plays P—K Kt 3, there follows 7 KtxKt, PxKt, 8 P— K 5 W CHESS STRATEGY 224 P— Kt—Kt 5 (PxP ?, 9 BxP ch) 9 K 6, K B 4, with advantage to White (see game in the match Schlechter-Lasker). ; 6. P— ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Castles 225 Q R is stronger still, as the Q R gets into action at once. B—KKt2 R—Kt 3 14 15. B— K B 4 RxB B— 3 6ch 16. B— Q 2, the continuation might have been: 17 BxB, QxB 18 Q R—Q i, Q—Kt 2 19 K R—K i ch, Kt—K 2 or 18...Q—B i; 20 RxKt ch, KxR; 21 BxP ch, etc. 19 B X P, etc. If ; ; ; ; After 17 with B—B R—K i Black could have held out a little longer After the text move, however, Black's game 3. collapses quickly before the concentrated onslaught of the White forces. QxRch Q R—K I ch 19. RxKt ch 20. R— K I ch 21. BxPch 22. R— K 8 ch 23. RxBch Q—Q2 Kt—K 2 KxR 24. Resigns. 17. 18. ! Q—B 3 ch K—B I K—Kt I B—B I K—Kt 2 Game No. 32 White : Ed. Lasker. Black : Mieses. Centre Counter Defence. 1. 2. P—Q 4 P—K 4 Kt— KB3 PxP P— Q B 4, a weak move This is to tempt White to play would obtain by Black Q B 3 By playing (see p. 35). pawn. the for far the better game in exchange P— 3. P-Q4 QxP In either case White wins a piece by Kt— Q B 3 or Black Q B 4. move by driving off the plan Black's centre. the in pawn a has White Furthermore, the on early castle to be might Queen the in retaking with P KtxP can also be played. P— CHESS STRATEGY 226 — Queen's side and attack White's centre pawn by P K 4, and White must be on the alert against this plan, though it will not be easy for Black to put the same into execution, because of — is the only — After 4 Kt Q B 3, Q Q R 4 move which brings the Queen into momentary the exposed position of his Queen. security, and even then Black must provide for a retreat, as B—Q after WTiite's 2 there would be a threat of an advantageous " discovery " by the Kt. P provides such a —Q B 3 retreat, but it bars the Q Kt from its natural development at B 3, where the Kt could exert further pressure on White's Q 4. The Q B, too, is difficult to get into play and easily becomes an object of attack, as in the present game. Q-QR4 B—B4 Kt-Q B 3 Kt—B3 — B Kt 5 would only help White's intentions to attack on the King's side in the absence of Black's Queen, e.g. 6 P — K R 3, P— K Kt 4, B—Kt 3 8 Kt—K 5 (threatening Kt—B 4), P—B 3 9 P-K R 4, Q Kt— Q 2 10 Kt—B 4, B—R 4 ; 7 ; ; ; Q—B2; IIP—R5, B—K5; i2KtxB, KtxKt; 13Q—B3 and B —B 4 with the superior game. m mk ^ '^B'K'm., 'WB. mm WM. 'mm m^ Diag. 145. 6. Kt—K 5 ! Kt—K 5 P—B 3 was urgent here, to provide against Kt—B 4 and Q—B 3. Now the game as good as lost. White obtains a is ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 227 and brings it home before forces, violent attack with superior has time to complete his development. Black If K^-Q 3 Q-B 3 7. KtxKt, B— Q2. P—K 3 B—Q 2 8. B—Kt 3 g. p__K Kt 4 Black had to guard his K B 2 because Q ^ X P ch. of Kt—Kt 5, KtxKt, ^ ^ Q—,, ^^* 3 B P— K 3 II. Castles KtxKt QxKt; Compulsory. Kt-B 3 is refuted by ^^ the other hand, On P— R 5ic{ X Q P X Q 14 B— Kt 2 and B 4, Q-B 4; B-K be 12 the answer to ii...QxP would . P—K R 4 10. • 13 p_R 5, p_B 3 by R xKt'and 15 14 P X B, P X Kt mate. Q 8 or B7 ; ; R— PxKt KtxB 12. B— K Kt 5 followed Q— QxP 13. B-Q3 K—B 2 or P—K B 4 were also unavailing in consequence of Black's poor development. 14. K—Q2 BxPch B-K 3 P— R 3 17. QxKtP 18. B-K 4 Q-Kt 5 15. 16. Q—B 5 Q—B3 ' Resigns. Game No. 33 White Barasz. : Black : Mieses. Centre Counter Defence. 1. 2. P_K 4 PxP Kt-Q B 3 Kt— B3 4. 3. Q^^St. R Q-Q 4 advance the Q P at once and so threaten proQ 2 after which Black is almost under compulsion to Kt, his blocking thus B Q P-Q by 3, for his It is better to B— P—Q 4 vide a retreat Q CHESS STRATEGY 228 4 5. 6. Kt-Q B 3 B—B4 B— K 2 P-Q 3 Already now the mistake of having allowed Black to develop his Queen's side unmolested is apparent. P Q 4 is — now impossible, for Black would castle on the Queen's side and keep the initiative by exerting a permanent pressure on White's Q P by P White must yield up the centre to 4. —K Black. 6 7. 8. P—K4 Q-B 4 B— Q2 Castles P-Q R 3 —Q Kt The Queen must escape from Wliite's threat of P Kt 9. Castles 10. 11. P—Q Kt 4 P— Kt 5 —B 3 4. Q— K 2 This advance is somewhat purposeless, as the White pieces are not ready for an attack on Black's King. It is difficult, though, to find a sensible plan, as the White pieces have so little mobility. It would perhaps be best to —K play R and Kt— K 4. Kt-Q 5 II R—K I 13. B— K B I 14. Q—Kt I Q-B 4 B-Q3 12. ? m^^ 1 ^S32K? V/^^^// (i'i'"'''// Wi IMi mm. Wi^^ WM ^^ C 2 S_mmIIIWM ^ , Wa »'&''¥'S M5fi wm. m. 'm^.^/wM Diag. 146. i, B—B i, ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 229 The purpose of this move is not clear. The advance of the Kt P could only be condoned by a desire to obtain an open If White wanted it now. file, and it seems illogical to protect have moved the not need he Kt his K of to escape the pinning prevented the this and effected have Queen. KtxKt would King's side from being laid bare. White's game would still have been bad, particularly as the B, but opens the diagonal for the Black at exchange K Q 4 the move in the text has even a worse effect. Mieses concludes the game with an elegant sacrifice. 14 .... 15. PxKt pPxP 17. KxB R— K2 16. KtxR PxB K_R I KtxKt ch P—K5I BxPch QxPch RxR QxKt Q— K4ch R—K I Black has wrought fearful havoc in the White ranks, and of the the defenceless King cannot withstand the onslaught three White pieces for long. 23. 24. 25. threatening p_Q B 4 K—Kt I K—R 2 Kt—R 4 Q—Q 5 ch R—K 7 Q—R 5 ch, Q— B 7 ch, and mate at Kt 7 or R 7. Q—K 4 ch 26. Q—R I QxPch P— 27. B4 Q—Q 5 ch 28. K— Kt I Resigns. Game No. 34 White Black Niemzowitsch. Caro-Kann Defence (compare p. 50). : Em. Lasker. 1. 2. P-K 4 P-Q 4 : P-Q B 3 P-Q 4 CHESS STRATEGY 230 4. Kt— QB3 KtxP 5. KtxKt 3. Kt PxKt B—B 4 Q-R 4 ch P—K R 4 B— K 2 7. B— B 3 6. 8. p_B 3 A deep conception. fice of If PxP Kt—B3 ! White accepts the proffered a pawn, he loses time, as he must retire his KR sacri- B before open, he Queen Black But there the bringing out his Kt, and, moreover, the file being can only castle on the Q side. If he refuses the sacrifice, the text is ready for the attack. move is still of value, as even then it is hardly advisable for side, whilst Black can play B R3 White to castle on the as soon as it might be desirable to exchange White's Q B, K 9- — ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 18. 19- Q-R5 Kt—K 4 Q—B 3 Kt—B 5 wm ^wM * 231 , I ^^ ^^'^^"""'"'W Diag. 147- pawns by moving Whilst Black was busy capturing two concentrating the whole of the Queen four times, White was to win back the pawn with his forces, and now threatens lor R_Kt 4 The move in the text anticipates the threat, P Kt x 21 Kt 4 would be 4 now the answer to 20 ch, winmng the Q. Kt-Q ? ? 7 4 22 4 ch Q—R R— Q-B ; . ) Kt-K K-R I Kt—Kt5 22. B— B I 23. R—Kt 2 20. 21. intending to get rid of the Q 3-K 524. 25. 26. K R—Kt I Q—K 2 Kt—B 3 P—K B 4 B—Q3 R—Q 2 B—B 2 awkward Black Knight by Kt- Kt-Q3 Kt—K 5 Q-R6 27. P—R 3 White appears to be in " time " difficulties, or else he remains an opportunity for making the P-B 3 and K 4. passive, in order to give Black pawn by risky attempt to hold the extra 27 28. 29. B— K 3 K—R 2 P—R3 KR-Qi R—Ri P— ; CHESS STRATEGY 232 — B 3. If Black wants to play for a win, he must play P In view of the favourable position of the White pieces, he prefers to risk nothing and to avoid the weakening of position which follows upon practically every pawn move. K R—Q I R—K 1 RxR R— Q I K—R I K—R 2 32. R— Kt 8 30. 31. 33. 34. 35. RxRch R-Kt 7 R— Kt 8 ch R-Q 2 As long as Black plays steadily, White cannot hope for more than a draw. 35 36. 37. R— Q I R—B I R— Kt 7 Kt-B 3 P-B 4 In order to drive off the Rook; White now enforces the draw by a fine combination. 38. B—Kt 5 39. 40. RxP! QxPch ! Kt—R 4 RxR R—Q2 Not K— Kt I on account of 41 Q— K 8 ch, K— R 2 42 Q X R, Q x Kt 43 Q X B, threatening B— K 7. ; Draw. Kt—K 5 For after BxKt there follows 42 Q— K 8 ch, K—B 2; 41. ! 43 Q X B ch, with perpetual check. Both players have shown a deep positional insight, and the game shows in an interesting manner how a preponderance of material can be counterbalanced by the greater mobility of the pieces. Wliite ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES PxP 3. Kt-Q B 3 4. KtxP 5- Q-Q 3 233 Kt— K B 3 Queen's White wishes to castle as soon as possible on the file with the help of side, in order to operate on the Queen's the Rook. P-K4 5 centre Here Black loses two moves in bringing White's sound. Q Kt— pawn away. The manoeuvre therefore is not moves developing Q 2, Kt xKt, and Kt— B 3, or any other would be preferable. Q—R 4 ch PxP 7. B-Q 2 6. 8. Castles QxP ! mm-P ^« ^^^ WM mm WmL W « R « « ^M y^ ^ ??i jg. Diag. 148. White prepares a magnificent mating combination, which can only be made possible at such an early stage, when the opponent has utterly neglected his development. KtxKt 8 KxQ O— Q8chl 10. B— Kt 5 double ch K— B 2 11. B— Q 8 mate A beautiful mate. If 11...K— K 11 R— Q 8 mate. 9. ! i, 234 CHESS STRATEGY ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 235 have a far-reaching influence, the unsatisfactory development to the King's side by way forces be ab^to bring his accessible by the d-PP----^^^ 4 which is made bear has time to bring his Q B to Black's Q P. before Black ims Kt 3 and B-Kt . 4 by mit?'s 34 and 5 is mediate threat (after defend himmust be Kt 3, risk K B ack does not wish to In tlê meantime White can X. Kt_B I. sdf wHh Queen s file. This 5. opemng the I and threaten postpones the efficiency o 3, which atain necessitates Kt and Q R have been brought the Q B atKt , ,ntil White's Q on these hues, and pronn for the attack. The game develops the command of the advantage of "wm Tk ^ We P-Q k B-g Q-K 2-K P-K P-K R-K pW P-Q P-B R_Q vfd"excdLnt example of the centre. g-K 2 ^—^^ P-QB3 Q-B2 P-K 5 11. Q_K 2 10. 12. 13. preparing P QR-Qi Q-K? —Q Kt 3. Kt—B I K R—K I 15. Q-Kt4 14. ig. P-QI^t3 B-Kt 2 B-Kt 5 g__R 5^ 17. 6__K4 R-B as 4 ^^ threatened Black cannot yet play P-Q B 4, The Bishop which obstructs the with an attack on K B 7. ancl the sonry retreat to Q L Q would have no move, save B-Q B 4 18 4' ^ White would win speedily 17. .P-Q : ig R-B • 1 P--Q5. PxP; 20 KtxP, BxKt; R and P. R-Kt4 19. PxB 18. Q xP was threatened. 20. Kt—Kt 5 21. Kt— K 4 Even the Knight is brought in via 21 22. 23. 21 BxB, attacking BxKt K—Ri R—K 2 K4. R-Qi^ R-Q 3 Kt—B 6 P-Q ^ 4 CHESS STRATEGY 236 — QxP ch and R Kt 8 mate. Black cannot capture the Kt because of Q x P ch and mate at Kt 7. But the mate cannot be delayed much longer in view of the con- threatening centration of superior forces for the attack. 2324. R-R3 Kt—Kt 3 Resigns. There is no answer to Q- -Kt 5 andRxP. Game No. 37 WTiite Marshall. Black Capablanca. Queen's Gambit Declined (see p. 52). : I. : ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES is bad, because 237 PxP prevents the natural developm^^^^^^^^^ after castlmg attack K Kt at B 3, and Black can obtain an by P— K B 4-5QxB 6. BxB 7. B-Q 3 This also is a good move, as it furthers development. KtxKt PxP PxKt* 8. the in this case is not against Giving up the centre pawn which on the only diagonal spir?tT'theôpening, as it opens operate. the Black Q B can BxP Q-B3 11. gt-K 2 S-85'3 P-QB3 9. iS B-Kt 2 KR 13- P-Q R 4 Castles 12. Castles White intends to operate move can only be good if P-R 5possibly by K R-Kt i and on h^ Queen's side, the adoption makes Queen White Bnt the position of the one thmg .t .s T. Afferent plan compulsory.the For Queen *='„^^^here '=='";^.\%'^^; to concentrate forces other hand the On side. Kmg's the therefore in this case, on to could not be P"* -*» -7*^^ referred maniûvre he P-Q B 4 and Black can prevent P-R 5 by This raW here because P— taking K. 4, A fairly obvious course was to play answered by be then would B 4 possession of the centre. P-Q Kt—B ^ Rooks would be very effective initiate a King s In this game White does 1 and K i. at 13... P-Q R 4 .s clearly a tLâttack subsequently, and thus Tq White 5 after which the lost move. ^__^^ ^ Kt-B3 I'.Q-K^'S 15. Q R— B I Kt—B 4 The tempting move of P-K 4 xB cannot be Pêd because Kt-R P 4 .^^ 17 P and P Kt X P, P x threatens The move in the text of 16 Kt-Q 5, Q-Q I ; B-R2 17. K R— K I 16. : K R-Q R X B. KR-Qi Kt-R 4 i. CHESS STRATEGY 238 This threatens B —B 3 attacking the R P. White decides to yield the same at once, thinking quite rightly that a direct attack must have good chances, as Black gets two pieces out of play in capturing the pawn. 18. 19. B-B 3 Q R-Q I Q-Kt 4 Black cannot take the pawn yet, because of Kt x P and BxPch. 19 20. P—Q 5 P-B5 ? "Wm. H^ il '^ M i III i X WM WÂ w^,^- WM m^% ^ ^^1 Diag. 151. There is no need to play for violent comphcations. The course was to open the way to the King's side for the Rooks by P K 4. The continuation could have been Kt 3 22 P 21 Kt—R 5, K 5. K 4, 20 followed by Kt B 6, with a strong attack; 23 logical — P— BxR BxR RxB ; also after 21... P are good. —B After the : P— ; — 3, 22 R —Q 2, P— ; White's attacking chances move in the text, Black could get an advantage by simply exchanging: 20...PxP; 21 KtxP, 24Q— KB5, BxKt; 22RxB,RxR; 23 QxRch. R— taking the R P, however, In R 6. Kt Q— P— 3 25 Q—B 2, Q i; ; Black incurs grave risks. ?,0 239 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES and K R 3 ve^ Black finds the weaknesses at his K B 3 of 25 R X R, because once, at R X P would lose troublesome. QxR; 26Q—R6! 25. Kt— B6 RxP QxR RxR 27. B— Kt I 26. Q R 4 would have been answered by K —Kt 2. Kt—B3 27 pieces for the Black must try to bring back his minor time, the end-game If he succeeds in doing that in defence. side. is easily won on the Queen's R—Q I B—B 5 of Q—R 6. because Not PxB 29. P— K R 4 28. By ex White's attacking resources seem inexhaustible. way this in back changing Queens he could have got his pa\\Ti 30 BxKt, 6) I (RxB ?, 30 7, 29 B-Q Q-R Q-B : BxB ; 3iQxQP,Q-Q3; 32Kt-Q7,QxQ; 33KtxQ,B-Ki; But even then Black would mamtam a 34 KtxQBP. of his passed superiority in the end-game owing to the freedom after seventh the at pawn, and because he can post his Rook win to not prefers This explains why Marshall P_q' Kt 4. attack with a back his pawTi, but to enter upon a violent right move in the finds doubtful issue. However, Capablanca game. the wns finally all the ensuing compUcations, and m m "* * WM 5 € 'WM. WM A W| JiW,*- ^^„„ 1 , %i, B ff 51 *JJlil I I e;^^ Diag. 152. 'iliÂ^ ; CHESS STRATEGY 240 29 30. 31. 32. Kt— K 2 Q—B 2 K—Kt I Kt— K 4 Q_B 6 ch B— K 6 This is now compulsory. If White loses time in withdrawKt Q 4 and ing the B, Black consolidates his position by : Q—K — 2. PxB 32 R—B I is refuted by 33 33. Better than Kt— Kt 5 !, P xB 34 Q xR, etc. ; QxKPch Kt—Kt 5, for after Kt—Q 4, 34 QxP ch, the Black King finds a safe retreat at Kt 2. 33 34. 35. K—Bi Kt—Kt I Kt— Kt 5 P-B 4 in order to open the file for the Rook. 35 36. R— Ki R— K2 K— Kt 2 B— K I K—R I PxP R—B I ch P—R 5 39. P— R 6 ch 37. 38. Kt xP fails on account of Q 40. —B 6 ch. Q-Q 6 \^Tiite takes all possible advantage from the position, but cannot bring home his attack, as Black has concentrated his Black must still be careful to avoid a forces for the defence. mate,5.^.QxQ?; 4iPxQ,RxP; 42 R— B 7 or 41. .R— Q 2 . 42 R—B 8. Q-B4 40 41- Q-Q 4 — Here White could have tried Q X Q and R B 8. There was then a permanent threat of R x B, e.g. 41 Q X Q, P X Q ; 42 R—B 8, RxP ; 43 Kt—B 3, R—K 2 ; 44 Kt— Kt 5, etc. It seems as if Black would have to give up the piece again by — .R R 5 in order to win. White, however, would then have drawing chances, which would have been a fitting conclusion to this wonderful game. 43. . ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES RxP 41. 42. 241 R— K 2 Q-Q7 Resigns. Game No. 38 Black: Teichmann. Queen's Gambit Declined. Q 4 4 White: Rotlewi. 1. 2. P— Kt-K B 3 P— K 3 P_Q Kt— K B 3 P— B 4 Kt-B 3 5. B— Kt 5 3. Q Kt-Q 2 4. B— K 2 against Ed. Lasker in New Capablanca tried 5...B— Kt 5 was 6 P— K 3, P— B 4 continuation The York, 1915. Q— Kt 3. 8 7 B— Q 3. Q— R 4 wms the The correct move is here 8 Castles. If Black B P, pawn by B X Kt 9 P X B. Q P X P 10 B X P, Q X ; : ; ; Q— R— ; -^4. B i, White obtains a strong attack, e.g., 11 P) 5, with P X 13 B 13 (Kt X B P X Kt. 12 B X Kt— Kt 3, 14 P X P, P X P this possible continuation 13 Q 6, with a strong attack. i^ Castles 6. 3 B 4 2 7. side, and to follow Queen's the on White intends to castle pawns. Although side King's the by this up with a storm ; ; P-Q ; Q— p_K Q_B P— Rubinstein has on many occasions been successful with this where Kings have form of attack, it is open to criticism. For, King which has the on attack the wings, castled on different successful. castled on the Q side should be more mm m. wm Wa ^ mm wm I km TS Diag. 153. ; 242 CHESS STRATEGY This is much stronger than P— Q Kt 3 and B— Kt 2, as then the Black Queen cannot participate in the attack quickly enough. As pointed out before, speed is the first consideration for the attack, whenever the Kings have castled on different wings. An interesting counterpart to the present game is found in a game won by Rubinstein from Teichmann (Match, Kt3;8PxP, PxP;9 B— Q 3, P—B 5 P— K P— Vienna, 1908) 7...P— Q R 4, B 4 11 Kt 2 10 Castles Q R, file) B of the 12 B opening the in lay Q (the only hope B— ; ; ; ? —B 5, R—K i; 13BXK Kt, KtxB; 14 P— K Kt B— Q 3; Kt—K 5 16 P—R Q— K 2 17 Q R—Kt 15 P— Kt 18 B xP ch K xB 19 P— Kt 6 ch, K— Kt i R P_Q 3 4, ^, 5, ; !, ; 20 KtxKt, PxKt; 23 R—R 8 ch, K X P i, ; ; 21P— R6, P— B3; 22PXP, PxKt; 24 R— R 7 ch, and Black resigned a ; few moves later. 8. Castles 9. PxQP White loses time in the centre. ceed at once with Q— R 4 It was imperative to pro- P—K Kt 4 followed by B x Kt, P— Kt 5 and P— K R 4. 9 PxP 11. Kt-Q 4 10. 12. It K— Kt I KPxP B-K 3 KtxP would be too risky to leave both King and Queen on the Q B file. 12 13- B— Q 3 The threat was P : QR— B B x Kt and B x P ch. —K Kt 4 and P— K R 4 instead I P— K R 3 Had White played of effecting exchanges in the centre, Black would not have been able to afford this weakening move. But now Black wins the game on the other wing, before White is able to make use of the weakness thus created. 14. ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 243 The Queen must leave the Q B file without delay, as Kt— K 5 Black's game is aheady superior; with the is threatened. Queen, White has no piece available for the the of exception attack on the opposing King. 17 18. R-Q3 R— Q B I R—R 3 Now White must again provide against Black's Kt— K 5, as White's Q Kt is needed for the defence of Q R 2. 19. P—B 3 R—Q I Black intends to move his B and then to advance his K P is with an attack on the Queen. The object of the text move the on attack to prevent White from saving himself by an Rook (Q—B 5). 20. R—B 2 BxKt By this exchange Black achieves his object of driving off his R P the Knight by P— Q 5, but White has time to give prehave would Black further protection by P— Q Kt 3. This, vented by playing B—Kt 4 instead of the text move, e.g. 21P—B4,P— K4; 22Q—B5,PxKt; 23PxP,B—B3; 24PxKt, P— Q5, etc. 21. PxB Q—Kt4 23. QxP 24. Q— K 5 22. P—K4 PxP Kt—K3 This delays the fatal advance of the Q P for one move. 24 25. 26. P-Q Kt 3 Kt— K 4 R—Q 2 R— Q B I 29. Q— Kt 2 30. K— R I 27. 28. P-QKt4 P-Q 5 P— Q 6 Kt— Q 5 Kt—B 7 Kt— R 6 ch Kt—B 7 ch CHESS STRATEGY 244 31. 32. 33. Kt—R 6 ch Kt—B 7 ch K—Kt I K—R I K-Kt I Diag. 154- Black does not play for a draw, but only wishes to gain ^ ^„ R-QB3 time. 33 at The intention is to double Rooks and to force an entry B 7. P— Kt 5 would not be good. The White Rook would the Q P. no longer be attacked, and the Knight could attack 34. R (B I)—Q I K R— Q B i Now that the White Rook has left the Q B file, one Rook ch would be sufficient to force an entry at B 7, and Kt—R 6 34... P—Kt 5 could have been played at once, Kt P— (preventing Q 4) P—Kt 5 Kt—R 35 K—R 36Kt—B2,R—B7; 37RxR,PxR; 38 R-Q B Q-Kt 3 by RxR ch, Q— Q 5 ch and 3g Kt— K 4, R—Q 8 followed P—B 8 mate. Kt—R 6 ch 35- RxP P—Kt5 36. K—R I Q-K 4 37- R-Q 7 followed by 6 ch e.g. i, ; ; i. ! If QxQ, Black mates in three. 38. R— Q 8 ch 39. 40. RxR ch R-Q I RxR K—R2 QxQch I ; ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 245 Q—B 2 only better. Curiously enough there is nothing the same end-game and Queens of exchange leads to the Black, as the permanent which, however, is an easy win for tied to the first rank, mating threat keeps the Wliite Rook to capture aU the White pa^vois. whilst the Black King threatens the exchange of Queens with the If Q_B 2 White forces Q"Q R— Q— 2, B 7 42 Q 3. 41 and ch Kt-B of 6 threat 8 ch 43 K-Kt 2, with a play to 13 7 en, mate. Black therefore would have following combination R-B Q_R 7 : ; Q— ; etc., as in the game. 41. 5-g7ch RxP KxQ 42. K—Ri 43. R— R I P-Kt 4 K-Kt 2 K-Kt 3 P-Q R 4 I4. Kt-B 6 ch 4 45. 46. Kt-Q 6 Kt-K the White We have now a position with a forced move.etc.If Therefore 4-B 5. Knight moves, there follows K-B voluntarily. P his R White gives up 47. 48. R— QBi RxP Kt—K 5 ch Kt— Kt 4 K—Kt 2 R—K 7 R—K 8 ch Kt-R 6 K—B I R—K 7 ch Kt-Kt 4 Kt-B 4 Now Kt—B 6 and R xP mate are threatened. 49. 50. 5152. R_B 5 K-Kt 2 R—B 7 ch R—B I 55 K— R I 53- 54- 56. K-Kt Kt—B 7 ch Kt—R 6 ch I Black again appears to be short of .7. Kt—Kt 4 K— R I fs. R-B 5 59. K-Kt 2 60. R-B I Now after the sixtieth time. ^-W""^ Kt-R 6 R-K 7 ch move Black has again plenty of time, and can prepare the final combination at leisure. CHESS STRATEGY 246 61. 247 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Kt xP, White cannot win the Q P by 10 P xP, P xP 11 KtxKt; 12 QxKt, because BxP ch wins the Queen. ; up the been have would Q R for the attack on the Q P. However, Black as P, P first by X more correct to fix the object of attack playing PxP, after could now cross White's intentions by by occupymg the move a which he would sooner or later gain to retreat. Queen White the file with a Rook, and forcing The text' move is played with the intention of bringing it Q Q-K2! 10 Black offers to give up his Queen's Pawn. If White Queen's file will become the sacrifice, Black's attack on the accepts bringing his Queen out deadly as White must lose a move in Rook. The White Kmg has of the line of action of the hostile P, P X P 12 Kt x P, then no time to get into safety, e.g. 11 P X i 3 followed 14 Q-Kt 3, Kt xKt 13 Q xKt, ; R-Q ; B-K ; by KtxP, etc. B-Q 3 i, Castles) Here again PxP (followed by B— K 2, R— Q m my indicated as move, would have avoided the loss of a II. ? Now White loses yet another move, as note to move 10. taken two moves Black exchanges pawns and the Bishop has B. the Black of case the in only to reach B 4, as against one fatal, be should stages opening the The loss of two moves in Rubinstein gives a striking example in the present K and of this game. PxP P-QKt4 g-g/ B— Kt 2 II BxP 13- B-Q 3 12. 14. Q_K 2 15. Castles KR Kt— K 4 move is The advantage which Black obtains by his last Diag. (compare 36). opening this generally gained by White in has Black and moves two lost But in the game White has the acting on Rook a moreover assumed the offensive, having Qfile. KtxKt 17. P—B 4 16. BxKt ; CHESS STRATEGY B x P ch followed by Q— Q 3 ch and Black's threat was replies 17 K R— Q i the answer is Q— B 2 Q xB. If WOiite and the Kt. The text move is P the R attacking both necessary to advance the K P to be will as it unsatisfactory, 24S : : K 4 or K 5, where it will block the diagonal of one of the Bishops. B—B2 QR— Bi B— Kt 3 ch 17 P— K 4 19. P— K 5 18. 20. K—R I Kt— Kt 5 ! ! Diag. 156. The beginning of magnificent sacrifices. 21 QxKt cannot be played because of R X B and R— Q 7, etc. 21. 22. B— K 4 P— Kt 3 Q—R 5 P— R 3 Black wins also in fine style R x Kt 23QxKt,QxQ; 24PxQ,BxB; 25 B x R, R—Q 6 threator, 23 B xR, B xB ening R— R 6 mate 24 Q xB, Q— Kt 6 After : Q—R 5 mate. 22 23. * PxQ 24. QxR 25. Q-Kt 2 and mate at R 7. RxKt R-Q 7 ! ; ; ; 25 P X Kt, ! 1 ! ! BxBch R—R6 ! ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 249 Game No. 40 White Rubinstein. Black : CapaWanca. Queen's Gambit Declined. P— Q4 P-QB4 P—K3 KPxP Kt—O B B—K3 B—K2 P— Q4 Kt— KB 3- P—B4 4- PxQP 5- Kt— B3 6. P— KKt 7- B— Kt 2 I. 2. : R—Bi 8. Castles It rather This move is not satisfactory at this juncture. similar in to resorted helps a combination which is frequently subseand Black Q B positions, namely, the exchange of the diagonal the on B quent pressure on the K P by the White been played, after have should B 8...Kt— 3 8. B 3_Q Yi R K w% Diag. 157- which White could hardly be said to possess any advantage, e.g. B-K 3. Kt-K Kt or 9 P-Q ^3, Q B-Kt 5, Kt-K After 9 P xP. howB-Kt 10 5, B-K 2. or 9 P XP, B xP 5. or 9 5, ; ever it would be weak to recapture with the Queen. In a CHESS STRATEGY 250 game E. Cohn —Ed. Lasker (match 1909) there followed: 9... Q— R 4; 10 Kt— K Kt 5, QxP; II B—K 3, Q— R 4; 12 Q— Kt 3, after which Black had to give up a pawn already R 13 Kt xB, P xKt 14 B—R 3, etc. Castles Q ; ; Q. : ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES PxKt 17 If 251 R xKt, White exchanges Queens and plays B xP 0—^7 18. QxB 1920. ch. Kt-Q 5 Q-Kt 5 Q-Q 3 exchange of Queens. With an extra pawn White forces the P loses the Knight on Black cannot prevent it, as 20...QxKt 20...Q-Kt 5 loses the Q P by account of 21 K R-Kt i, and Q I and B—K 6 ch. 21 K R— 20 21. 22. QxQ,, KR-Ki PxQ B— Kt 4 Black Rook K R—K I would not prevent the entry of the i, R-K 7; B Kt-B 7; 23 RxR ch, RxR; 24 R-Q : Black would win the pawn back and end-game xvith a Knight against a niight even succeed in the 2c B—Kt 4 R—Q 7. Bishop. ^ 22 23. 24. KR—Ki RxR R-Q_ 3 RxR R-QKt3 B 3, and keep the Black should first play his King to K the that Not Q P is of paramount 5Rook away from his K But the Q Kt P fully makes up importance from his dommatmg position, as played the Knight is driven No doubt even into play. gets and the badly placed Bishop and it requires difficult, most is ending after the text move the issue. successful a to it bring Rubinstein's fuU powers to for its loss. ; R—K5 RxP B—K6ch ^ 27 28. R—B 5 ch 29. B—B 7 ch 25. 26. 30- B-B 4 RxP Kt—B3 K—Bi K—K I K— Q 2 P-Q R 3 the Q side. To Black's only chance is his extra pawn on 3i 30...K— by B B 7. Q3 exchange the Kt for the where time much too take would Kt Kt P, 4 32 side in the the clear would White time' is all-important. ; K • RxK xB R— K Kt— CHESS STRATEGY 252 meantime, push on his K R P, and ultimately give up his R for Black's remaining P, as soon as the latter runs into Queen, after which the three passed pawns win easily against the Generally speaking it is wise, in R endings Hke the Rook. present one, to advance pawns on the side where there is an extra pawn, in order to get a passed pawn as soon as possible. Then the hostile Rook has to look after that pawn lest it should queen, and the greater mobility of one's own Rook often saves the game even when opposed by a preponderance of pawns. 31. 253 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 4P=Kt MB 6. Castles ?^,f ,3 3 PxQP II. The most natural move to which tl^%^-fj^;i;^,!!l^'^; P-B 4 _ ^^f attempt ii...PxQ P, 12 Q P, because of 13 BxB, the 6. weakening ^5 PxP, ^Lr K"/^p ^^^^^_ ^^ followed by P xKt, Kt xP U X^ ; ^ ^4 16 Kt—B 4 and Kt— Q ; b. KPxP jj 12. Kt—R 4 P-Kt 3. weakening move Tn order to provoke Black's d.agona. JveWechances oi attach o" «,e long : ;tt Jl n R T? lu moves. ^ '^ White gives up two clear much to in his development, to'J Lsiderably'ahead T TC 8 Wliite's disadvantage. 12 13'. P-^^ 3 '. QR-Qsq KKi-B3 of 14 P xP. P Not Kt-K 5 yet, on account xP ? ; i5 B xKt. PxB; i6KtxP. 14. PxP and a satisfactory conposition is uncomfortable, White'ss posiuoii White might p„<,siblv passive resistance tinuation is hard to find. ^0^!^'^^^ P^l^!' ^^ Kt—B ii— Q-K 2. K R-Q m sMe but allows Black thus the best plan, have been tn p ,^ Seen's i. : Kt ^ operations on the ^ preliminary to the centre. too much scope 14 15. PxP B—Kt 5 White wishes to get rid of ports the advance of P—Q 5- supthe Black Knight which CHESS STRATEGY 254 Kt— K5 15 BxB BxKt 16. Q-B 2 17. WTiite has no idea of the threatened disaster, or he would have played P K Kt 3. Even then, however. Black has the better game ^^•ith two Bishops, and the Q and Kt better placed. — KtxKt 17 The beginning of a brilliant mating combination. 18. P— Q5 KtxKt ! Black would have played the same move if \\Tiite had retaken with the Queen. 19. PxP —K P 4 was comparatively the best move, although Black's attack would have become overwhelming after P B 4, e.g. 20 — P— B 3, B—B 5, etc. m mi AM 9 fli^^^ I 'S: ^ ^ ^ WM §„.,. ^ 1 Diag. 159. 19 20. 21. KxB K— Kt I BxPch!! Q-R 5 ch BxP! Emanuel Lasker won a celebrated game from Bauer (Amsterdam, 1889) with a similar sacrifice of two Bishops, and very hkely this is the reason why Tarrasch's beautiful ILLUSTR.\Tr/E GAMES 255 briUiancy prize at Petro- game only earned him the second grad (1914)- P—B 3 22. L R-Q 4 24 Q K xB, then Q-Kt 5 ch 23 K-RK-Kt ch 2, Q-Kt 4 R-R 4 ch 25 QxR, QxQ ch 26 xP, ^ ; If ; ; and QxKt. KR— Ki 22 Not Q —Kt 6, because of Kt —K 4. Kt-K 4 K-B2 ti O— B \ Q-g 8 ch BxR Q—Kt 7 ch kJv^3 28:PxR RxKtch! P-B5ch 23. 24. 27 With Q— Kt 6 ch Black mates two KxP 29. moves earUer. S~"?^'k §-57ch K-K5 31. K-K 6 30. R-K I ch Resigns. If K-Q 7, B-Kt 4 mate, if K-B 6, Q-R 5 mate.^ Game No. 42 Black Capablanca. White : Aljechin. Queen's Gambit Dechned (see p. 57) I, p__Q 4 o. p__K 3 P—Q 4 P-QB3 Rt—B 3 P-K 3^ 2.P-QB4 4. 5. 1 Kt-K B 3 Q Kt-Q 2 T-K B 4. B-Q 3, P-Q Kt 3 & ^^ y k 3 B-K 2 5^-'^^'!^%^-\^\''l'lJ({il Kt-Q 2; 8 Castles, Castles; 9 Kt-K 2, Q-K 42, , Kt-B 3 n L' Kt-Ks KtxKt; 12 BxKt, Q-B 3 I3 Emanuel Lasker-Bauer: P-O Kt T. Q Kt-Q 2 P-K 3 ; ; n ?^ , ~^t Kt ,^ Q_R 3 ; 21 R X Q, K X R M i 4 B-Kt 2. , ; ; 22 Q-Q 7, and White won. , — CHESS STRATEGY 256 6. B-Q 3 B—K2 7. Castles Castles 8. Q— B 2 ^^M Kww Hi Ate î; m^m^m^m^ wm^'^'fm » ill 2 ^^ ^ âi i - 'mm ' H I fi Bl .,..B W/ Diag. 160. Black's difficulty is the development of his Q B, particuIf 4. larly after White's last move, which prevents P or Queen the plays either and now Q B 2 White 4 9 P —K —K — the Knight bear on K 5, e.g. 9...P xK P II Q Kt— Kt 5, B— Q 3 ; 10 Kt xP, P—K 4 ; P— 12 B 5, etc. his Q B at must develop therefore Black ; Kt 2 with P Having moved the Kt 2 and P— B Kt B— 4. Q B P twice, 3, Q Black is a move behind the development usual in this opening. However, it would have been the lesser evil. In the present game the Bishop does not get into play in time. 8 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 257 nevertheless, as the threat Q— B 3— R 3 provokes a weakening pawn move. P— Kt3 12 13. K—Kt 2 K Kt—B 3 preventing the entry of the B at R 6. 14. 15. 16. B—K Kt 5 Q R—B I Q Kt— Q 4 B—Q 2 Q—Q 2 Kt—Kt I It should be noted how the weakness at K R 3 acts to the detriment of Black's game. The text move covers the weak square, but at the same time brings the Kt out of play. White in consequence gets the upper-hand on the Queen's side, and the Knight cannot return in time. 17. BxB QxB would be no use taking with the K Kt, as the threat Kt—Kt 4 and R 6 must be guarded against. If the other It Q— Kt captures there follows and K R—B 18 : B—K 4, R—Kt i ; lo R B3 i. 18. B— K 4 B— Kt 4 This drives the Rook to a better square, but already now there is no satisfactory move. best to parry the threat of It would perhaps have been BxKt and R—B 7 by playing Q— Q 3. although the pawn would have to recapture after 19 B X Kt, because of 20 R—B 5 and K R— B i. The chanca of bearing on the Q P through the open file, which was probably Black's intention all along, would then be lost. After the text move, however. White takes possession of the seventh rank, and Black's game collapses quickly. 19. 20. K R—K I BxKt Q—Q 3 PxB P—Q R 3 QxQ P—R3 Q-R 5 Q-B7 23. RxQ Kt—Kt 5 and Kt—K 6 ch was threatened. 24. RxP QR—Bi 25. P—Q Kt 3 R— B 7 26. P— Q R 4 B—K 7 27. Kt— R 4 P— K R 4 21. 22. ! Q CHESS STRATEGY 258 Ilie Kt P cannot be saved. White : R—Ki KKtxP 28. Resigns. R X P ch Game No. 43 29. Black : Bernstein. Capablanca. Declined. Gambit Queen's P-Q4 Kt— K B 3 P—B 4 P-Q4 Kt— K B 3 P—K 3 B— Kt 5 P—K 3 B—O3 B— K 2 Q Kt-Q 2 Kt-B 3 P— B 3 PxP Before initiating this manoeuvre, which aims at the development of the Queen's wing, Black should castle, as otherwise the King is exposed to dangerous and immediate attacks in the centre. 8. 9. P— Kt4 BxB P B-Q3 P-QR3 The system of opening chosen by Black has been tried It seems to be somewhat artificial, as the frequently of late. Q B Pawn takes two moves to get to his fourth. On the other hand the pawn formation at Q R 3, Q Kt 4, and Q B 4 is attained, whilst e.g. 6. ..Castles ; can be prevented in other variations, it 7 B— Q 3, P x P 8 B x P, P— Q R 3 9 P— ; R4. 10. P— K 4 : P— K4 m.^m.jt§My^^ 1^ Mi i. mm i* m m w WiM ii m. mm wrm> T-'^'y Diag. 161. Black's only plausible move here seems to be P- -B 4, and ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 259 many critics have remarked that after 11 P— K 5, PxP 13 B x Kt, 12 Kt— K4 (if PxKt, PxKt) Kt X Kt; the Q-B P. X B 4 15 Q R-Q Kt I 14 B X B, Q X the not is this However, even. been game would have the capture not does White move 15th case, for on the no has Black and Kt the with but pawn with the Q ! ; ; ; he had castled he could play I5,..B— Kt 2 which now is not available because of 16 Kt-B 6, B X Kt 17 B X B, with an overwhelming advantage in If satisfactory continuation. : ; White's refutation of the text move is position for White. above criticism. II. PxP If Q— Kt— Kt 5 B— K B 4 B— B 4 R—B after which Black 12. B 2, White would play i, prise. could not recapture the K P yet, as the Q B P is en Kt— Q 5. Kt Kt x 15 Kt, Kt X 14 13...K Kt X P etc. P, R x B Kt, X 19 Q Q_Q 3 16 B X ; ; ; ; Q— B 2 P— B 3 13. Castles B I 14. R— Again Kt X P is not feasible on account of the loss of Q B P, as can be easily seen. 15. PxP B— Kt 3 Black's game cannot be saved. If 15... Kt (Kt 5) 17 Q 5. there follows 16 Kt X Kt, Kt X Kt ..PxKt; 16. or 19R xB, B; 18B X Kt,P X x KP Kt— Q— Q 3 17Q— R5 ch, ; P— Kt 3, 18 Q— R 6. 16. P— Kt 4 the ) ! Now White initiates a brilliant attack, driving it home takes the without giving Black a moment's rest. If Black e.g. threats, many with B4 pawn, White plays Kt— Q 4, 5)-B (Kt i7...Kt or 3 Kt-K 6, 19 Kt-Q P— 18 18 Kt— 5. Q-Q 3 ; ; K 6, etc. B—R 2 16 17- BxKt P The sacrifice is fairly obvious, as White obtains three pawns and moreover drives the King into the field of However, this does not detract from the beauty of battle. the game, which is full of brilliant phases. for the piece, RP X B 17 18. kt X Kt P Q— Q I CHESS STRATEGY 19 Kt— Q 6 ch, K— K 2 Or Q— Kt 3 by foUowed Q— Q 6. 26o ; 20 Kt— B 5 ch. K—Bi Kt—Kt3 Kt— Q6ch 19. 20. ; RxP Kt—R 3 22 Kt x B, R X Kt 21 Q— Q of no avail because 2)— B 3 Kt 20... etc. Q R— (Q 23 Kt—R 3; 22 KtxP, or 21...Q— Q 2; 22 of 21 Q— Kt K R—B etc. 21. B-R 4 Q-Q 2 QxR 22. KtxB! The threat was 5, : ; is 6, 3, I, Not RxKt because of 23 QxQ. Now Black is a whole Rook ahead. But it is as much out of play as his Queen's The King is driven into a mating net by the side pieces. concentration of superior White forces, and only escapes by giving up the extra piece. Q-K I Q-Q 8 ch 23- 24. B—K 7 ch 25. 26. Kt—Q 6 ch Kt—R 4 ch K—B 2 K— Kt 3 K—R 4 K—R 3 there follows mate in three by 27 Kt (Q 6)—B 5 ch 28 Kt— Kt 3 ch 29 B— Kt 5 mate. RxQ 27. KtxQ K— R3 28. KtxPch 29. Kt (Kt 7)—B 5 ch K—R 4 30. P—K R 3 This threatens 31 P x Kt ch, K x P 32 P— B 3 ch, followed by P—Kt 3 or Kt 4 mate. If Black plays 30 Q R— K Kt i, White wins as follows 31 P x Ktch, RxP; 32 P—B 3, Kt— B i ch; 33 K—R 2, KtxB; 34 PxR ch, KxP; 35 KtxKt, K X Kt 36 R—B 7. If 30. .Kt—R 3 31 Kt—Kt 7 mate. If ; ; ! ; : . ; 30. ; ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Kt—K 3 ch P—R5 K—R4 P—Kt5 K—B3 P—R6 R—Bi 43- P— Kt 4 ch 44. R— B7 45. KxR B-Q5 R—R7 B—R2 36. 3738. Kt (R 4)-B 5 3940. 41. 42. 46. K—B3 261 Kt-Q2 Kt—B3 R— Kt7 K—Kt4 RxPch KtxKt P ch Resigns. Game No. 44 White : Dus Chotimirski. Black Queen's Pawn Game. I. P-Q 4 : Vidmar. ; CHESS STRATEGY 262 Wliethcr he supports the pawn with Black forces matters with P B 3. — 1 d S «r^ Kt —B 3 or P— K B 4, f w^ «ju 'WS II <^ mm ^^ mmy x i I . , iIi..*..M mi . a 11 V///ZV//J V///////A m m!. W/^Z/A o ?^ Diag. 162. Now that the idea underlying White's opening strategy has proved impracticable, he has difficulty in formulating a P Making the best of a bad job, he abandons his plan. powerful obtains a Black But P. in exchange for Black's K KR pawn centre, a teUing advantage. 10. KKtxP B-Q3 BxKt 12. BxPch 13- Q—R 5 ch 14. QxKt II. 15- Q-R5 KtxB KxB K— Kt I P—B3 Q-Kt3 Black wishes to provoke the advance of the Q Kt P and Q B P in order to obtain a passed pawn (16 P—Q Kt 3, P— K 4 18 P—Q B 4, P— Q 5). In order to 17 Castles K R, Q—R 4 ; avoid this continuation. White takes his chance of castling on the Queen's side. This turns out to Black's advantage. Indeed In the ensuing double assault it is a foregone conclusion. by pawns. Black is several moves ahead, as the White pawns concerned squares. in the attack are still on their original ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 16. Castles QR P— K Kt 4 P—Q B 4 P_Kt5 20 QxP 17. 18. 263 P—K 4 P—Q 5 B—Q 2 PxKtP ^>^P„. BPxPl Black gives up his K P in order to get his PxP 21 Finely played. Q R into play with the gain of a move. 22. QxP 23. Q-Kt 3 K R—K I 24. ^—^^^r R-K Q 7 3, K R—Kt I would also be of no avail because of Q—KinRthe The move B— B 4. threatening K B Q— 3 25 Q_Q 3, text puts an end to the agony. RxKt!! 24 Resigns. For after 25RxR,RxR; 26KxR,QxPch; B—B 4 ch ; 28 R— K 4, Q—B 6 ch ; 29 27K—Q3. K—K 2, QxQ; Black remains with an extra piece. Game No. 45 White: Rubinstein. Black: Spielmann. Irregular Opening. 1. P-Q 4 P-Q B 4 paths of With this move Black tries to avoid well-trodden peaceful tournament practice. White can, at will, lead into a Defence by Queen's Gambit by 2 P— K 3 or into a Sicilian P_K 4. It is more usual, however, to play P—Q 5, which blocks up the Black centre to some extent. after P— K 3 without If 2 PxP, Black regains his pawn any disadvantage. 2. 3- P-Q 5 P-Q B 4 P-Q 3 CHESS STILMEGY 264 — Coupled with 4 P K 4, this move is of doubtful value, as Black gains command of White's Q 4. It is advisable to keep the Q B P back, thus retaining the option of driving off a Q B 3. Moreover, the White hostile piece from Q 4 by P— KB is hemmed in by the pawn at Q B 4. P— KKt3 B— Kt 2 P-K 3 3 P— K 4 5. B-Q 3 4. The development of the K Kt is not desirable at B 3, where would block the long diagonal. From K 2, however, it commands K B 4, where it can take up a strong position after the exchange of pawns in the centre, or else it can support the advance of the K B P. it Kt—Q B 3 K Kt— K 2 6. 7. Kt—K 2 — Kt B 3 would have been slightly better, because the Black Q Kt might play to his K 4. 7 P-B 4 9. This PxP Kt—Q2 KPxP 8. move weakens the King's justified only if and would be position, there was a possibility of opening the file for — the Rook by P B 5. But Black has too strong a hold on his B 4. The text move aims at preventing the exchange of K \Vhite's K B through Black's Kt — K 4. It would have been better to withdraw the B to B 2. 9 ID. Kt— KB3 Kt— Kt 3 P— K R 4 ! Now White cannot enforce P—B 5, as Black can attack the Knight by —K R P 4, position at P —R 5. Wliite cannot prevent this with as the Black Knight would take up a commanding Kt 5. Black's game is superior. He can concen- ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES trate all his 265 minor pieces on the King's wing, while White's Q B is ineffective on account of the ill-considered advance of the K B P. ii i wAm ^ M Hi A ^^ ^P ^ , ^# mm ^^ wm i ^^ '^^ ^ ^^^ WÂ Diag. 163. II. '^p 'v CHESS STRATEGY 266 Black forfeits his chance of castUng, not a great loss under on the the circumstances. In any case his K R is needed Queen's the on castled Rook's file, and Black would only have side if at all. 17. Q-B 3 — Here P K R 3 was essential in order to prevent the further advance of the K R P. The weakness at Kt 3 would not have been so serious in the absence of a Black Knight. Now Black become forces the advance of White's K Kt P, and the Bishops immediately effective. 17 18. not P —K Kt 4 on account 18 19. 20. If P—R6 P— K Kt 3 of Q — R 5. Q-Q2 B—Kt 5 B— Q 2 Q—B I Q_Q 3, Black plays Q—B 4 and White cannot exchange Queens because of B —B 6 mate. Q—B4 20 threatening Q —B 7. 21. Q R— B I 22. K—Kt 2 B—B 3 B—K 3 Black must not exchange his valuable Bishop. 23. 24. K R—K I p_Kt 3 B—B 2 There is no answer to Black's threat of doubhng the Rooks on the K file. If White plays Q B 2, Black's Queen effects an entry at Q 6, after which he would double his Rooks, and White's Bishop cannot be defended. After the text move, Black forces the exchange of his two Rooks for the Queen. — ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 267 conseGenerally speaking, this is no disadvantage, but in it means a King, White the of position quence of the exposed speedy loss for White. 24 RxR RxR 27. If B—B6ch B— Kt 7 BxQ Q— Q6 K—Kt I 25. 26. 1 now R xB Black plays Q— B 6. R— K 8 In order to play R— K 3 28. if Black plays B xKt. Q-B6! 28 29 30 31 Q—R8ch Q— Kt 7 ch KxB B— Kt I K—Ki QxBch gxPch 32. K— Q2 Resigns for the pawn queens. Game No. 46 White Black G. A. Thomas. : : Ed. Lasker. Irregular Opening (compare Game No. 45). P-Q4 P— Q 5 3. p_Q B 4 S-8^4 P— Q 3 P— K Kt 3 B— Kt 2 1. 2. 4. 5- Kt—Q B 3 B-Q 2 B This is not necessary. Black could hardly exchange B 3 and 3 would bethe weakness at his for the Kt disadvantage. come too serious a his KR K ; 5 P-K3 6. P_K4 7. KtxPl PxP CHESS STRATEGY 268 In view of the fact that Black's position after B P or K P X P would be very promising, as all his pieces would be easy to bring into play, White decides upon the sacrifice of a pawn, in order to further his own development. 7- ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 269 Kt—K 2 should have been played here in order to play answer to 16 Q— xB B 17 Q xB, B— Kt 5 with Kt—B 4, in ; open to attack in consequence of his broken King's side, but there is no demonstrable advantage The text move is a mistake, and gives White for White. Kt 2. Black is still chances of a decisive attack. 16. 17. 18. BxKt KtxKt PxB BxB Q—Kt4 BxPl PxB, on account of 19 QxP ch, K—R i; 21 R— Kt 3, etc. 18...P—B 4 fails 20 QxP ch, K— Kt I Of course not ; because of 19 R—Kt 3. 19. 20. B—K 4 P—B 4 P—B 4 ! ! This elegant continuation decides the game. If PxP, WTiite simply plays 21 Q 3, and Black can hardly hope to If the Queen save the end-game, as his pawns are broken up. 21 PxP, and White obtains retreats, however, there follows B— : two passed pawns for the B and has the superior position. 20 PxP 22. RxRch 23. R—K B I 24. QxP 21. 25. 26. R—B 4 K—B 2 QxQ P—K 6 29. RxP If K—B I, 30 P— Q 6. 2728. Q—Kt2 QxR Q—Kt 2 Q—Kt5 Q—Q 8 ch Q—Q 5 ch PxQ B—R 3 R—Bich PxB R—B 3 R—B 7 R—K 7 ch 32. p_Q 6 He might play K— Q after which B— Kt 2 ch has points. Resigns. 33. K— Q 3 30. 31. K—K 3 K— K 4 5, CHESS STRATEGY 270 Game No. 47 White : Black Tartakower. : Asztalos. Dutch Opening. I. It P—Q 4 P—K B 4 has been tried to refute White's non-developing mobilisation of BxP. first — K 4 which leads to a rapid the Black forces after 2 P x P, P— Q 3 3 P X P, attack—called the From Gambit —does not move by a pawn sacrifice i. . .P : ; ; But this seem to prevail against the best defence. In a match game, Tartakower-Spielmann (Vienna, 1913), White won as follows : P— Q 4, P—Kt 5 6 Kt— K 5, Kt—Q B 3 7 Kt xKt, PxKt 8 P— K Kt 3, P— K R 4 P—R 5 10 Q— 3, B— Q 2 11 Kt—B 3, R— Kt i; 9 B— Kt 12 Castles, PxP 14 B— B 4, BxB 13 PxP, P— Q B 4 16 Kt— K Q— R 17 Kt x P, Kt— B 3 15 R X B, Q— Kt 4 3 4, ch, K— KtxKt Q— K Q i 20 RxB P, 18 KtxB, 4 19 R— K I 21 QxP, Q—K 6 ch 22 K—B Resigns. When Black plays P—K B 4 in answer to i P — Q 4 we have the Dutch Defence. After i P— Q 4, P— K B 4, WTiite 4 Kt— K B 3. P— K Kt 4 ; 5 ; ; ; ; 2, ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; ; i, ; ; —K can also sacrifice a pawn by 2 P 4, and thereby obtain a far more favourable position than Black does in From's gambit, as he is a move to the good, having already advanced 2 P— K 4. PxP 3 Kt— Q B 3, Kt— K B 3 Q P, P—B 3 or 4 B—Kt 5 and then P—B 3. If Black cap- his 4 e.g. ; ; K B P, White obtains a powerful attack. A drastic example is found in the following little game, played by two students in an academic tournament at Petrograd 4 P B 3, tures the — : PxP; 5 Kt xP, P— K 3 6 B— K Kt 5, B— K 2 7 B— Q 3, Castles 8 Castles, P— Q Kt 3 10 B x 9 Kt— K 5, B— Kt 2 ; ; ; ; ; BxB; II BxP ch, KxB; 12 Q—R 5 ch, K—Kt i; 15 Kt— K 5 13 Kt—Kt 6, R—K I 14 Q— R 8 ch, K— B 2 ch, K— K 2 16 Q xP ch B X Q 17 R—B 7 ch, K—Q 3 18 Kt—Kt 5 ch, K— Q 4 20 R— K i 19 P— B 4 ch, K—K 5 Kt. ; ; ; ! ; !, ; ; ; mate. Black's best answer is to play P (5 E.^Kt 5, B—B 4). play P — Q 4 because of — Q 4 after White's P—K B 3 not yet possible to the threat and B x Kt, Q—R 5 If 4 B— Kt 5, : it is ch, ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 271 In that case Black must first play P—Q B 3, after again obtains a strong attack by P K B 3. White which avoid the attacks which follow after i P Q 4, can Black P—K 4, by playing P— K 3 on his first move, 2 K B P— 4 and then lead into the Datch defence with P— K B 4 on his Q X Q P. — — ; second move. He must, however, reckon with having to play 4. the French defence which White can bring about with 2 P—K P—K 3 P—K 3 3. Kt-K B 3 4. P-Q Kt 3 5. B—Kt 5 2. P-Q B 4 Kt-Q B 3 Kt—B 3 B— Q 2 here, as WTiite can exBlack should have played change at B 6, leaving Black with a doubled pawn. This in itself is not a drawback, but in the present position it is serious, For as Black will have difficulty in finding a place for his Q B. there is no prospect of enforcing P —K 4, as White commands that square in sufficient force. B—K 2 6. B— Kt 2 7. Castles Castles BxQKt 9. Kt— K 5 10. P-Q 3 PxB 8. Q—B 2 P-Q R 4 Black's attempt of capturing his K 4 by playing Kt — Q 2 —B — White would cross at once with Q Kt 4. With the text move Black begins operations on the Q side, which is quite correct, as White has the upper hand on the other wing. and P 3, 11. Q—K 2 White should have prevented the further advance of the Black R P by II P Q R 4. This would have been sound policy in any case, as the R file could not have been forced open for the Black Rooks. — II 12. Kt—Q2 P—R5 PxP The capture is only of value if the file can be Kt 2 and to occupy the R file with Rooks and Queen. After the exchange Premature. held. — To that end it is first necessary to play B CHESS STRATEGY 272 end-game because of Rooks, Black is at a disadvantage for the of the inefficiency of the Q B. m^^m' ^M * §M * m0 IMI M'iWH i W Ml ^ i W WMîM irt Diag. 165. If instead of the text move Black had driven off the Bishop to B I with P—R 6 (13 B—B 3 P— Q 5 ?, — ! ; 14 P xP, Kt— Q 4) he could have enforced his P K 4, but in the long run White would have captured the Q R P, and remained with a passed pawn on the R file, a powerful weapon for the end-game, e.g. B I, Kt— Q 2; 14 KtxKt, BxKt; 12...P— R 6; 13 B 4, foUowed by Kt— Kt i. K B 3 16 K 4, 15 B— P— P— ; P— RPxP RxR 15. P— K Kt 4 13. 14. RxR B— Kt2 The Black pieces being cut off from the K side. White is free to attack. 15. 16. 1718. 19. 20. R—Ri RxRch BxR Q Kt-B 3 KtxKt P— Kt 5 BxKt P—B4 in order to prevent Kt—Q2 Q-R4 the release of the B by the pawn sacrifice P—B 5 and P—B 4. 20 21. K— B 2 B—Kt2 K—Bi ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES 273 S—^ 3 P—R 4 p_R 5 24. P-R6 22. B-Kt 2 P-Kt3 23. By advancing his R P White has weakened Black's KB3 his Kt there and of constant threat of estaUishing with the capturing the R P. 25. K—B I by time move is superfluous and probably dictated of threat the with The proper plan is Q-Q Kt 2 pressure. B—B 7 or Kt 8 and Q—R 8 ch. This : Q-R6 25 26. Q—Q Kt 2 He plays his Kt The end-game is a clear win for White. B 6 or K 5. The effect is twofold. to K Kt 4, threatening to reach m wm mm ^wj ill wm # d P W'« I t ill i fi 1 WA Diag. 166. K must remain near the 2 and his Black must keep his B at Kt 6 and captures the to marches Q B P White's King cannot prevent the Black P. Kt his Q Q B pawns, queening by attacking White, as l, by this White King from doing B back to the force time any at could his B, Black's Q B 4 with The remainder of the game needs no comment. 2. K K B-Q his K QxQ 26 27. 28. BxQ Kt—R 2 B— Q3 K— K I s CHESS STRATEGY 274 29. Kt— Kt 4 ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES c 6. «. Kt-B 3 P_Q 3 B-K 3 Q-Q 2 10. B—K 2 i. 9- 11. Castles 12. KR Kt-Q I 275 B—K3 P-K B 3 Kt— K 2 P-Q B 4 Q Kt-B 3 Kt— Q 5 Castles K Kt-B 3 13. P—B 3 Now Black has gained an advantage from the command The advance of White's Q B P, which was necessiof his Q 5. Knight, has by the dominating position of the Black " backward " pawn at Q 3. left White with a tated 13 .... 14. Qxkt If KtxBch R—Ki now a general exchange takes place after P—Q 4, the K P is lost through B— Q 4. 15. Kt-R 4 White's counter attack on the King's side becomes operations on the Queen's ening, and Black must continue his be called upon at any may as he care, wing with the greatest of the Kmg's defence the for pieces time to concentrate his threat- "'"^- „ 16. 17. 18. Kt—B 5 P—K Kt 4 Kt—B 2 B-KBi K—R I Q—Q 2 P—Q R 4 Black wishes to open up files on the Queen's side. 19. P—Q R 3 Freeing the Q R. 19 20. Q R— Q I R-Q 2 RPxP 23. p_B 4 24. Q—B 3 21. 22. P-QKt4 Q R— Kt I P-Kt 5 KPxP R—R 1 R—^ 7 on the Queen's Before trying to push home his advantage White's Q P, of weakness the by side which is made possible 3:2 CHESS STRATEGY 276 White has colBlack should look after his King's side, where After the text move the lected an alarming array of forces. Rook is quite out of play. 25. P-Kt 3 ? p_Kt 5 Diag. 167. Black should simply play P x P with the following continua28 26 BxP, Kt— Q 5 27 KtxKt, QxKt 3, Q Q 3. After the move in the text, White's attack is overwhelming. tion ; ; : B—K — 26. Kt— Kt 4 ! White obtains a Rook and two pawns for his two Knights an equivalent of material. In the present instance the exchange is of decisive advantage for White, as Black must lose several moves to bring up his Rook for the defence of his unguarded King. ; this is in itself 26 -Kt6, ILLUSTRATIVE GAMES Not 277 BxP because of 34 R—K B 2, followed by K R— K B sq. 34. 35. B—B 3 R—K B 2 Q-Kt 4 The threat is to open the Rook's file by P—Kt 6 with an attack on the King by the Rooks. 35 36. R—Ki QxR RxR BxR m order to play Q—R 4 might be better. With Black has winning chances on But then White might evade the exchange and proceed to seize the King's file with the Rook the board, account of his two Bishops. the Queens after 37 off Q—B 4. R—K 2 R— K 6 in order to play Q—Q Kt 2 or R Q-Q 2 37. 38. 3g. If p_Kt6! Q-Q Kt 2, 40 R—K 8 !, ii B—R I 2. PxP Q—R 2, 40 Q—R 4. wins in either case. 40. 41. Threatens RxP Q—KR2 Q-Kt 3 Q—K 5 oh. 41 42. R—Kt 4! 0-^4 Resigns. White ( 278 ) O t^ N fO VO ^ . ' o • CO ro^*^ ro <0 ....3? CN ;fc »r> C/^ * u%io VO N N N N o O vri ^ N O N M N N CS C) ir> Tf Wl "^ 279 ( ) N O O f^ N N •«*• NMtS f^NC^NNN N N N N \j~i vri Tj- i/^ .M I a< CU « a w ii I l-l •WW w o o I •4 44 o w Pi W c» w |C« •i •X |i I I I pq tr, CO MP? I I cu CO ro fO to '5 m en I I I I I i ti 'J pq T^pq : :« i i : :W CQcQ I : I I (^ I I I I I M M M . fo INDEX Alapin, S., 2oS, 215 Aljechin, A., 164, 174. 196. 255 Amateurs, 154 Asztalos, Dr., 270 Atkins, H. E., 204 French Defence, 44, 198, From's Gambit, 270 Gaining a move, 67 Giuoco Piano, 134. I35. ^38. 141 Backward pawns, 35, 11* Barasz, 227 Barry, 204 Bauer, 25 5 Berger, J., 180 Berlin, 180 Bernstein, Dr., 39, 258 Bird, H. E., 105 Blackbume, J. H., 98, 102, 147, 274 Blanco, 209 Breslau Variation, 175 Bum, A., 117. 126 Gregory, 136 Griffith, R. C.,x, 138 Gunsberg, J., 141. "^11 Gunston, W. H., 1 38 Capablanca, T. R, 42, 134, 164, 182, Janowski, D., 105, 184, 209, 236, 241, 249, 255, 258 Caro-Kann, 43, 5°. 229, 232 Centre, 27 Centre Counter, 43. 225, 227 Centre Gambit, 34 Charousek, R., 108 Cohn, E., 120, 234 Cole, 194 Danish Gambit, 33 Distant Opposition, 80, 85, 100 Distant passed pawn, 77, 99 Doubled pawns, 32, 115 Dus Chotimirski, 261 Dutch Defence, 61 Dutch Opening, 270 Elementary, i Elementary combinations, 9 Elementary end-games, 64 End-game, 63 End-games from master-play, 97 England. F., 19 Esser, Dr., 200 Falkbeer Counter Gambit, 35. 129 Fixing an objective, 1 1 Forced move, 45. 87. 245 Forgacz, 106, 198, 234 Four Knights' Game, i»8, 193 200, 204. 206, 209, 21 Hart, J., x, 3 Heinrichsen, 108 HoweU, C. S., 135 Irregular Openings, 62, 263, 267, 270, 274 Isolated pawns, 82 159. 175. 188, 223 John, 223 King's Bishop's Opening, 34 King's Gambit, 30, 126 King's Pawn Games, 29, 126-233 Knight's move. 3 Lasker, -Ed,, 84, 100,120,123, 164,182, 188, 193, 194. 196, 225, 241, 250, 267 Lasker, Dr. Em., 39- 42, i47. 171. ^75. 184, 206, 224, 229, 236, 254 Lazard, Fred., 123 Leonhardt, S. P., 87. 129 Losing a move, 2 MacCutcheon, 207 Manceuvring of pieces, 119 Maroczy, G., 180 Marshall, F. J., "7. 129, 144, 150, 236 Mason, J., 141 Max Lange Attack, 144, 1 55 Middle Game, 109 Mieses, J., 225, 227 Mitchell. 135 Mobility, 18 MoU, K., 84, 88 Moller Attack, 135 Morphy, P., 23 381 1 INDEX 282 NiEMZOWITSCH, A., Si, 174, 211, 229, 252 Salwe, 150 V. Scheve, 116 Schlechter, C, 102, 159, 167, 171, 224 Notation, $ Objective, hi Opening, the, 20 Open files and diagonals, 121 Opposition, 70 Opposition (Distant), 80, 85, 100 Paulsen, L., 218 Pawn endings, 70 Pawn play, 26 Pawn skeleton, 26, 1 11 Pillsbury, H. N., Pin, 12, 16, 113 Post, 87, 88 1 56 Prokes, 132 Queen's Counter Gambit, 60 Queen's Gambit, 54, 234 Queen's Pawn Games, 52, 234-267 Scotch Gambit, 34 Scotch Game, 34, 147 Shattered pawn position, 115 Sicilian Defence, 52, 215,218, 220, 223 Simple calculation, 10, 13 Spielmann, R., 132, 170, 218, 220, 263, 270 Steiner, 106 Steinitz, W., 156 Stonewall, 58 Tarrasch, Dr. S., 42, 134, 144, 170, 182, 206, 211, 220, 252 Tartakower, Dr., 126, 198, 232, 270 Teichmann, R., 98, 116, 154, 163, 164, 167, 218, 241, 242 Thomas, G. A., 267 Two Knights' Defence, i 50, 1 54 Three Knights' Defence, 196 Value of pieces, 1 Reti, 232 Riga, 180 Riga Variation, 159, 180 Rio de Janeiro Variation, 40 Rotlewi, 100, 241, 246 Rubinstein. A. K., 50, 163, 215, 242, 246, 249, 263 Ruy Lopez, 36, 159-188 Vidmar, Dr., 261 Vienna Game, 35, 132 Weaknesses in a pawn position, 83, 103, 109, 114, 117 White, J. H., X Yates, F. D., 177, 200 Printed by Spottiswoode, Ballantyne 6* Co. Colchester, London (J- Eton, England Lxa

Chess Strategy by Edward Lasker

Documentos relacionados

Productos

Apoyo

Chess Strategy by Edward Lasker

Documentos relacionados

Añadir este documento a la recogida (s)

Añadir a este documento guardado

Sugiéranos cómo mejorar StudyLib